Antenna Measurement Software EMQuest EMQ100 39978… · Antenna Measurement Software EMQuest ......

Antenna Measurement Software EMQuest™ EMQ100

Users Manual

©ETS-Lindgren, August 2006 Revision A, Part # 399783

EMQuest™EMQ100 Antenna Pattern Measurement Software

ETS-Lindgren reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve functioning or design. Although the information in this document has been carefully reviewed and is believed to be reliable, ETS-Lindgren does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

©Copyright 2006 by ETS-Lindgren L.P. All Rights Reserved. No part of this document may be copied by any means without written permission from ETS-Lindgren L.P.

Revision Description Date A Initial Release August, 2006

Internet Address http://www.ETS-Lindgren.com

USA 1301 Arrow Point Drive, Cedar Park, TX 78613 USA

P O Box 80589, Austin, TX 78708-0589 USA Tel: +1.512.531.6400 Fax: +1.512.531-6500

Email: [email protected] Finland

Mekaanikontie 1, 27510, Eura, Finland Tel: +358.2.838.330

Fax: +358.2.865.1233 Email: [email protected]

Japan 4-2-6, Kohinata

Bunkyo-ku, Tokyo 112-0006 Japan Tel: +81.3.3813.7100 Fax: +81.3.3813.8068

Email: [email protected] China

B507A Technology Fortune Center No. 8 Xue Qing Road

Haidian District Beijing Postcode: 100083 China

Tel: +86.010.827.30877 Fax: +86.010.827.55307

Email: [email protected]

©ETS-Lindgren, August 2006 Rev. A, P#399783

http://www.ets-lindgren.com/


Table of Contents 1 Introduction to EMQuest 1

2 Help File Organization 3

3 Introduction 5 3.1 Graphing and Report Generation ....................................................... 6 3.2 Test Packages.................................................................................... 6 3.3 Equipment Drivers .............................................................................. 7

4 Getting Started 9 4.1 Installation .......................................................................................... 9

4.1.1 License Certificates ...................................................................... 9 4.2 Registration ...................................................................................... 11 4.3 Equipment Setup .............................................................................. 12 4.4 Test Parameters ............................................................................... 13 4.5 Running a Test ................................................................................. 14 4.6 Output Templates ............................................................................. 15

5 EMQuest Revision History 17 5.1 Changes to Version 1.06 Since Version 1.05................................... 17 5.2 Changes to Version 1.04 Since Version 1.03................................... 30 5.3 Changes to Version 1.03 since Version 1.02 ................................... 34 5.4 Changes to Version 1.02 Since Version 1.01................................... 35 5.5 Changes to Version 1.01 Since Version 1.00................................... 38

6 Tips of the Day 43

7 License, Copyright, and Warranty 47 7.1 EMQuest License Agreement .......................................................... 47

7.1.1 License Agreement..................................................................... 47 7.1.2 Acceptance ................................................................................. 47 7.1.3 License Types............................................................................. 47

7.2 Uses Permitted ................................................................................. 48 7.3 Uses Not Permitted .......................................................................... 48 7.4 Upgrades and Revisions .................................................................. 49 7.5 Preliminary Releases........................................................................ 49 7.6 General ............................................................................................. 49

7.6.1 Limited Warranty......................................................................... 50 7.6.2 Limitation of Liability ................................................................... 50 7.6.3 Copyright Statement................................................................... 51

8 Menus and Controls 53 8.1 Main Menu........................................................................................ 53

8.1.1 Main Menu Submenus................................................................ 65



8.1.1.1 Graph Component............................................................. 65 8.1.1.2 Exporting and Copying...................................................... 65

8.1.2 Graph Control Bar....................................................................... 66 8.1.3 Graph Settings Dialog ................................................................ 69

8.2 Data Table Component .................................................................... 75 8.2.1 Exporting and Copying ............................................................... 75

8.2.1.1 Viewing All Data vs. Selected Points ................................ 76 8.3 Document Editor/Report Generator.................................................. 76

8.3.1 Template Editor .......................................................................... 76 8.4 Data File Window ............................................................................. 77

8.4.1 Test Parameters Page................................................................ 77 8.4.2 Graph Page ................................................................................ 79 8.4.3 Table Page ................................................................................. 79 8.4.4 Measurement Progress Page..................................................... 79

8.5 Equipment Control Panel.................................................................. 80 8.5.1 Equipment Configurations .......................................................... 81 8.5.2 Ancillary Configurations.............................................................. 81 8.5.3 Equipment Configuration Pane................................................... 82

9 Licensing and Registration 83 9.1 Entering License Certificates............................................................ 83

9.1.1 Entering Registration Information ............................................... 83 9.2 Submitting Registration Information ................................................. 85

10 Tools 87 10.1 Options Dialog .................................................................................. 87 10.2 Tabular Data Graphing Tool ............................................................. 91

11 Measurements 93 11.1 Generic Test Parameters ................................................................. 93

11.1.1 IUT Panes................................................................................. 93 11.1.2 Operator/Comments Pane........................................................ 94 11.1.3 Frequency Range Pane............................................................ 95 11.1.4 Corrections Pane...................................................................... 97 11.1.5 Paths Pane ............................................................................... 98 11.1.6 Output Pane.............................................................................. 99 11.1.7 Notification Pane..................................................................... 100 11.1.8 Ancillary Equipment Pane ...................................................... 101

11.2 Batch Tests..................................................................................... 102 11.2.1 Running Batch Tests Using EMQuest Introduction................ 102 11.2.2 Configuring a Batch Test ........................................................ 103

11.2.2.1 Individual Test Setup..................................................... 103 11.2.2.2 Parameters.................................................................... 103 11.2.2.3 Running a Batch Test.................................................... 104

11.2.3 Batch Select Pane, Batch Test Measurements...................... 104 11.3 Pattern Measurement ..................................................................... 105

11.3.1 Pattern Measurement Basics Introduction ............................. 105



11.3.2 Measurement Techniques ...................................................... 106 11.3.2.1 Method 1: Conical Sections ......................................... 108 11.3.2.2 Method 2: Great Circle ................................................. 109 11.3.2.3 Comparison of Methods................................................ 111 11.3.2.4 Two-Axis Positioners—The Best of Both Worlds.......... 112 11.3.2.5 3-D Patterns .................................................................. 113 11.3.2.6 Near-Field Versus Far-Field Measurements................. 113 11.3.2.7 Converting from Near Field to Far Field........................ 115 11.3.2.8 Range Calibration ......................................................... 116 11.3.2.9 Friis Transmission Equation.......................................... 118 11.3.2.10 Total Radiated Power.................................................. 120 11.3.2.11 Range Calibration, Part 2............................................ 122 11.3.2.12 Accounting for VSWR ................................................. 124 11.3.2.13 Gain, Directivity, Efficiency, and EIRP........................ 126 11.3.2.14 Applying the Range Calibration .................................. 129 11.3.2.15 Other Antenna Properties ........................................... 130 11.3.2.16 Reversing the Flow – Total Isotropic Power Received131 11.3.2.17 CTIA Requirements..................................................... 135 11.3.2.18 Numerical Considerations........................................... 136 11.3.2.19 Summary..................................................................... 143

12 Making Pattern Measurements Using EMQuest 145 12.1 Introduction..................................................................................... 145 12.2 Pattern Measurement Test Types .................................................. 145

12.2.1 Scalar Pattern Measurements ................................................ 146 12.2.2 Vector Pattern Measurements................................................ 146 12.2.3 Sensitivity Pattern Measurements .......................................... 146 12.2.4 Throughput Pattern Measurements........................................ 147 12.2.5 Configuring a Pattern Test...................................................... 147

12.2.5.1 Hardware Setup ............................................................ 147 12.2.5.2 Parameters.................................................................... 148

12.3 Mobile Phone Testing..................................................................... 152 12.4 CTIA Testing................................................................................... 155 12.5 Running a Pattern Test................................................................... 156

13 Post Processing 157 13.1 Test Parameters ............................................................................. 161

13.1.1 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Single-Polarization Pattern Measurement 161 13.1.2 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Dual-Polarization Pattern Measurement 167 13.1.3 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Single-Polarization Pattern Measurement 172 13.1.4 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Dual-Polarization Pattern Measurement 180 13.1.5 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Sensitivity Pattern Measurement187



13.1.5.1 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Sensitivity Pattern Measurement 190 13.1.6 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Throughput Pattern Measurement 195 13.1.7 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Throughput Pattern Measurement198 13.1.8 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Vector Pattern Measurement 202 13.1.9 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Vector Pattern Measurement ... 207 13.1.10 Equipment Pane, Pattern Measurement Test ...................... 213 13.1.11 Correction Preferences Frame, Radiated Patterns .............. 214 13.1.12 Correction Preferences Frame, Sensitivity Patterns ............ 215 13.1.13 Corrections Pane, Vector Pattern Tests............................... 217

14 Response Measurement 219 14.1 Making Response Measurements using EMQuest ........................ 219

14.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................. 219 14.1.2 Configuring a Response Test ................................................. 220

14.1.2.1 Hardware Setup ............................................................ 220 14.1.2.2 Parameters.................................................................... 220 14.1.2.3 Running a Response Test ............................................ 222 14.1.2.4 Parameters Pane, Response Measurement................. 223 14.1.2.5 Equipment Pane, Response Measurement .................. 224 14.1.2.6 Parameters Pane, Time Dependent Response Measurement 225 14.1.2.7 Parameters Pane, Communication Tester Frequency Response Measurement.................................................................................. 228

14.2 Equipment ...................................................................................... 229 14.2.1 Equipment Types.................................................................... 229

14.3 Communication Testers.................................................................. 233 14.3.1 Agilent 8960............................................................................ 233 14.3.2 Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 .................................................. 233

14.3.2.1 Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 ............ 233 14.3.2.2 Band Handoffs .............................................................. 237 14.3.2.3 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 AMPS 237 14.3.2.4 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA 239 14.3.2.5 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA 2000 244 14.3.2.6 Network ......................................................................... 250 14.3.2.7 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 GSM 251 14.3.2.8 Measurement Optimization ........................................... 255 14.3.2.9 P/T Measurement.......................................................... 259 14.3.2.10 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 TDMA 265 14.3.2.11 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 WCDMA 266 14.3.2.12 Measurement Optimization ......................................... 271 14.3.2.13 Signaling ..................................................................... 273 14.3.2.14 Establish Call Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200.... 275

14.3.3 Initiating a Call ........................................................................ 276 14.3.4 Aborting a Call Attempt........................................................... 277 14.3.5 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 ....................... 277



14.3.6 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA............ 278 14.3.7 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA 2000 ..279 14.3.8 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 GSM.............. 280 14.3.9 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 WCDMA ........ 282

14.4 Positioners...................................................................................... 284 14.4.1 ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Positioner..................................... 284

14.4.1.1 Positioner Ancillary Frame ............................................ 284 14.4.1.2 Positioner Equipment Frame ........................................ 285 14.4.1.3 Positioner Exercise Dialog ............................................ 286

14.4.2 ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner ..... 290 14.4.2.1 Ancillary Parameter Frame, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner.......................................................................... 290 14.4.2.2 Configuration Settings, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner 291 14.4.2.3 Exercise Dialog, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner 292 14.4.2.4 Equipment Parameters, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner 295

14.5 Power Meters ................................................................................. 296 14.5.1 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz NRVD Power Meter296

14.6 Network Analyzers.......................................................................... 298 14.6.1 Configuration Settings, Generic Network Analyzer ................ 298 14.6.2 Advantest R376x Series ......................................................... 300

14.6.2.1 Configuration Settings, Advantest R376x Series.......... 300 14.6.2.2 Equipment Parameters, Advantest R376x Series ........ 302 14.6.2.3 Trace Information settings, including: ........................... 302 14.6.2.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including: ............. 303

14.6.3 Agilent/HP 8510...................................................................... 306 14.6.3.1 Configuration Settings, Agilent 8510............................. 306 14.6.3.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 8510 ........................... 308 14.6.3.3 Trace Information Settings, including:........................... 309

14.6.4 Agilent/HP 872X Series .......................................................... 313 14.6.4.1 Configuration Settings, Agilent 8720............................. 313 14.6.4.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 8720 ........................... 314 14.6.4.3 Trace Information settings, including: ........................... 315 14.6.4.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including: ............. 315

14.6.5 Agilent/HP 875X Series .......................................................... 319 14.6.5.1 Configuration Settings, Agilent 8753............................. 319 14.6.5.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 8753 ........................... 321 14.6.5.3 Trace Information settings, including: ........................... 321 14.6.5.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including: ............. 321

14.6.6 Agilent ENA Series ................................................................. 325 14.6.6.1 Configuration Parameters, Agilent ENA Series ............ 325 14.6.6.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent ENA Series................. 327 14.6.6.3 Trace Information settings, including: ........................... 328 14.6.6.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including: ............. 328



14.6.7 Agilent PNA Series ................................................................. 332 14.6.7.1 Configuration Settings, Agilent PNA Series .................. 332 14.6.7.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent PNA Series................. 333 14.6.7.3 Trace Information settings, including: ........................... 334 14.6.7.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including: ............. 334

14.6.8 Rohde & Schwarz ZVC, ZVR, ZVM, ZVK Series ................... 338 14.6.8.1 Configuration Settings, Rohde & Schwarz ZVC, ZVR, ZVM, ZVK Series 338 14.6.8.2 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz ZVC, ZVR, ZVM, ZVK Series 341 14.6.8.3 Trace Information settings, including: ........................... 342 14.6.8.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including: ............. 342

14.6.9 Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, ZVT Series.............................. 347 14.6.9.1 Configuration Settings, Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, ZVT Series 347 14.6.9.2 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, ZVT Series 350 14.6.9.3 Trace Information settings, including: ........................... 350 14.6.9.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including: ............. 351

14.7 Spectrum Analyzers ....................................................................... 354 14.7.1 Equipment Parameters, Spectrum Analyzers ........................ 354 14.7.2 Configuration Settings, Agilent 85XX Spectrum Analyzers.... 362 14.7.3 Configuration Settings, Rohde & Schwarz FSP ..................... 363 14.7.4 Configuration Settings, Generic Spectrum Analyzer .............. 364

14.8 Switches ......................................................................................... 367 14.8.1 Agilent 11713A Switch Driver ................................................. 367

14.8.1.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver 367 14.8.1.2 Configuration Parameters, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver368 14.8.1.3 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver 371 14.8.1.4 Exercise Dialog, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver ............ 373

14.8.2 Agilent 3499 Switch Controller ............................................... 373 14.8.2.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller 373 14.8.2.2 Configuration Parameters, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller374 14.8.2.3 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller376 14.8.2.4 Exercise Dialog, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller........... 377

14.8.3 ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports ............................. 377 14.8.3.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports 377 14.8.3.2 Configuration Settings, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports 378 14.8.3.3 Equipment Parameters, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports 379 14.8.3.4 Exercise Dialog, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports 380

14.8.4 LPT Parallel Port..................................................................... 380



14.8.4.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, LPT Parallel Port Switch381 14.8.4.2 Configuration Settings, LPT Parallel Port Switch.......... 381 14.8.4.3 Equipment Parameters, LPT Parallel Port Switch ........ 382 14.8.4.4 Exercise Dialog, LPT Parallel Port Switch .................... 383

14.8.5 PMJ TVi9901 .......................................................................... 383 14.8.5.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay383 14.8.5.2 Configuration Parameters, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay ..... 385 14.8.5.3 Equipment Parameters, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay ......... 386 14.8.5.4 Exercise Dialog, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay ..................... 388

14.8.6 Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP..................................................... 389 14.8.6.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform ............................................................................. 389 14.8.6.2 Configuration Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform 390 14.8.6.3 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform 393 14.8.6.4 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform 395

14.9 Throughput Testers ........................................................................ 396 14.9.1 Equipment Parameters, NetIQ Chariot................................... 396 14.9.2 Equipment Parameters, EMQuest Windows Sockets Client .. 397

14.10 Variable Attenuators....................................................................... 400 14.10.1 Configuration Parameters, Agilent 11713A Variable Attenuator400 14.10.2 Equipment Parameters, Variable Attenuator........................ 401 14.10.3 Exercise Dialog, Variable Attenuator.................................... 402

14.11 Hybrids ........................................................................................... 402 14.11.1 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Dual Receivers................... 402 14.11.2 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Positioner and Switch......... 403 14.11.3 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Receiver and Switch .......... 403 14.11.4 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Communication Tester and Receiver 404 14.11.5 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Communication Tester and Dual Receivers 405 14.11.6 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Communication Tester, Receiver, and Switch 406 14.11.7 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Throughput Tester and Attenuator 407 14.11.8 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Series-Combined RF Attenuators 409 14.11.9 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Throughput Tester, Attenuator, and Switch 410

14.12 Manual Drivers ............................................................................... 410 14.12.1 Equipment Parameters, Manual Entry Analyzer .................. 410 14.12.2 Manual Entry Dialog ............................................................. 411 14.12.3 Manual Positioner Dialog...................................................... 411 14.12.4 Configuration Parameters, Manual Variable Attenuator....... 411

14.13 Data Table Generator .................................................................... 412 14.14 Data Selector ................................................................................. 412



14.15 Trace Information Settings, 8510................................................... 413 14.16 Calibration/Measurement Port Settings ......................................... 414 14.17 Calibration Settings, 8510 .............................................................. 414 14.18 Time Gate Settings ........................................................................ 415 14.19 Equipment Parameters, Generic Receivers................................... 415 14.20 GPIB Configuration Settings .......................................................... 416 14.21 Installed Options, 87XX.................................................................. 417 14.22 Installed Options, 8510 .................................................................. 417 14.23 Absolute/Relative Port Definitions.................................................. 417 14.24 Equipment Parameters, Switch Array ............................................ 418 14.25 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Communication Tester and Switch419 14.26 Corrections Pane, Vector Response Test...................................... 420 14.27 Ancillary Equipment Selection Pane .............................................. 421

15 Ancillary Equipment 423 15.1 Correction Preferences Frame, Vector Patterns ............................ 423

16 Performing Range Calibrations using EMQuest 425 16.1 Theoretical Background.................................................................. 425 16.2 Calibrating an Active Antenna Measurement Range ..................... 428

16.2.1 Procedure for Calibrating an Active Antenna Measurement Range 431 16.2.1.1 Equipment required....................................................... 431

16.2.2 Test Procedure ....................................................................... 433 16.2.2.1 Measurement Step 1: Cable Calibration...................... 434 16.2.2.2 Measurement Step 2: Range Calibration..................... 436 16.2.2.3 Calculating the Range Path Loss.................................. 438

16.2.3 Calibrating a Passive Antenna Measurement Range............. 438 17 Equipment Instance 443

17.1 Fields .............................................................................................. 443 17.2 Antenna Property Calculations....................................................... 443 17.3 Antenna Attributes .......................................................................... 443 17.4 Correction File Generator Tool ....................................................... 444

18 License Certificate 447

19 Wireless Channel Tool 449



1 Introduction to EMQuest Welcome to EMQuest™, a versatile data acquisition and analysis software package. EMQuest is a modular data acquisition system consisting of the EMQuest application and a variety of test and equipment modules. The EMQuest application provides all of the functionality required for parameter entry, data acquisition, data analysis, and report generation. It utilizes all of the latest Windows capabilities to provide a powerful and easy to navigate environment. The modular data acquisition system makes the EMQuest software continually expandable. Test and equipment modules provide the required data acquisition capability. New modules can be added to enhance the data acquisition functionality as needed. For details on each of these capabilities, see the introduction.

©ETS-Lindgren, August, 2006 Rev. A, P#399783

1


This page intentionally left blank.

2 ©ETS-Lindgren, August 2006 Rev. A, P#399783


2 Help File Organization The EMQuest application provides context sensitive help for most of its elements. This can be accessed in most cases by using the "What’s This?" option signified by the or buttons or by selecting a control and pressing F1. Documentation for more general information, such as test specific information and features can be found using the table of contents.

Some general topics of interest include:

Introduction

Getting Started

Main Menu

Pattern Measurement Basics

Making Pattern Measurements using EMQuest

Making Response Measurements using EMQuest

Performing Range Calibrations using EMQuest


3





3 Introduction EMQuest™ is a versatile data acquisition and analysis software package marketed under a number of model numbers providing configurations for specific applications. EMQuest is a modular data acquisition system consisting of the EMQuest application and a variety of test and equipment modules. The EMQuest application provides all of the functionality required for parameter entry, data acquisition, data analysis, and report generation. It utilizes all of the latest Windows capabilities to provide a powerful and easy to navigate environment. The modular data acquisition system makes the EMQuest software continually expandable. Test and equipment modules provide the required data acquisition capability. New modules can be added to enhance the data acquisition functionality as needed. Specific sets of modules are grouped together to offer functionality for a given application, and marketed under one of several EMQ-XXX model numbers. The available EMQuest products include the following:

EMQ-100 Antenna Pattern Measurement Software offers fully automated 2-D (polar/linear) and 3-D (spherical/cylindrical/planar) pattern measurement capabilities as well as frequency response measurements for both passive antennas and active wireless mobile stations (cell phones). This full-featured package includes all of the functionality of the core package listed below, including a customizable report generator, advanced graphing and data acquisition capabilities, and various tools for an enhanced user experience.

EMQ-100 Lite Antenna Pattern Measurement Software offers fully automated 2-D (polar) and semi-automated 3-D (spherical) pattern measurement capabilities for passive antennas only. This entry-level package includes only a small subset of the tests and features offered in the full EMQ-100 package. It does not support multi-axis positioning systems or active antenna measurements. Addition of unsupported features requires an upgrade to the full EMQ-100 package.

EMQ-105 Network Throughput Test Package is an optional expansion to the EMQ-100 package that adds automated 2-D and 3-D pattern and attenuation response testing of the network throughput of wireless networking components.


5


Parameter Entry and Data Acquisition

Note: A convenient tree-view structure organizes input parameters in an easily navigated hierarchy, allowing modification of any parameter with only a few mouse clicks. Parameters, graphs, and tables are displayed on separate tabs to allow maximized viewing area while still providing quick access to any piece of information. Running a test is as simple as loading a pre-saved parameter file and pressing the "Play" button. All acquired data is automatically stored in a raw format data file, insuring that preprocessed data can always be recovered. Data can be located quickly by model, serial number, test date, etc.

3.1 Graphing and Report Generation Advanced graphing capabilities allow acquired data to be displayed in a variety of 2D and 3D formats. Tabular data can be exported to Microsoft® Excel spreadsheets and reports can be saved in RTF format for import to Microsoft Word or exported to PDF files. The report generator uses a powerful document style template scheme to allow automatic generation of output without the limitations of "banding" type report generators. A template editor links to existing data sets for editing in a "What you see is what you get" (WYSIWYG) environment. Multiple data sets, tests parameters, and templates can be manipulated in memory at once with the multiple document interface (MDI).

3.2 Test Packages EMQuest supports a variety of test packages, each often containing a number of individual test modules. The test packages and modules available will depend on the package purchased and the license certificate used to enable the software. Available packages include the pattern measurement package (provided with the EMQ-100 software package), which provides single and dual axis (2D and 3D) antenna pattern measurements and the associated post-processing. Another common package is the response calibration package for capturing frequency response and VSWR curves from supported test equipment.



3.3 Equipment Drivers Equipment drivers are included to control a variety of linear and rotational positioners using the ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 controller as well as the ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner. Standard drivers are also available for most frequently used vector or scalar network analyzers, spectrum analyzers, power meters, and communication analyzers for single and/or dual channel data acquisitions. Hybrid drivers allow combining two or more dissimilar devices to function as another more complex device. For example, two power meters, or a power meter and a spectrum analyzer could be used in place of a dual channel receiver.


7





4 Getting Started

4.1 Installation In order to proceed with the installation of EMQuest, you must be logged on to the computer as the administrator. To start the installation, insert the CD into your CD-ROM drive. If Autorun is disabled, browse to the CD and double click on setup.exe. Follow the on-screen directions provided by InstallShield. You must read and agree to the license agreement before proceeding with the installation. The install software will allow you to select which options to install. Select the desired destination directory for the application and any other required information. For updates to existing installations, the InstallShield will automatically update the software with the previously selected options. If new options have been added to the install, it will be necessary to run the install again in maintenance mode in order to add those options.

Minimum System Requirements Pentium III 1000 MHz or compatible

Windows™ 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional

64 MB RAM

100 MB free hard drive space

CD-ROM Drive

3.5" Floppy Drive

National Instruments GPIB card

Recommended System Requirements Pentium 4 2500 MHz or compatible

Windows™ 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional

128 MB RAM

1 GB free hard drive space

CD-R/W Drive

3.5" Floppy Drive

National Instruments GPIB card

4.1.1 License Certificates

The first time that the EMQuest application is started, it will prompt the user to enter a license certificate. EMQuest uses a certificate based registration scheme to control the functionality available from the software package. The certificate contains information on the available features, tests, and equipment that the end user is authorized to use. There are three primary types of license certificates:


9


Demonstration Certificate – This certificate enables EMQuest in demo mode for the duration of the certificate. A number of demo test and equipment modules are available to allow the user to explore the capabilities of the EMQuest package. Certain features are disabled or have limited functionality.

Temporary/Trial Mode Certificate – This certificate enables EMQuest in trial mode for the duration of the certificate (typically one month from the date of issue). While in trial mode, the software will be fully functional with all features authorized by the license. It may also be installed on any machine. This provides the opportunity to easily evaluate all features of the software and learn the functionality prior to making a final installation.

Registration Certificate – This certificate permanently enables the software with all of the features that the user has purchased under the license and restricts the usage to a single machine.

The software ships with either a demonstration certificate or a temporary/trial mode certificate, depending on the circumstances. For evaluation purposes prior to purchase, a demo certificate is provided to allow operation without any special setup or test equipment. A trial certificate may be provided for evaluation in cases where the necessary test equipment is already available.

Upon purchase, a temporary certificate is provided with the software to allow the user to immediately begin using the software. Once the desired configuration has been determined, a permanent registration certificate can be obtained for that machine configuration by simply filling out the registration information from within the EMQuest application and e-mailing it in. This gives the opportunity for multiple users to learn the software, and to investigate different configurations prior to restricting the usage to one single license. Depending on the circumstances at the time of delivery, the temporary certificate may not have the exact configuration purchased by the customer. Additional and/or different test and/or equipment drivers may be enabled in trial mode to allow the user to explore enhancements to the test system. However, registration certificates will always be restricted to only those drivers purchased by the customer. Additional drivers are always available for a modest upgrade fee. For cases where additional licenses are desired for post processing, data analysis, and report generation, additional



licenses may be purchased without data acquisition capability at a reduced cost.

The certificate will be contained in a text file either on a floppy disk or the distribution CD, or may be received through e-mail. When prompted by the EMQuest application, simply copy and paste the license information into the space provided. When changing license information (i.e. after registration), the new certificate can be entered under the Help : License… menu item.

4.2 Registration In order to permanently enable the EMQuest software with all licensed features, it is necessary to send in a registration form and certificate in order to receive a full registration certificate. From the certificate entry dialog accessed under the Help : License menu item, press the Register… button to bring up the registration dialog. Enter all of the requested information and press the Send button to automatically e-mail the registration, or press the Register… button to allow copying the registration information to an e-mail or file. You will then receive a registration certificate that will permanently enable the software on that machine.

Note: Registration is only required if you have purchased a fully licensed copy of EMQuest. If you are using a demo or evaluation copy of EMQuest, please do not send in the registration information.

Note: Registration certificates are only provided after receipt of payment for the software or test system installation, and after all optional equipment configurations have been defined.


11


4.3 Equipment Setup Prior to configuring a test, it is necessary to configure the EMQuest application with specific information regarding the test equipment attached to the computer. This is done using the Equipment Control Panel under the Equipment : Setup Equipment… menu item. A tree-view on the left hand side of the control panel will contain a list of device types (network analyzers, towers, turntables, etc.) for each type of device driver available under the current license. Under each device type will be a list of the available drivers for that device type. Right click on the device driver name and select add new to add a new instance of that device. The new instance of the device will appear under the device driver name in the tree-view, and the configuration information for that device will appear in the pane to the right. Clicking on the device name will allow the device to be renamed to a user-defined name. Enter all device configuration information such as GPIB address and available options. Right clicking on the device instance name will allow duplication or deletion of that instance.

Add and configure a driver instance for every piece of equipment needed for the desired tests. It may be necessary to add more than one instance of a given device type. For instance, it may be necessary to define two receivers and two rotational positioners for a dual polarized two-axis spherical pattern measurement. Insure that all attached equipment have unique GPIB addresses and that the drivers are configured to match.

Once configured, device drivers that offer a manual control dialog will show up under the Equipment menu item. Select the device name under the menu item to bring up the dialog. This feature is typically provided for positioning devices, where it may be desirable to manually adjust the position of an instrument under test (IUT) prior to executing a test.



4.4 Test Parameters Once the test equipment has been installed and configured, it is then possible to configure a test parameter file with all of the information necessary to perform the desired measurements. Use the File : New : Parameters menu item, or press the associated menu button, to create a new test parameter window. An MDI child window will be displayed containing a single tab labeled "Parameters", with a tree-view on the left hand side containing a single entry, "Test Information", and a combo-box in the right hand pane labeled "Test Selection". Selecting one of the available tests from the combo-box will add a variety of node entries into the tree-view list. Each node of the tree-view will have a configuration pane associated with it for parameter entry. This method of parameter entry allows quick access and review of all parameters necessary for the test.

Typical parameter nodes include:

Test Information is used for selection of the desired test and entry of IUT information.

Operator/Comments is used for entry of test operator information, comments, and similar information.

Parameters is used for entry of test specific parameters.

Corrections is used for entry or selection of correction factors for various measurement components (i.e. cable loss, amplifier gain, range calibrations, etc.). This may be have one panel for all corrections, or, for more complicated tests, may open to branches with panels for each specific type of correction data.

Frequency Range(s) is a placeholder for a list of parameters for multi-range tests, or contains the frequency range information for single range tests.

Range # is used for entering range specific configuration information. Additional nodes beneath this one provide additional range specific configurations for equipment, etc. Note that not all equipment will support all possible configurations offered by this node.

Equipment is used for selection of test equipment supported by the test for the corresponding range. Each selected piece of equipment will add a node to the tree-view beneath the Equipment node, allowing entry of test specific equipment configuration information (i.e. bandwidth, points per trace, rotational speed, etc.)

Paths allows entry of source and output directories/files that differ from the default paths configured under Tools : Options….


13


Output allows the entry of selected data points for interpolated/extrapolated output.

Notification allows configuring an alert sound or e-mail notification at the completion of the test. The settings in this dialog will override the global notifications settings in the Tools : Options… menu.

Ancillary Equipment allows selecting specialized settings for specific types of equipment (i.e. switches and positioners) not normally required to perform the test, in order to set them to predefined states at certain points in the test.

Once all of the test parameters have been entered, the configuration can be saved to a file, allowing test parameters to be pre-configured and then used repeatedly without any additional setup.

4.5 Running a Test Once a parameter set has been configured or loaded, running a test is as simple as pressing the "Run Test" button or selecting Run : Run Test from the main menu. If all of the parameters are correctly configured, the test will initialize and/or calibrate all test equipment as necessary and then start the data acquisition, prompting the user for action as necessary. During the test, intermediate data and test status will be displayed to allow tracking of the test. Upon completion, all necessary post processing will be performed and the data will automatically be stored to a raw data file and logged to a test-tracking database. The raw data file contains the measured data prior to post processing, along with all of the test parameters used to acquire the data and any corrections necessary to generate the final resulting data. Once stored, the raw data file is shown in a new window, providing both graphical and tabular views of the resulting data.



4.6 Output Templates While the data acquired by the EMQuest package can be easily exported to Microsoft Excel for external post processing or report generation, EMQuest also offers a powerful user configurable data output and report generation capability. The output capability is built around a word processor style template editor that allows editing the template in a "what you see is what you get" (WYSIWYG) environment. Fields for desired parameters, graphs, or tabular data can be entered into the template and formatted as necessary. Once the template has been created, it may be selected under the "Output" node of the test parameters in order to format the data output. Formatted output can be printed directly or exported to an RTF file to be imported into Microsoft Word or other word processor for additional modifications.


15





5 EMQuest Revision History The following lists the revisions to the EMQuest package since its release.

5.1 Changes to Version 1.06 Since Version 1.05 Added packet switched measurement capabilities

(GPRS/EGPRS) to CMU-200 GSM driver, including BLER based sensitivity measurements.

Added support for multislot measurements for circuit switched and packet switched modes in CMU-200 GSM driver.

Added support for WCDMA testing with CMU-200 WCDMA driver option.

Added a variable paging timer and page count to CMU-200 auto-connect functionality.

Added options to GSM (and WCDMA) sensitivity measurements to use RSSI to optimize measurements and decrease test time.

Added basic band handoff capability to GSM and CDMA 2000 options of CMU-200.

Added support for the use of a registration channel (primarily for CDMA) to force the CMU back to an original registration channel upon loss of a call.

Made channel setting functions avoid sending new channel to CMU when it is the same as the current channel (removes additional delay due to the CMU still initiating channel handoff even when the channel doesn’t change).

Added work-arounds for some of the bugs in the CMU-200 that caused hangs and/or red brick screens.

Added introductory support for the Agilent 8960 communication tester (primarily GSM/CDMA/CDMA 2000).

Added support for power meters as measurement instruments for pattern measurements.

Added support for the Rohde & Schwarz NRVD dual channel power meter.

Added a Communication Tester/Dual channel receiver hybrid for support of dual channel power meters.


17


Added a warning message box to alert the user if correction data is extrapolated during corrections. (Usually caused by performing measurements outside the frequency range of the reference antenna and/or test range calibrations.)

Changed behavior of graphing/labeling functionality to automatically determine when the given data is graphable and what formats should be supported. Invalid graph formats are automatically locked out.

Fixed problems with graphing of reduced data sets where path sliders wouldn’t always show or resize properly.

Added axial ratio calculation to attributes of dual polarized vector pattern tests with an option to calculate an axial ratio pattern.

Changed R&S ZVx driver to ZVC, ZVR, ZVM, ZVK driver.

Enhanced ZVx driver to better accommodate different i/o options and allow remapping user defined relative measurement types to user defined S-Parameters and standard S-Parameters.

Added other bug fixes to ZVx driver.

Added introductory support to for the Rohde & Schwarz ZVB (including un-tested ZVA, ZVT) series VNAs.

Added preliminary support of PNA-L to PNA driver based on limited available documentation only.

Added Time Response measurement to record measurement results vs. time.

Added an Edit button to Export Traces dialog linked to the existing right click menu.

Eliminated switch delays when switches are set without actually changing the state so that test execution does not delay unnecessarily if state has not actually changed (eg. on retries of filtered traces).

Added Function to retrieve GSM MSS Info in GSM Exercise dialog.

Added Integrated Channel Power filter to spectrum analyzers for WCDMA/CDMA without requiring special options on analyzer.

Added multislot support to GSM pulse filter.

Added modulation (flatness) tolerance control to pulse filters to distinguish pulses of different modulation types.



Added floor level setting, separate retry, and other enhancements to filters.

Changed sweep/filter functionality to sweep, filter, and retry as needed on a single channel before switching to second channel. Reduces unnecessary overhead.

Added averaging function to filtered traces to average multiple filtered sweep results. Important for technologies like EGPRS (EDGE).

Added trigger offset to R&S FSx drivers.

Added functionality to EMQuest throughput driver to read/store verbose throughput data (default) or just run-time post-processed data.

Enhanced support for ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner to support new versions with variable speed/velocity and acceleration settings, added emulated Scan functionality, and increased range of supported COM ports.

Enhanced the exercise dialog for the Model 2090 to prevent accidental changes of positioner settings and improve manual operations.

Changed references to EMCO 2090 to ETS-Lindgren 2090.

Added support for acceleration setting in 2090 driver for new Motorbase V based positioners.

Enhanced attenuator hybrid to allow user to specify which changes first.

Added manual attenuator driver.

Added "Save As" functionality to debug dialog save buttons.

Added new capability to detect E- and H-planes from dual polarized spherical patterns and generate associated beamwidths and optionally export E- and H-plane cuts.

Added upper and lower hemisphere partial radiated powers/partial isotropic sensitivities.

Added ratios between partial surface and total surface quantities in both dB and %.

Added efficiency in percent to post processing.

Changed beamwidth calculations to use new surface cut functionality.

Added sequential polarization option to dual polarized pattern tests to allow for manual/mechanical change of


19


polarization and added associated ancillary state to allow automation of polarization change.

Added support for Agilent 3499 switch controller with 44476A module.

Added WCDMA and Wi-Fi bands to wireless channel tool.

Added support for Rohde & Schwarz FSQ (spectrum analyzer mode only)

Added function to automatically detect when equipment has not been defined for a test and take user to equipment control panel to allow setup.

Fixed a bug where saving final data files from a raw data file with the raw data pane visible would cause an exception when the file was loaded again.

Fixed some timing problems with response and isolation calibrations and other minor bugs on 8510 driver.

Fixed bug where equipment could get stuck in memory due to repeat communication exceptions.

Increased ESA/RSA max RBW and VBW up to 5 MHz.

Made sizeable exercise dialogs remember size as well as position.

Prevented exercise dialogs from storing negative positions (outside of window).

Tweaked zero span handling on certain spectrum analyzers.

Changed throughput calculation on EMQuest throughput tester to more accurately represent real throughput.

Fixed a bug introduced with the introduction of editable trace labels where selected trace no longer highlighted in graph settings dialog.

Fixed a bug where legend labels weren't cleared for single trace (fully reduced dimension depth) graphs.

Fixed bug related to pasting freq. parms. for which the wireless channel tool is selected.

Made current equipment node refresh automatically when control panel is closed to reflect any new equipment added.

Fixed response file generator to allow dB flag on units of None and allowed entry of user defined units.

Made Extrapolate Points, Single Point Pole choices mutually exclusive.



Made file open/save dialog remember widths of columns in file detail view.

Modified EMQuest to use new version of grid component and enabled column selection in places.

Corrected handling of Positioner Skew checks that were wrapping data transfer rather than measurement step.

Made ENA driver check firmware version to ensure that new functionality is available.

Enhanced automatic backup functionality.

Fixed bug where file name extensions were accidentally being duplicated when files were resaved.

Fixed bug where export of cuts from transposed data sets resulted in erroneous post processing of cut.

Changed behavior of tests to allow manual positioner to be used as outer positioner on continuous rotation pattern measurements (Lite patterns, etc.)

Fixed bug in EMQuest Lite related to MDI windows not listing in menus.

Added tiling functions to Windows menu.

Added non MDI modeless windows to Windows menu to allow bringing hidden dialogs to the top.

Other bug fixes and enhancements.

Changes to Version 1.05 since Version 1.04:

Added sensitivity and power measurement capability to GSM and CDMA drivers for CMU-200.

Added single axis and single polarization sensitivity pattern tests.

Added network throughput pattern tests for Wi-Fi testing. (This is an optional upgrade to EMQ-100. Contact your ETS-Lindgren sales office for pricing.)

Added Chariot network throughput driver (This is an optional upgrade to EMQ-100. Contact your ETS-Lindgren sales office for pricing. This driver requires licensed version of Chariot to operate).

Added individual data file exports for various subsets of test data. For instance, pattern tests allow exporting cuts of the 3-D data as single axis cuts, and frequency dependent antenna properties as individual response files. Files can be


21


automatically exported at end of test, or manually generated under the Tools menu.

Added a Response File creation utility under Tools menu to allow quick creation of correction files.

Added driver support for Agilent ENA series of network analyzers.

Added sweep time setting to Agilent PNA network analyzer.

Fixed a bug in the Agilent ESA/PSA driver where sweep time could only be set to integral values.

Updated sweep time functions for all spectrum analyzers to using floating-point values rather than integers.

Fixed a bug in the Agilent ESA/PSA driver where the detector type selection command for the ESA was different than the one used for the PSA. The bug only appeared if the default detector was overridden on the ESA.

Made Ancillary Equipment pane read-only for data files.

Fixed a problem with transposition of data when "show attributes for all polarizations" option was selected.

Fixed problem where V1.04 was accidentally released with all available CMU options enabled. Options are now enabled by license certificate.

Implemented changes to the internal structure of various portions of the underlying program code.

Fixed a problem with the CMU not setting in-call mobile power control settings properly at start of test if call was established, or upon call established for CDMA.

Implemented option on CMU to maintain call in local-to-remote transitions. Option will be enabled after first GPIB communication after power on. Option defaults to off on the CMU, so any call established before first remote transition after power up will be disconnected.

Updated the FSE driver to resolve a trace reading problem by supporting a different number of points per trace.

Added a function to the post processing of pattern measurements to re-calculate the single point pole option after corrections are applied. This ensures that the rotation is performed with values that result in a constant total value.

Changed labels under the Directories tab of Tools:Options... to conform to those on the Paths frame.



Added global field in Directories for Backup File path.

Modified control panel to remember previous size, position, slider settings, and state of tree-view between uses.

Put multi-threaded access protection around GPIB functions.

Increased the security of the option enabling functions in the licensing scheme.

Added a current position query throttle to the 2090 driver so that it doesn't query CP if it's queried it within the last 0.1 s.

Hid "Run" menu when in analysis mode.

Fixed a problem where manual changes to labels only in a data set (i.e. in graphing tool) wouldn't be picked up as changes to cause a re-plot in the graph component.

Added default parameter frames to be used in case corresponding driver is not installed.

Updated to latest version of WPTools word processor underlying document editor/report generator functionality.

Resolved issues with tabular data resulting in short tables across many pages.

Added bookmarks, hyperlinks, and other new features.

Changed data fields in report generator to use data path structure.

Enhanced data field insertion in report generator to allow insertion of any field, including axis labels.

Enhanced data navigation tool for inserting fields and tables into a document.

Fixed a limitation where text fields where not allowed to be greater than 255 characters, and larger strings could cause an exception.

Cleaned up button styles in report generator to match the rest of EMQuest.

Added functionality to add templates to most recently used file list.

Made the export of a report default to the data file name, not template file name.

Added a flag to detect changes in document editor so that "Save Changes" query would occur.


23


Added formatting for floating point values to allow user override of default formatting for data fields in report generator.

Made a change to have template editors show currently selected graph and graph's format in report generator.

Hid formatting bars in Graph Settings dialog when called during Graph Source Select.

Fixed a problem where the default toolbar for template editor was the table toolbar rather than the font toolbar.

Resolved an issue in the multi-graph component's handling of the active graph, where Graph Source Select wasn't working for tabbed pages unless the graph itself was clicked on after selecting the tab.

Added a new icon to differentiate graph select from graph source select.

Added Hyperlink add/modify/delete functionality to report generator.

Added Bookmark functionality to report generator.

Added capability of editing existing parameter/data array point fields in report generator via popup menu.

Forced un-aligned data to align with first X-axis to resolve table generation issue in report generator.

Added pre-configurations for ancillary equipment to control panel and moved equipment pre-configurations so that both are nodes under the equipment node.

Enhanced the ability to restart an aborted test.

Added auto-save functionality to save data during a long test and user defined intervals. This ensures that data is not lost due to power failure or system crash.

Gave ETS-Lindgren 2090 driver the capability of retrying after CheckComplete or SeekPosition failure.

Fixed a problem where Export to Excel (tables) puts a single quote in front of numbers (all text) making them non-formattable. Tabular data is now exported to Excel as variants, so that numbers, text, and formatting are maintained.

Added capability of equipment inserting its own status window or control into the test status pane to provide



customized reporting depending on equipment used. Panels can be moved/docked/undocked by the user.

Added Sweep Timeout Period Increase parameter for equipment configurations for HP 8510 to resolve issues with timeouts on long sweeps where equipment delays are unpredictable.

Resolved an issue where Save As dialog loses target directory, etc. if overwrite query dialog is told "No".

Fixed a problem where the graph tab was not picking up a change to the caption of the graph.

Added support for modifying graph legend labels.

Added initial support for transposing axes of graphical data on the fly. This feature is only suitable for small data sets.

Enabled graph controls for threaded tests.

Fixed problem where Save As for report generator doesn't show shortcuts, etc. when navigating directories.

Added EMQuest icon to CD install.

Added variable attenuator driver types.

Added switch and attenuator drivers for Agilent 11713A Attenuator/Switch Driver.

Added field probe driver types with initial support for EMCO/ETS-Lindgren/Holaday and AR field probes.

Added power meter driver types and initial support for Rohde & Schwarz NRVD.

Added Pulse RBW/VBW support to FSP and FSE by locking Video BW to auto when Quasi-Peak, Average, or RMS detector is selected.

Adjusted the location of pre-test ancillary state calls to ensure that switches can be changed prior to last stage of equipment setup prior to commencement of test. This allows for establishing calls under an appropriate signal path, changing to/from an auto-cal fixture, etc.

Greatly enhanced the capabilities of the CDMA and GSM equipment dialogs for the CMU-200.

Fixed some issues with spin-edit boxes that would cause linked controls to change values while field was still being edited.


25


Made the browse function associated with a given path start at that path if defined rather than the root or current working directory.

Switched to a tree-view combobox for test and equipment selection to allow sub-grouping of items for easier navigation.

Changed default behavior of correction function in tests so that an error returns the uncorrected raw data rather than losing it altogether.

Added sample data to the install for demo mode, etc.

Created a template tutorial for learning to create report templates step-by-step.

Add transpose frequency dependent data correction option to vector tests.

Added missing window zoom button on Tabular Graphing Tool.

Enabled horizontal scrollbar on corrections list box.

Added/enhanced parameter page copy/paste functionality to work off of tab and node selection.

Added raw data view toggle for viewing a graph and tabular display of raw (uncorrected) data.

Added sensitivity specific post processing values.

Made sure that application regularly shows EMQuest exception messages instead of occasional unhandled "C++ Exception" messages.

Modified equipment naming parser to allow insertion of ampersands (&) into the names.

Added functionality to sensitivity tests to record raw data values for each polarization at minimum (best) sensitivity level. (Intermediate channel measurement assistance.)

Enhanced ancillary equipment handling to allow clearing dangling ancillary equipment settings.

Enhanced template editor dialogs for graph settings.

Added graph source select icon and menu items to template editor.

Fixed a bug in file preview where hidden extensions would cause it to not recognize file.



Fixed potential problem in equipment control panel when switching between pre-configured equipment nodes.

Made test parameters read-only during test to avoid potential of user changing parameters during test (EMQuest previously just ignored changes).

Added data start/stop columns to data table generator tool in template editor to allow customizing any subset of data columns.

Added modeless data selector tool to insert individual data fields.

Added Average Gain as an antenna property for pattern tests.

Enhanced vector tests to store vector raw data and calculate any combination of real, imaginary, log magnitude, linear magnitude, phase, and linearized phase.

Added test status flag and enhanced database to include it for future pass/fail test enhancements.

Added a function to verify database fields to avoid potential issues at upgrade.

Enhanced equipment dialogs and drivers to avoid losing non-equipment level parameters (driver parameters) when closed/reloaded.

Added a template tutorial for step-by-step instructions on building report templates.

Enhanced automatic backup to ensure that backup file exists until final raw data file is stored.

Added retry functionality to raw data file storage to ensure that there is an alternative option if automatic save fails (due to inaccessible drive, etc.)

Modified most recently used file list to show full path in hint when cursor hovers over file name menu item.

Enhanced output points with column select dialog to allow turning any set of output point columns on or off.

Corrected issue where upgrade was failing to always default to true for Run Test in Thread.

Made status dialog show in Force Calibration call.

Made ancillary selection read-only on data files.

Added option to date & time stamp the runtime comments.


27


Made antenna port input power work for frequency dependent data.

Resolved various memory leaks in document editor and new functionality.

Extended max VBW of FSE and FSP to 10 MHz.

Resolved issues to allow multiple exercise dialogs to coexist peacefully.

Added functionality to allow user to open completed tests while batch test is still in progress.

Adjusted timing of GPIB calls to eliminate 100% CPU usage.

Updated handling of preferences/options to update to file on close of dialog to avoid losing settings in the event of abnormal program termination.

Prevented equipment from being used as ancillary equipment if it is being used by test.

Enhanced trace filters to provide alternative measurement options and support latest CTIA requirements.

Added check for proximity of data to top of window on spectrum analyzer filtered trace (specify maximum value allowed).

Added copy/paste options for predefined configurations.

Fixed a power trip issue involved with using the doubler on an 8753A/B/C.

Added communication tester/base station simulator measurements for response and patterns.

Added RSSI measurement option for GSM.

Added support for ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner.

Added a preference option to close parameter file at end of test, effectively replacing parm file with raw data file. This allows forcing the user to re-enter critical data prior running next test.

Added a preference to auto close parameter file without prompting to save.

Made default names for pre-configurations of equipment reflect the name of the equipment.

Fixed import problem in Rohde & Schwarz TS-9970 import utility.



Fixed a problem where opening a file by double-clicking from the desktop while EMQuest was minimized would confuse the actual window state and result in EMQuest being stuck maximized, etc.

Added ancillary pre-set states to right click menu of switch exercise dialogs along with regular configurations.

Added Center/Span controls to spectrum analyzer & network analyzer exercise dialogs.

Added right click menu to update equipment parameter pages shown in exercise dialogs from predefined configurations.

Added a generic receiver driver for spectrum and network analyzers to allow user to input GPIB commands for defining specific functionality.

Added support for both input and output attenuators to Rohde & Schwarz ZVx driver.

Made Export menu option generate the RTF report when the Parameters tab is selected.

Added missing *.EMQ file association to installation.

Added EMQuest file build date information to data files for version tracking purposes.

Updated File:Properties to contain additional information and allow copying to clipboard.

Implemented parameter file based serial number list for IUT frames. Adds serial numbers ads they’re entered so that repeat tests can re-select serial number from combobox.

Added a default preference to automatically reduce any dataset greater than 3-D to 3-D. This allows transposed frequency dependent patterns to display automatically.

Added a "copy to clipboard" button to exception dialog.

Added a preference to request user comments on test abort, allowing entry of the reason for the abort.

Enhanced 2090 driver with better error checking.

Added option to filtered trace functionality to calculate tolerance from the average instead of original default of median.

Fixed an error reporting issue where failure to write to a file would just display the problem file name without further information.


29


Changed file type information to better internally differentiate raw data files from other file types.

Added Lite version of EMQuest with reduced functionality.

Removed zero span requirement from average and peak filters to allow measurement of wideband power.

Added an option for performing sequential single polarization tests with manual change of polarization for basic dual polarized tests.

Added option to retain or remove frequency axis for single frequency point list frequency measurements.

Added GPIB command log for troubleshooting.

Added option for user to change between English and metric units in template editor and resolved inconsistencies.

Added an e-mail documents menu item to automatically attach one or more documents to an e-mail message.

Added detailed procedure for range calibration.

Fixed a bug where sweep time changes would not be detected in exercise dialog.

Fixed a problem where ancillary positioner driver could hang if positioner was unable to reach specified target.

Other minor enhancements and bug fixes.

Known issues in V1.05:

On-the-fly transposing functionality is not suitable for transposing data during a test.

5.2 Changes to Version 1.04 Since Version 1.03 • Converted all tests to execute the same code in both

threaded and non-threaded mode.

• Added basic batch test capability. A batch test can run a group of tests in a row, adding specific parameters, and saving each in its own raw data file.

• Added ability to add ancilliary test equipment to parameter files with settings for three different states during the test sequence. This allows adding additional positioners and/or RF switches to a test and setting those to specific positions or states prior to any calibration step, then between calibration and data acquisiton, and finally after completion of the test.



• Changed behavior of hybrid drivers to eliminate need to define driver in control panel first. Now, the hybrid can be selected directly into the equipment parameter list and then each component of the hybrid can be selected into the parameter file. This change will require modification to existing parameter files prior to running a new test.

• Added copy/paste capability for entire page of parameters. This capability allows copying a page of like parameters from one parm file to another. Click on the parm frame outside a control and use Ctrl-C or edit menu to copy. Click on frame of destination, outside any control, and Ctrl-V or edit menu to paste.

• Enhanced drag/drop on IUT frames. Now can move, copy, switch based on holding control or shift, etc.

• Enhanced support for Anritsu Scorpion network analyzers.

• Added support for Rohde & Schwarz FSEx series spectrum analyzers.

• Added support for Agilent PNA series network analyzers.

• Added support for Advantest R376X series network analyzers.

• Added options to select ZVx Mode:Inputs Port 1/b1 and Port 2/b2 (External input setting).

• Added initial support for Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 drivers for AMPS, GSM, TDMA, and CDMA-One options.

• Added Communication Tester/Receiver and Communication Tester/Receiver/Switch hybrids for automated TRP testing of mobile phones.

• Added identification information to Excel exports.

• Added print capability to tabular data graphing tool.

• Added additional demo drivers and modes.

• Added memory and cascading functionality to equipment dialogs so that they do not initially appear on top of one another, and so that they remember their last position on the screen next time they are opened.

• Updated TS-RSP switch driver to have "Unused" state and be more consistent with other switch drivers. Removed tabs for unsupported options in preconfiguration panes. Changed general look and operation of the dialogs, etc.

• Made all switch driver parameters default to "Unused".


31


• Updated hybrid equipment drivers to support various pass through functions for vector network analyzers.

• Made selection of "Table" tab activate the spreadsheet component so that export function, etc. is immediately available.

• Converted "Excessive Points" dialog to a "Don't Show Me This Again" dialog.

• Switched to locale specific test time and date

• Enhanced 3-D graphing functionality to use variable graph scaling features and allow mouse based scaling. Vertices outside the selected plot range are no longer drawn rather than generating black or white vertices.

• Enabled full graph control during threaded tests since this should have lower impact on data acquisition.

• Enhanced functionality of Analysis Mode Only licenses to properly display certain parameters and completely hide unavailable functionality.

• Fixed problem where some tables wouldn't grow on paste.

• Fixed problem where tabular parameters with one point more than the default size of a table would cause an exception.

• Fixed potential problems with exercise dialogs where dialog could have multiple instances or fail to be closed at test run time.

• Fixed a bug in Full S-parameter measurement that was causing "Invalid Read Parameter" errors.

• Fixed a potential problem where another test could be started before the positioner(s) had reached home position at the end of a previous test. Tests now wait to start until positioners have stopped moving.

• Tweaked behavior of sweep trigger for R&S FSP.

• Fixed a missing parameter in ZVx driver.

• Fixed a bug where "Show Attributes for Each Polarization" was not working properly for single axis, dual pol test.

• Fixed a bug in reduced dataset graphs for N > 1, where toggling on the settings dialog, etc. would set the additional axes back to zero.



• Resolved the issue of the help file not coming up when clicking on edit box of a combobox with the "what's this" search icon.

• Changed auto-retry default to 1 retry (no auto, but bring up retry dialog).

• Changed behavior of 859X driver to reset and restore instrument state after triggered sweep timeout in order to get past inherent lockup of analyzer.

• Changed Single Point Poles calculation to limit nulls to 40 dB cross polarization to avoid extremely deep (>300 dB) nulls that could occur when two polarizations were nearly the same.

• Changed Single Point Poles calculation for TIS test to invert power data prior to rotating around axis (nulls should point out rather than in).

• Enhanced error reports in GPIB calls to include GPIB command causing the error.

• Enhanced GPIB error handling to report National Instruments GPIB error messages.

• Enhanced velocity readout on 2090 exercise dialog to avoid spurious readings.

• Alphabetized all equipment lists, etc.

• Renamed various drivers and equipment to better harmonize them with the rest of the application.

• Allowed response file to use hybrids to allow obtaining frequency dependent power curve from communication tester hybrid.

• Control panel now remembers display state.

• Updated help file.

• Other minor modifications and new features.


33


5.3 Changes to Version 1.03 since Version 1.02 Added the ability to re-measure ranges and/or specific data

points in pattern tests.

Enhanced the ZVx driver and fixed some problems related to dual channel measurements and calibration timeouts.

Enhanced the PMJ relay driver to support additional relay switch positions.

Added a positioner offset setting to allow inserting fixed offsets between the positioner readout and the recorded data position. This feature allows changing the orientation of the coordinate system for a given test without having to change settings on the controller.

Added separate delays for each positioner speed setting and increased maximum delay to 60 seconds.

Improved handling of 2090 error conditions.

Improved instantaneous and average speed readouts on positioner control dialog.

Added additional display/view settings (treeview, slider, and table positions) to those automatically saved with the datafile.

Added an option to reverse the direction of rotation for the single-point pole extrapolation under the corrections option for dual axis dual polarization measurements.

Enhanced formatting of graphs for transposed and reduced pattern datasets to automatically display in spherical or polar coordinates as required.

Enhanced drag/drop functionality of IUT info parameters.

Alphabetized most lists (i.e. equipment list, etc.) for convenience.

Fixed a bug in the new parameter handlling structure that was causing various drivers to be unable to find certain parameters.

Fixed some problems with the 8510 driver (primarily due to the previous bug).

Fixed a bug where the new graph trace settings in a template were lost when data was applied.

Fixed a bug where the "set all" and "clear all" traces buttons in the graph settings dialog weren't updating the graph.



Fixed a problem where changes to corrections wouldn't prompt a save changes query.

Fixed a problem where an overwrite query wouldn't appear for a "save as" over the same filename.

Fixed a problem in the analyzer exercise dialog where the number of points setting wasn't updated from the analyzer.

Other minor enhancements and tweaks.

5.4 Changes to Version 1.02 Since Version 1.01 • Moved all tests to threaded versions. Threaded tests will

reduce the impact of user interactions with the EMQuest application while a test is running. Unthreaded versions of previously existing tests are temporarily still available in case problems are encountered with threaded versions. A flag under Tools:Options... toggles this functionality if enabled by the license certificate.

• Changed parameter handling to enhance capabilities for future expansion and resolve potential problems when using two or more identical equipment types in a test (i.e. dual reciever hybrid) where parameters could be confused between the equipment.

• Added major enhancements to graphing routines, especially for 2-D Cartesian and Polar plots.

• Provided equivalent scaling control for all axes, allowing control over step size as well as max and min. Limits can now be fully variable (default X-axis behavior) or stepped (default Y-axis behavior). The gridlines can now be fixed to integral multiples of the step size (default) or allowed to move with the minimum limit (allowing even steps from odd limits, etc.) Logarithmic scale is now supported for Y-axis.

• All traces now support manual override of trace color, line type, width, and legend entry. Data markers will be supported in future updates.

• Option to rotate origin of Polar plots to be horizontal instead of vertical. Global option is available from Tools:Options... to change this for all graphs.

• All necessary graph settings, including dataset reduction and selection now translate to and are stored in report templates, restoring WYSIWYG functionality to all graphs.


35


• Autoscaling can optionally be performed over only selected traces instead of all traces. This also has a global setting available in Tools:Options...

• A global option is available to change the default behavior of most multiple graph displays to display initially in tabbed mode instead of panes.

• Added option to link graphs within a multi-graph display so that modifications to graph type, scale, viewing angle, etc. would be shared between them.

• Added option to animate rotation of 3-D graphs.

• Added functionality to save graph settings and other display settings with datafiles so that the restored view upon file load will be identical to that when saved.

• Added tabular data graphing tool to Tools menu that allows entering tabular data into a spreadsheet and using the EMQuest graphing capability to view the data. Currently this tool is only intended to allow graph viewing and export. Future enhancements may allow storing and re-loading of data from/to the tool.

• Added an option to dual polarization pattern tests to do post-processing calculations for all polarizations, not just the total.

• Added an option to the Corrections tab to transpose frequency dependent post-processed calculations so that they may be plotted vs. frequency.

• Added an option to continue most aborted pattern tests.

• Changed equipment initialization routines to move common functionality to one location.

• Added a properties option for open EMQuest files to give file version information, location, size, etc.

• Updated EMQuest datafile and template versions to support new capabilities. Older versions of EMQuest will not be able to load data generated by this version, however, this version is fully backwards compatible with files created by previous versions of EMQuest.

• Enhanced status dialogs for initialization processes.

• Added scan cycle setting to 2090 controller dialog.

• Added a right-click menu to switch dialogs to allow setting switch to preset states defined in device control panel.

• Added switch driver for Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP.



• Added +/- dB tolerance to Analog/AMPS and CDMA filters. The maximum and minimum of the trace must now be within the entered tolerance of the average for those filters or retry will occur.

• Added "realtime" acquisition switch to analyzer exercise dialog that toggles between continuous updating of sweep data (continuous readtrace) and alternating sweep/readtrace operations. This is to address problems with slow sweep times and instruments for which data transfer during sweep alters readout.

• Added detector selection (peak, average, quasi-peak, etc.) to all spectrum analyzers drivers.

• Finished Anritsu Scorpion driver.

• Changed list frequency table to accept more frequency points.

• Changed manual entry dialog to indicate data types, etc. required for entry.

• Enhanced dual receiver hybrid to support simultaneous triggering of sweeps from two analyzers rather than sequential triggering.

• Enhanced install script to support update releases without automatically entering maintenance screen.

• Updated help file to contain support for latest features and this revision history list.

• Fixed possible bug where 8753/8720/8510 could transfer memory trace instead of data trace if user intervened between initialization and measurement.

• Fixed a bug where spectrum analyzers where not setting the trigger level except when set to video mode, so that the trigger level safety checks that were added to the Analog and CDMA filters would fail when attempting to verify that the signal was above the trigger level. This eliminates the need for the previously published workaround.

• Fixed a bug where corrections were applied incorrectly to Single Axis, Dual Polarization pattern measurement. This resulted in the same correction being applied to both polarizations. This eliminates the need for the previously published workaround.

• Fixed minor bug in data reduction where graph would stop updating during test (Dataset would auto-reduce to first measured trace once the number of data points hit 10,000).


37


• Fixed bug in duplication of last point when both "close surface" and "single-point poles" optimizations were selected.

• Fixed a bug where migrated parameters (by changing test type) would be saved under previous parameter file name rather than displaying the "Save As" untitled.prm dialog.

• Fixed a problem with Version 2.0 of NI GPIB drivers that would cause an access violation in GPIB32.DLL on program exit.

• Fixed a bug where zero-sized arrays (incomplete datasets from aborted tests) would cause an exception in the tabular display component.

• Fixed a bug where mixed 2-D/3-D tabular data would display incorrectly (Single-axis two-polarization with compute all polarizations option turned on.)

• Fixed a potential memory leak problem with dataset handling and graphing during data acquisition.

• Fixed a problem where multiple file opens from the command line would only open one file if EMQuest wasn’t already running.

• Other minor enhancements and bug fixes.

5.5 Changes to Version 1.01 Since Version 1.00 Added Cancel option to manual entry dialog to abort test.

Added format specifiers to output points table.

Added check to insure that positioner type (rotational vs. linear) matches requested test type (polar, cylindrical, spherical, planar, etc.)

Added feature to extract parameters from an existing datafile in order to run an identical new test.

Added dropdown combobox to directory and file preferences for quick switching of files/directories from a recently used list.

Created a separate field for test history database directory to separate it from the RawData directory field. Now separate global databases can be used for each directory, or the same database can be used for all directories as desired.

Added Yes/No To All to save queries so that application can exit quickly if desired.



Added "close pattern" optimization option to duplicate the zero degree point (first point of the ordered array) at 360 degrees. This closes the surface and allows reduction of the total measured data for a pattern test.

Added Extrapolate Poles optimization to 2-axis 2-polarization test. This feature allows skipping measurements of the poles and using the average of measured data to fill in the gap so that plots and calculations come out right.

Made the equipment control panel dialog re-sizeable.

Parameter files now allow parameter migration between test types. Changing the test type of a parameter file will copy as many compatible parameters as possible from the existing parameter file.

Added window drag zoom to graph utility.

Added presets for equipment parameters as an addition to control panel settings. Right click menus allow access to add/name/delete a new preset to the control panel and to select the desired preset in the parameter file.

Removed redundant specification of number of switch states from positioner/switch hybrid.

Added "All Files" and "All EMQuest files" to file open dialog, making the latter the default.

Greatly enhanced installation program and added file type registration options for existing EMQuest file types.

Added a vector response test which is a single S-parameter (selected from S11, S12, S21, or S22) from the full s-parameter test and provides the same post processing options for the selected S-parameter.

Add Most Recently Used functionality on Save, Save As, and History view file open.

Added Switch Driver for PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay.

Made exports default to name of data file with new extension for the file type to be exported.

Added COM port functionality to equipment drivers to support serial communications with certain test equipment.

Updated ESA spectrum analyzer driver and added COM port and exercise dialog support

Converted averaging on trace filters to average data in linear units, not logarithmic (i.e. convert to linear, average, then


39


convert result back). In general there is a negligible difference between the two, however, values with deep nulls could result in a considerably different average.

Added trigger level detection to filter for Analog (trace average) to make sure that the signal is above a set trigger level. This allows automatic detection of lost calls.

Added a CDMA (max marker) trace filter with trigger level detection to make sure that the signal is above a set trigger level.

Enabled option to prevent unneeded prompts at the start of a test.

Added an option to save raw data file as .RAW, but just under new filename (no reduction in data, etc., no auto-renaming, and no tracking in database.)

Changed to a new parallel port driver to greatly accelerate the speed of the LPT switch driver.

Added an option to record actual position information on stepped tests.

Various bug fixes including:

o Fixed some issues with manual analyzer entry dialog to make it more convenient and fixed a minor bug that caused exception on application close.

o Fixed a bug where the application restore button caused an exception stating that it can't open the file, even if no file is selected to be open! I don't believe this bug existing in a distributed version.

o Prevented blank parameter form asking if user wants to save changes when closed.

o Equipment control panel losing node selection.

o Bug in 8753 Exercise Form causing undefined parameter exception.

o Added optional delay time to GPIB calls for older version firmware.

o Fixed a bug that prevented a "save as" of a raw data file that doesn't have corrections files available. (i.e. was run on another machine, etc.)

o Changed the behavior of Save As so that it comes up with current filename, not "untitled" (unless current filename is "untitled").



o Made file load from drag and drop or double-click bring EMQuest window to top.

o Fixed a bug where "Favorites" links didn't show up in "Save As" dialog. Added *.lnk to all type selections in dialog.


41





6 Tips of the Day This section summarizes the available tips show in the Tip of the Day feature of EMQuest.

EMQuest now supports a Tip of the Day feature!

There is a template tutorial included with the installation for learning how to develop report templates.

There are sample data files and report templates available with the installation.

The Tools:Options... menu contains settings for customizing many features of EMQuest.

EMQuest now ships with a freely distributable EMQuest Viewer application to allow customers to view data generated by EMQuest in its native format.

There is a generic receiver driver for spectrum analyzers and network analyzers that will allow user defined support of basic GPIB functionality for custom devices.

Many forms and components support a right click menu that brings up additional options.

Right clicking on most parameter tables will allow access to a range filling tool, allowing automatic generation of a range of values.

There is a Wireless Channel Selection tool that can be toggled on or off by right clicking on the frequency list tables. This tool can also be enabled by default under Tools:Options:Preferences.

Many common features can be enabled/disabled or adjusted under the Tools:Options... menu.

EMQuest supports the definition of standard lists of IUTs, manufacturers, models, etc. Just go to the Tools:Options... menu.

EMQuest now offers an optional Network Throughput Test Package, EMQ-105, for over-the-air performance testing of Wi-Fi and other wireless network devices.

Right clicking on a graph brings up the Graph Settings dialog.

You can now change the labels of traces on a graph, as well as colors, line types, and thicknesses. This information can be saved with the data file or template.

The "Dimension Depth" tab on the Graph Settings dialog allows moving the outer dimension(s) of a dataset to slider bars for a better view of complex data sets.


43


Hover the mouse over the upper right corner of a graph after reducing a data set by one or more dimensions to highlight the button that shows the slider bar panel.

The "Dimension Order" setting in the Graph Settings dialog allows real-time transposing of the axes of simple data sets. Just drag the axes to the desired order.

Graphs can be viewed on tabs or panes. The default preference of tabs or panes is set in the Tools:Options... menu.

You can now view completed raw data files in a Batch Test by double clicking a selection in the Data Files listbox on the Measurement Progress screen.

Runtime Comments now have the option to prepend a timestamp.

You can now email opened documents straight from EMQuest using the Tools:E-Mail Documents menu.

There is a "User Defined" node in most parameter files that allows the user to add and label custom fields for report generation and tracking purposes.

The "User Defined" node also allows definition of a custom test initialization message prompt.

There is a Preview File option in the File:Open dialog.

Printing and export functions are page dependent. Selecting Parameters generates a report. Selecting a graph prints or exports that graph using the graph template. Selecting a table prints or exports the tabular data.

You can change the corrections or post-processing settings on a raw data file and update it using the Tools:Apply Updated Corrections command.

There's an "EMQuest Favorites" button in the open and save file dialogs that jumps to a set of shortcuts to EMQuest directories and files.

You can quickly navigate to any commonly used directory by adding it to the "EMQuest Favorites" in the open or save file dialog.

The open/save file dialogs support the full range of Windows Explorer display modes, including list, tree, and icon views.

EMQuest supports TRP and TIS testing per the CTIA’s Mobile Station Over-the-Air Performance Test Plan.

EMQuest can automatically export various subsets of data at the end of the test. Configure these under the Exports parameter tab.

The Correction File Generator under the Tools menu allows quick entry of external data for use as corrections to other measurements.

Optimizations like single point poles and close surface can significantly reduce test time and result in better looking 3-D data.



For proper integration, angle ranges in the resulting dataset must always cover the desired range of integration. Thus, to cover a sphere, data must exist from theta = 0-180 degrees and phi = 0-360 degrees. Use optimizations to reduce the test time in taking this data.

When using the close surface optimization, stop the theta axis (spherical) or angle (polar) position one step before the full 360-degree rotation.

EMQuest will automatically backup data during a test for recovery in case of a catastrophic failure. Configure storage times and location in the Tools:Options… menu.

You can now edit existing parameter or data array point field in the report generator via a popup menu by right clicking on the field.

You can pre-configure equipment parameter settings in the equipment control panel and automatically select those into a parameter file by right clicking on the parameter page and selecting the desired configuration from the drop down menu.

Ancillary equipment allows performing specific tasks using equipment not normally required by the test (such as positioners and switches) at certain points in the test procedure.

Use the Transpose Frequency Dependent Data option in frequency dependent pattern tests to see complete patterns as a function of frequency.

Use the Tools : Apply Updated Corrections menu option to change the corrections or post processing options of a raw data file.

You can copy and paste entire parameter pages from file to file. However, be careful not to paste parameters from different pages or unexpected results may occur.

You can toggle a "raw data" view on or off in a raw data file. This turns on an additional tab that shows the uncorrected and unprocessed data.

Two special fields, "Th. Src Pwr @ Boresight" and "Phi. Src Pwr @ Boresight" are provided in TIS post processing to give appropriate power settings for intermediate channel testing. These are the corresponding communication tester power levels at the sensitivity level of the IUT for the best sensitivity (boresight) position.

EMQuest now supports basic band handoff for GSM and CDMA 2000 options of the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200.

EMQuest now supports WCDMA and GPRS/EGPRS options of the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200.

EMQuest now has introductory support for the Agilent 8960 Communication Tester.

There are a number of optimizations to the measurement sequence for GSM and WCDMA sensitivity testing that can significantly reduce test time.


45


The trace filters for spectrum analyzers now support an Integrated Channel Power measurement that can determine the power of a CDMA or WCDMA across a frequency span without the need for special options in the test equipment.

Trace filters have a number of tolerance and retry settings to ensure that valid data is acquired.

There’s a new Time Response test that can record data as a function of time and provide max, min, and average power.

EMQuest can automatically determine the orientation of the E- and H- plane of a pattern and generate the appropriate cuts.



7 License, Copyright, and Warranty

7.1 EMQuest License Agreement

7.1.1 License Agreement

This software package is licensed by ETS-Lindgren L.P. to the original purchaser of the product for their exclusive use only on the terms set forth below. ETS-Lindgren L.P. retains full ownership of this software and all of its component parts. This license cannot be transferred to any other party without the express written approval of ETS-Lindgren, L.P.

7.1.2 Acceptance

Installation of the software covered by this License Agreement shall constitute acceptance of the terms of this Agreement as well as all of the ETS-Lindgren L.P. Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale, which is available upon request from the ETS-Lindgren L.P. Sales Department.

7.1.3 License Types

Full Registration License – This license, and the associated registration certificate, authorizes the purchaser to use the software and any test and/or equipment modules enabled by the certificate on one machine for the lifetime of the license.

Trial License – This license, and the associated trial certificate, authorizes the user to use the software and any test and/or equipment modules enabled by the certificate on any machine for the duration of the certificate for evaluation purposes only. At the end of the license period, all copies of the software must be returned or destroyed.


47


Demo License – This license, and the associated demo certificate, authorizes the user to use the software and any demo test and/or demo equipment modules enabled by the certificate on any machine for the duration of the certificate for evaluation purposes only. At the end of the license period, all copies of the software must be returned or destroyed.

7.2 Uses Permitted You may use the software on a single machine. This license allows you to use the software for home or business use. You are authorized to make a duplicate copy of this software for archival purposes and hard drive installation only. The software may be installed on only one machine at a time.

7.3 Uses Not Permitted You may not:

Provide use of the software in a computer service business, network, timesharing, or other multiple user arrangement to users who are not individually licensed by ETS-Lindgren L.P. as a user of the product.

Make copies of any ETS-Lindgren L.P. documentation or program disks other than for the purpose of a single backup.

Make alterations to the software or reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the software.

Grant sublicense, lease, or other rights in the software to others.

Include the software, in whole or in part, in any other commercial or private package.

Make verbal or media translations of any documentation.

Make modifications for use on non-compatible hardware.

Make transmission of the software in any form.

Use the software or any of its component parts for any illegal purpose.

Any violation of the terms of this license constitutes an immediate cancellation of said license. ETS-Lindgren L.P. shall be entitled to any and all remedies allowed by law, tort or any other legal theory for Licensee’s violation of this License Agreement.



7.4 Upgrades and Revisions Refer to the associated Software Maintenance Agreement for details on upgrades and revisions to this software.

7.5 Preliminary Releases Preliminary alpha/beta release versions are provided on an as-is basis and will be supported and updated as resources allow. Any preliminary release is subject to the same license agreement above with the additional stipulation that at the end of the license period, all copies of the software will be returned or destroyed. By accepting the use of a preliminary release, the user agrees that they will not reveal any proprietary or privileged information to a third party and may not transfer the license of said software through sale or any other means or otherwise represent the software as a finished product of ETS-Lindgren, L.P. ETS-Lindgren, L.P. may cancel a preliminary release license at any time by written or electronic notice to the Licensee. Where preliminary releases are provided to satisfy a purchase, the maintenance period will not start until after the released version is available. ETS-Lindgren, L.P. reserves the right to alter the terms of the license agreement for any preliminary releases at any time, and those modified terms shall apply to all current preliminary licenses immediately.

7.6 General This Agreement may be modified only by mutual agreement in writing. The provisions of this Agreement are severable. Neither party may assign this Agreement unless mutually agreed in writing, except that either party may assign the Agreement to any third party into which the party merges, or which gains stock and/or asset control of the party. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of Texas, United States of America and both parties agree that the jurisdiction for all disputes shall be Austin, Texas.


49


7.6.1 Limited Warranty

ETS-Lindgren L.P. warrants for a period of ninety (90) days from the original date of purchase that:

the program package will perform its intended function within the specifications published in the documentation and those set forth in ETS-Lindgren L.P. advertising material.

the user documentation is substantially complete and contains the information which ETS-Lindgren L.P. deems necessary to use the product.

under normal use, the electronic media upon which this program is recorded is free from defects.

This warranty is not valid except under normal use and without unauthorized modification.

If during that ninety (90) day period, a demonstrable defect in the program or documentation should appear, you may return the software, inbound shipping prepaid, to ETS-Lindgren L.P. for repair or replacement, at ETS-Lindgren L.P.’s option. No warranty services will be performed without a Return Material Authorization Number issued by the ETS-Lindgren L.P. Sales Department prior to the return. The end user's remedy is limited to return of the software, manual, and any associated hardware to the dealer or to ETS-Lindgren L.P. for replacement. The licensee assumes sole responsibility for the use of this software.

7.6.2 Limitation of Liability

THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE. NO OTHER WARRANTY, WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE REMEDIES PROVIDED BY THIS WARRANTY ARE THE BUYER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. IN NO EVENT SHALL ETS-LINDGREN L.P. BE LIABLE TO THE LICENSEE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, OR AS THE RESULT OF, THE SALE, DELIVERY, NON-DELIVERY, SERVICING, ASSEMBLY, USE, LOSS OF USE OR FAILURE OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY PART



THEREOF, OR FOR ANY CHARGES OR EXPENSES OF ANY NATURE INCURRED WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF ETS-LINDGREN, L.P., EVEN IF ETS-LINDGREN, L.P. MAY HAVE BEEN NEGLIGENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ETS-LINDGREN, L.P.'S LIABILITY UNDER ANY CLAIM MADE BY THE LICENSEE BE IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE LICENSE OR MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH DAMAGES ARE CLAIMED.

7.6.3 Copyright Statement

The EMQuest program; associated test and equipment driver modules; input, configuration, template, and output file formats; documentation; logo; concept; and associated materials are all Copyright © 2003-2005 by ETS-Lindgren L.P. The EMQuest logo and splash screen are copyright and trademark ™ 2002 by EMC Test Systems, L.P. Portions are copyright 2001 and earlier, by EMC Test Systems, L.P. The WinCal and WinCal32 name, logo, and splash screens are all copyright and trademark ™ 1996-2002 by EMC Test Systems, L.P. All of the above are protected by national and international copyright, trademark, and patent laws. They may not be reproduced, in any form, without the express written consent of ETS-Lindgren L.P.


51





8 Menus and Controls

8.1 Main Menu EMQuest uses a multiple document interface, which will change the available menu options based on the child window that is selected for input focus. The available menu options include File, Edit, View, Insert, Format, Equipment, Run, Tools, Window, and Help. Details for each of these are listed below. Note that not all menu options will be available for all software configurations.

File contains functions related to creating, loading, saving, or outputting the various file types supported by EMQuest. These functions include:

New allows creation of new files. File types available for creation are contained in a submenu.

Parameters creates a new test parameter file. Test parameter files are the gateway to the data acquisition capabilities of the EMQuest package.

Template creates a new template file for data output or report generation.

Open brings up the file open dialog to allow loading of an existing file.

Save saves the file associated with the currently active MDI child window if changes have been made. If the window represents a raw data file, if the data has not been changed, or if no active window is present, this menu item is disabled. If the window represents a new file that has not been saved yet, the Save menu item works the same as the Save As menu item.

Save As brings up the file save dialog to allow saving the file associated with the currently active MDI child window to a different file name or location. If the window represents a raw data file, it can only be saved as a final data file. A save as text option is available for data files to allow outputting all data and parameters in text format. The comma-separated data generated in this manner will have the full numerical resolution available for text output, rather than the formatted resolution of the tabular data export. If no active window is present, this menu item is disabled.


53



Close closes the currently active MDI child window. If no active window is present, this menu item is disabled.

Load Template Data displays the open file dialog to allow loading a data file into a template. Once a data file is loaded into a template, the graphs, tables, and fields will show the data extracted from that file. This allows for visual development of a template to match the contents of a data file.

Associate Template Data displays a window select dialog to allow extracting the associated data file into a template. Once a data file is loaded into a template, the graphs, tables, and fields will show the data extracted from that file. This allows for visual development of a template to match the contents of a data file.

Properties displays the properties of the current data file, indicating the file size, location, etc. as well as the software version that created it.

Export brings up a file save as dialog box allowing the selection of the desired export format for the selected object. This menu option will only be enabled when a control that supports export (graphs and output tables) is selected. Click the mouse on or in the desired graph or table to select it for export. Selecting the Parameters tab of a data file will allow generation and export of a test report using the specified report template.

Print Preview displays the print preview for the active MDI child window if the window supports printing. For data files, the output that will be generated is dependent upon the selected tab of the child window. If the associated file requires a template to generate output, and one has not been specified, the program will offer an opportunity to select an appropriate template. If the window does not support printing, or if no active window is present, this menu item is disabled.




Print displays the print dialog for the active MDI child window if the window supports printing. The print dialog allows selecting the desired printer and making any required adjustments prior to printing the output. For data files, the output that will be generated is dependent upon the selected tab of the child window. If the associated file requires a template to generate output, and one has not been specified, the program will offer an opportunity to select an appropriate template. If the window does not support printing, or if no active window is present, this menu item is disabled.

History leads to the history submenu, which contains the following elements:

Measurement History displays the measurement history database table, which lists elements like the measurement type, data and time, source parameter file, raw data file, and comments for each test.

IUT History displays the measurement history database table with additional fields for IUT manufacturer, model, serial number, and type.

Upload to Master displays the file open dialog box to allow the selection of a location for a master measurement database. This feature allows synchronization of data from several EMQuest sources, which may not always be connected to a network, to one common measurement database.

The Most Recently Used Files list shows the last several files opened by the user.

Exit closes the application. The user will be prompted to save any unsaved files.


55


Edit contains functions related to editing the currently active

document. These functions include:

Undo undoes the last document edit action. This will undo insertion/deletion and various formatting operations. Changes to properties of objects (i.e. graph settings, etc.) cannot be undone.

Redo redoes a previously undone edit step.

Cut copies the selected text from the document to the clipboard and removes the selection from the document.

Copy copies the selected text from the document to the clipboard.

Paste inserts the text contained in the clipboard at the current location. Any selected text is replaced.

Delete removes the selected text or object from the document.

Select All selects all text and objects in the document.

Clear All displays a dialog to allow selection between clearing the contents of the document (equivalent to select all followed by delete) or clearing the associated data.

Find… brings up the find text dialog, which allows searching the document for a requested string.

Replace… brings up the replace text dialog, which allows searching the document for a requested string and replacing it with another one.

Go To Bookmark lists the available bookmarks as a sub-menu for quick navigation.

View contains functions related to changing the way the currently active document is displayed. These functions include:

Normal shows the document in a continuous scrolling editor, with no indication of page break locations.

Page Breaks shows the document in normal mode, but with dashed indicators to show where forced page breaks have been inserted.

Print Layout shows the document as it will look printed across multiple pages, with all formatting, etc.



Edit contains functions related to editing the currently active document. These functions include:

Prior Page moves the insertion cursor and repositions the display window to the top of the previous page.

Next Page moves the insertion cursor and repositions the display window to the top of the next page.

Zoom allows selection of a range of standard magnifications for the document. Changing the magnification changes the size of fonts and other objects displayed in the edit window.

Zoom In increases the magnification percentage value by 20%.

Zoom Out decreases the magnification percentage value by 20%.

Fit Height, when checked, overrides the magnification setting and adjusts the display scale to fit the height of a full page to the height of the edit window. This option toggles on or off, and is toggled off when Fit Width is selected.

Fit Width, when checked, overrides the magnification setting and adjusts the display scale to fit the width of a full page to the width of the edit window. This option toggles on or off, and is toggled off when Fit Height is selected.

Insert contains functions for inserting various objects and fields into

the current document. These functions include:

Page Break inserts a forced page break at the current cursor location.

Field leads to a submenu that contains options for inserting parameter, data, or document fields.

Field Editor brings up the field editor dialog, which allows selection of fields from an available list. Fields are subdivided into various categories by type. With the exception of document specific fields like page numbering and current date, it may be easier to use the other field selection features to find the appropriate field from an existing data file. Otherwise it is necessary to understand where and how specific information is stored in the data file in order to configure the fields.


57


Insert contains functions for inserting various objects and fields into the current document. These functions include:

Parameter Locate minimizes the current window and switches to a locate mode signified by the find cursor . This tool allows locating the desired parameter field by simply clicking on the control containing the parameter in an open data file. Simply select the open window containing the desired parameter and browse through the parameter tree until the required parameter page is displayed. Then, just click on the control containing the desired parameter. When the cursor is hovered over a valid parameter control, it will change to the search link cursor . Note that this feature will allow the selection of fields from data files other than the one currently associated with the document template. This could cause the inserted field to not correspond to an available parameter in the associated data file. Care should be taken to insure that the data file used to locate the desired parameter is of the same type as that which will be used to generate reports with the template being edited.

Data Field brings up a tabular view of the associated data set and allows the selection of a particular data point to insert into the document. Remember, this option only inserts a description of where that data point was found in the data set. If the data set used to generate the report does not have an identical organization, the correct data may not be inserted into the field when the report is generated.

Graph inserts a graph object at the current cursor location. Right clicking on the graph and selecting the appropriate menu option can then change the properties of the graph.

Data Table displays the tabular data selection dialog for creating a data table template for reporting tabular data. The dialog allows navigation of the available data set to select the desired output table view as well as specification of the number of columns of data to display per page. Currently, this feature can only create tables of a pre-defined size, which means that the size of the desired output table must be known at design time. Dynamic table generation, which will automatically add the required number of pages at report generation time will be added in future revisions.




Band leads to a submenu for inserting special band functions that can be used to place duplicate information in the same place across multiple pages. Bands are normally only used to generate repeated data across multiple pages when tabular data is output from the dataset. The Data Table… menu option above will automatically insert the required band structure, but these items are provided for flexibility.

Header inserts a header band that indicates the start of a header section. Everything inserted after the header band up until a text or footer band will be placed at the top of each page if placed on a page outside a group, or at the top of the group containing the header section.

Footer inserts a footer band that indicates the start of a footer section. Everything inserted after the footer band up until a text or header band will be placed at the bottom of each page if placed on a page outside a group, or at the bottom of the group containing the footer section.

Text inserts a text band that indicates the start of a text section. Everything inserted after the text band up until a header or footer band will be placed in the body (middle) of each page if placed on a page outside a group, or in the middle of the group containing the text section.

Group Start inserts a band group start indicator. Any information up until the next group end will be output together. A group will be repeated across multiple pages as long as there is data available to output in that group.

Group End inserts a band group end indicator. Any information between a previous group start and this group end will be output together. A group will be repeated across multiple pages as long as there is data available to output in that group.

Table displays the table size selection dialog to insert a simple table into the document.

Picture brings up a picture file open dialog to allow loading a picture file and inserting it at the current cursor location.

Document brings up a file open dialog to allow loading another document and pasting it into the current location in the document.


59



Bookmark brings up the bookmark editor dialog to allow inserting a bookmark in the document at the current cursor location.

Hyperlink brings up the hyperlink dialog that allows inserting a web link into the document at the current cursor location.

Format contains functions for formatting the document or the current active or selected item. These functions include:

Font displays the Windows font dialog that provides access to all of the properties of the font for the currently selected text.

Paragraph displays the paragraph format dialog that allows setting line spacing, indentation, and line spacing of the current or selected paragraph(s).

Bullets and Numbering displays the bullet/numbering type selection dialog, which allows selection or disabling of automatic bulleting or numbering of text.

Band displays the band-formatting dialog for the selected band.

Graph displays the graph-formatting dialog for the selected graph.

Graph Select displays the graph select dialog for a multiple graph data set, otherwise performs the same function as the graph format function above.

Borders displays the border control dialog, which allows toggling on or off the various borders of a table or block of text.

Table leads to a submenu for various table related functions. These include:

Select Row selects the table row containing the cursor.

Insert Row inserts a new row in the table after the current row.

Delete Row deletes the table row containing the cursor.

Select Column selects the table column containing the cursor.



Format contains functions for formatting the document or the current active or selected item. These functions include:

Insert Column inserts a column in a table after the column containing the cursor.

Delete Column deletes the column containing the cursor.

Split Cell splits the selected cell(s) into two equal cells in the same row.

Combine Cells combines the select cells into one cell on each row.

Page Setup… displays the page setup dialog with allows selection of paper size, margins, and orientation of the page.

Equipment contains functions for configuring and exercising the attached test equipment. These functions include:

Setup Equipment brings up the Equipment Control Panel. This control panel allows defining instances of equipment using the available drivers. Since the control panel can change the settings of a piece of equipment, all equipment dialogs must be closed and no tests may be running in order to access the control panel.

A list of Equipment Dialogs will be displayed for each configured instance of an equipment driver if that driver supports a manual interface dialog. The available equipment dialogs will depend on the installed equipment and drivers. For more information on a particular dialog, use the context sensitive help for that dialog.

Run contains functions for running a test. This menu will only be visible when the active window represents a valid parameter file that may be

used to run a test. The available functions include:

Run Test initiates the test represented by the active parameter file. Communication is established with all required test equipment and the equipment settings are adjusted as required prior to starting the test. If a reference cable calibration or other similar initialization step is required, and no valid calibration exists in the instrument or driver, that calibration is performed prior to commencing the actual measurement process.


61


Run contains functions for running a test. This menu will only be visible when the active window represents a valid parameter file that may be

used to run a test. The available functions include:

Pause Test brings up the pause test dialog and pauses test execution at the next available step in the test sequence. Depending on the test, this may not occur immediately.

Abort Test brings up the abort test confirmation dialog, allowing the test to be aborted.

A list of Additional Functions may be present for a given test. These functions may configure equipment or perform other actions based on test parameters without actually initiating the entire test sequence. These include:

Force Calibration performs the initialization step required for the active parameter file, and forces any calibration initialization step to occur, even if a valid calibration exists for the given configuration.

Tools contains general configuration tools for the program as well as providing test or document specific functions. These

functions include:

Options brings up the Options Dialog for configuring and customizing various global user defined options and fields which affect program operation.

Graph Tabular Data creates a new tabular data graphing tool window. This window allows entering 2-D and 3-D datasets in order to use the graphing capabilities of EMQuest to view the data.

Correction File Generator creates a new correction file generator window. This window allows entering data to create a simple response file to be used as a correction file for use with other test parameters. This provides a simple mechanism to enter frequency dependent calibration factors, etc.

Apply Updated Corrections recalculates any available corrections and/or post-processing functions for the active raw data file. Only a raw data file can be updated, since it contains the original measured data in addition to the final processed data.



Tools contains general configuration tools for the program as well as providing test or document specific functions. These

functions include:

Export Selected Traces brings up the export selection dialog to allow manually defining the data to export into separate data files. This tool provides manual functionality equivalent to the automatic export function available in the parameter set.

Update Parameter Set makes any necessary changes to a parameter tree of a raw data file if there have been additional nodes added to the parameters (by an update to the EMQuest software package) since the data was originally measured. This tool will be available only if the test parameters have been enhanced by adding a new parameter node/pane to the parameter tree. While nodes that add to the input parameters prior to a test do not require updating of an existing raw data file, this tool is useful if a post-processing or corrections related node has been added to enhance post-processing capability on existing data.

Extract Parameter Set allows extracting the test parameters of an existing data file to create a new test parameter file that can then be used to run an identical test.

Re-Measure Selected Range brings up a dialog that allows specifying a range of data points in a raw data file to be re-measured and generate a new test with the re-measured data.

E-mail Documents allows attaching one or more open documents to an e-mail message for easy forwarding of data files.


63


Window contains functions for arranging and selecting the MDI

windows. These functions include:

Cascade organizes all of the MDI child windows of the application in a cascaded stack so that just the menu bar of each window is visible above that of the next window.

Minimize All reduces all MDI child windows of the application to icon bars in the application’s client window.

Close All closes all open MDI child windows.

The Child Window List makes up the rest of this menu item, showing all of the current MDI child windows of the application. A checkmark is placed next to the currently active window. Selecting one of these menu items will activate that window and bring it to the top of the MDI child stack.

Help contains functions for accessing the online help, as well as

accessing licensing and other information about the EMQuest software. These functions include:

EMQuest Help displays this help file with the introductory topic and the table of contents tab selected.

Tip of the Day displays the Tip of the Day dialog, which provides short hints, tips, and tricks for getting the most out of the EMQuest software.

License displays the license certificate entry dialog. This dialog allows loading a new license certificate to change the available features of the EMQuest software. It also provides access to the registration dialog used to obtain a permanent registration license certificate. This dialog displays automatically the first time the program is run or once a temporary license has expired.

About EMQuest displays the EMQuest About box, which lists version information for the application and installed modules.



8.1.1 Main Menu Submenus

8.1.1.1 Graph Component EMQuest utilizes a powerful custom graph component to provide one of the primary user interfaces to measured data. This graph component supports a wide variety of graph formats and functions. The graph component is used in a variety of places including the test progress window during data acquisition, the Graph tab of a data file, and in the report generator templates for data output. Depending on the dataset being displayed, there may be more than on graph visible at a time. These multi-graph views can be toggled between having all of the available graphs visible on panes at the same time and having each graph on its own tabbed page. In the pane view, pane splitters allow resizing each graph in the available viewing space.

While the functionality of the graph component is intentionally limited in the test progress window, elsewhere there are a number of user options available. Most functions are available from the Graph Control Bar buttons, or by right clicking to bring up the Graph Settings Dialog. Export and copy functions are also available from the application Main Menu. The menu and button functions will act on the selected graph, indicated by the dotted selection rectangle around the graph window.

8.1.1.2 Exporting and Copying The visible contents of a selected graph can be exported to a file or copied to the clipboard exactly as formatted on screen. The export function (File:Export…) supports the formats of Windows Metafile (WMF), Enhanced Metafile (EMF), or Windows Bitmap (BMP). Both metafile formats provide a scaleable image that can be stretched or shrunk by another application without loss of image quality. The bitmap image will have the pixel resolution identical to that seen on the screen. Stretching or shrinking this image will significantly degrade the image. Copying the graph to the clipboard, either through the use of the Edit:Copy function or by the Ctrl-C keyboard shortcut, will place both a metafile and bitmap image on the clipboard. The type of image that can be pasted into another application will depend on the capabilities of that application.


65


8.1.2 Graph Control Bar

The graph control bar provides single click control over the format and appearance of a selected graph. The available graph control buttons are grouped together by function and include:

Multi-Graph View is used when dissimilar data types are generated by a test.

Panes/Tabs toggles a multi-graph view between multiple panes on a single page, and full-page graphs displayed on individual tabs. The default setting of this control for most multi-graph instances can be adjusted under the Tools:Options menu.

Link Graph toggles linked graph control on/off in a multi-graph view. Linked graphs will automatically share settings such as graph type, scale, viewing angle, etc. Pressing the link button the first time (or any time that all graphs are unlinked) will link all graphs in a multi-graph. As long as more than one graph is linked, the link for any graph can be toggled on or off to link or separate its settings from the other graphs.

Graph Type Selection toggles between the available graph types. Some graph types may be invalid or disabled for a given set of plot

data. Cartesian selects a simple X-Y plot.

Polar selects a polar plot intended for plotting data vs. angle.

Cartesian 3-D displays X-Y-Z data as a planar surface plot.

Spherical displays three-dimensional polar data as a spherical surface plot.



Graph Manipulation Functions allow mouse-oriented control over the appearance of the selected graph. Not all functions are

available or applicable for all graph types.

Cursor Readout turns the mouse cursor into a marker readout as it moves over the graph. For line graphs (Cartesian and polar), the marker reads out the X-Y position of the cursor in graph units, unless the marker is near a trace, in which case it reads out the value of the trace at the X-position under the cursor. Clicking on a trace in this mode will highlight that trace. For surface plots (Cartesian 3-D and Spherical) the cursor reads out the magnitude value corresponding to the color underneath the tip of the cursor. The value represents the average of the values at the four corners of the rectangle containing that color. Given the range of possible data to be displayed, marker readout displays at the full numerical resolution of the floating-point value. The user should be aware that this may not reflect actual significant digits.

Zoom provides a powerful drag zoom function that zooms in or out as the mouse drags across the screen. Clicking and dragging on the graph will change the scale of the graph up or down along the drag axis by changing the end points (maximum and minimum) of the graph axis. Holding control while dragging will change only the lower limits of the graph, while holding shift and dragging will change the upper. For polar plots, dragging horizontally changes the lower radial (Y-axis) limit while dragging vertically changes the upper limit. While the drag zoom mode may be used on 3-D surface plots as well, since it changes the upper and lower limits of the magnitude (Y) axis, it may produce undesirable results in the color and scale of the plot.

Pan provides drag panning function for Cartesian plots. Clicking and dragging on the graph will move the contents of the graph in the direction of mouse motion by changing the end points (maximum and minimum) of the graph axis. The function has no effect on polar or spherical plots, and will have similar behavior to the zoom function for Cartesian 3-D plots.


67


Graph Manipulation Functions allow mouse-oriented control over the appearance of the selected graph. Not all functions are

available or applicable for all graph types.

Zoom Window provides windows zoom function for Cartesian plots. Clicking and dragging on the graph will draw a selection rectangle around the drag area. Releasing the mouse button adjusts the graph scale to zoom to the selected area. This function has no effect on polar, Cartesian 3-D, or spherical plots.

Rotate/Zoom provides manipulation of the 3-D graphs. Clicking and dragging on a 3-D graph will rotate the graph in the direction of mouse motion. Holding control while dragging will zoom the view in or out along the screen-normal direction. Holding shift while dragging will change the aspect ratio or perspective of the 3-D view. The larger the aspect ratio, the less depth perception is provided by the graph.

Zoom Extents sets all axes of the graph to auto-scale, returning the graph to the original view. This function does not reset the 3-D zoom/depth adjustments made with the Rotate/Zoom function.

Spherical Plot Cut Functions provide the ability to slice off sections of a spherical plot along the three axial planes to all an "inside view" of the spherical surface. All three buttons toggle

between no cut and either half of the surface, for three possible settings and nine possible surface cutaways.

X-Z Cut splits the plot along the X-Z plane, showing the left or right hand side of the surface.

Y-Z Cut splits the plot along the Y-Z plane, showing the front or back side of the surface.

X-Y Cut splits the plot along the X-Y plane, showing the top or bottom side of the surface.



8.1.3 Graph Settings Dialog

Right clicking on the active graph will bring up the graph settings dialog. This dialog gives more direct control over the graph display as well as access to additional settings not available elsewhere. References to the X, Y, and Z axes are defined as follows:

The X-axis represents the horizontal axis for a Cartesian graph, the angular position of a polar plot, the X-axis of a Cartesian 3-D plot, and the first angular axis of a spherical plot.

The Y-axis represents the vertical axis for a Cartesian graph, the radial (magnitude) axis of a polar plot or spherical plot, and the Z-axis of a Cartesian 3-D plot (for visual consistency with the Cartesian plot).

The Z-axis is only valid for 3-D plots. It represents theY-axis of a Cartesian 3-D plot, and the second angular axis of a spherical plot.

The available functions are separated onto several different tabs:

Scale contains settings for controlling the scale of the graph.

Auto indicates a series of checkboxes for each axis limit setting. Checking the box will autoscale that axis limit or step. Axis limits are scaled to include the available data, while step size is scaled to the nearest mantissa of 1, 2, or 5 in order to produce ten or fewer grid divisions. By default, all settings are autoscaled.

X Maximum sets the desired maximum value for the X-axis. The actual end of the axis will be adjusted to be the nearest inclusive value allowed based on the setting of the Stepped Range Limits checkbox for this axis. In logarithmic axis mode, the axis end will be set to the nearest larger logarithmic multiple. This value only affects Cartesian and Cartesian 3-D graphs.

X Minimum sets the desired minimum value for the X-axis. The actual end of the axis will be adjusted to be the nearest inclusive value allowed based on the setting of the Stepped Range Limits checkbox for this axis. In logarithmic axis mode, the axis end will be set to the nearest smaller logarithmic multiple. This value only affects Cartesian and Cartesian 3-D graphs.


69


X Step sets the desired gridline step size for the X-axis. The actual setting will be adjusted to the nearest allowable value. In logarithmic axis mode, this setting is ignored.

Y Maximum sets the desired maximum value for the Y-axis. The actual end of the axis will be adjusted to be the nearest inclusive value allowed based on the setting of the Stepped Range Limits checkbox for this axis. In logarithmic axis mode, the axis end will be set to the nearest larger logarithmic multiple. Y Minimum sets the desired minimum value for the Y-axis. The actual end of the axis will be adjusted to be the nearest inclusive value allowed based on the setting of the Stepped Range Limits checkbox for this axis. In logarithmic axis mode, the axis end will be set to the nearest smaller logarithmic multiple.

Y Step sets the desired gridline step size for the Y-axis. The actual setting will be adjusted to the nearest allowable value. In logarithmic axis mode, this setting is ignored.

Z Maximum sets the desired maximum value for the Z-axis. The actual end of the axis will be adjusted to be the nearest inclusive value allowed based on the setting of the Stepped Range Limits checkbox for this axis. In logarithmic axis mode, the axis end will be set to the nearest larger logarithmic multiple. This setting only effects the Cartesian 3-D plot. This setting is for future expansion and is currently unavailable. Z Minimum sets the desired minimum value for the Z-axis. The actual end of the axis will be adjusted to be the nearest inclusive value allowed based on the setting of the Stepped Range Limits checkbox for this axis. In logarithmic axis mode, the axis end will be set to the nearest smaller logarithmic multiple. This setting only effects the Cartesian 3-D plot. This setting is for future expansion and is currently unavailable.

Z Step sets the desired gridline step size for the Z-axis. The actual setting will be adjusted to the nearest allowable value. In logarithmic axis mode, this setting is ignored.

Log X toggles the logarithmic axis view on the X-axis. This feature is only available on a Cartesian plot.

Log Y toggles the logarithmic axis view on the Y-axis. This feature is only available on Cartesian and Polar plots.



Log Z toggles the logarithmic axis view on the Z-axis. This feature is for future expansion and currently unavailable.

Auto checkboxes beside the Log checkboxes allow the log axis setting to be set automatically from the dataset.

Grid Moves with lower limit checkboxes control the way each axis sets its grid. When cleared, the grid is spaced on integral multiples of the step size, regardless of the axis limits. When checked, the grid is spaced based on the step size, starting from the lower limits. Thus, when cleared, a graph with limits of 1 and 9 and a step size of two would have gridlines at 2, 4, 6, and 8, while the same graph would have gridlines at 3, 5, and 7 when the box is checked.

Stepped Range Limits checkboxes control the way each axis handles the allowed maximum and minimum values of the axes. When cleared, the axis limits are adjusted to limit the range to the nearest thousandth of the maximum absolute value of limits and/or step size for that axis (i.e. three significant figures of display resolution). When checked, the axis limits are adjusted to be the nearest inclusive multiple of the grid step size. When used in conjunction with autoscaled grid step size, this allows easier visual evaluation of a signal magnitude, and more closely matches the way most graphical test equipment operates.

Labels contains settings for labeling the graph and its axes.

Title sets the title of the graph.

X-Axis sets the X-axis label.

Y-Axis sets the Y-axis label.

Z-Axis sets the Z-axis label.

Auto checkboxes for each label toggle between using the associated label entered into the edit box and automatically extracting the label from the data set if available.

Polar Axis Orientation allows changing the orientation of the zero axis of polar plots. By default, zero as at the top of the graph (i.e. along the vertical or Y axis), but this can be changed to orient zero along the right hand side of the graph, along the horizontal or X axis. The latter is common with most textbook polar representations, and is useful for reflecting the physical orientation of the AUT during MAPS based spherical pattern measurements. A global setting is also available in the Tools:Options… menu to set the preferred default orientation.


71


Traces contains controls for enabling, disabling, and setting the attributes of individual traces in a 2-D plot. This tab is only available for Cartesian and polar plots.

The Trace Selection list box provides a list of all traces with checkboxes beside each one to toggle the trace on or off. The label for each trace can be edited by clicking on the label field to enter edit mode. The manually edited label will override the default label for a given trace, so this information can be made part of a report template, etc. to apply that label to report data. If a trace is highlighted on the graph (using the cursor readout function), that trace will be highlighted in the list.

Trace Settings allows overriding the settings for each trace. By default, all traces are set to auto for all settings, allowing the graph to automatically determine the next available color and line type for each trace. When set to auto, the behavior on a black and white output device (i.e. printer) is adjusted to account for the lack of colors. The settings can be overridden on individual traces or a group of traces at once. The available settings include:

Color selects the desired color for the trace from the standard 16-color palette, or allows entering a custom color.

Line Type selects the line type from the ten available styles.

Trace Width selects the trace width up to ten times the standard width. Note that the larger widths may be impractical for most graphs.

Mark Type selects the mark to use for each data point. This feature is currently unimplemented but is present for future expansion.

Legend Entry checkbox controls the entry of the trace into the graph legend. When cleared, the trace is not included in the legend. Clearing this checkbox for all traces prevents the legend from being drawn.

Auto scale to visible traces only when checked, will change the autoscaling behavior so that only visible traces are used to determine the scale. When cleared, all traces are used to determine the scale. The default setting of this control can be adjusted under the Tools:Options… menu.

Show All sets all of the checkboxes in the trace selection list.



Hide All clears all of the checkboxes in the trace selection list. Note: If no traces are selected, the first trace will be displayed by the graph.

3-D contains settings for 3-D plots and is only available for those plots.

Azimuth indicates the rotation angle around the Z-axis direction. All rotations are performed around the center of the plot area. This rotation is applied to the data first.

Elevation indicates the rotation angle around the X-axis direction for spherical plots and around the horizontal screen axis for Cartesian 3-D. All rotations are performed around the center of the plot area. This rotation is applied to the data second.

Roll indicates the rotation angle around the Y-axis direction for spherical plots. It is not used for Cartesian 3-D plots. All rotations are performed around the center of the plot area. This rotation is applied to the data last.

Magnification controls the size of the 3-D image in the plot window. A magnification of one is normal full scale. The larger the number, the larger the plot image displayed.

Aspect Ratio sets the perspective or depth perception of the 3-D plot. A value of 5 is the default and a value of 2 is the minimum. As the aspect ratio approaches infinity, the perspective goes to zero (no depth perception).

Grid Step Size sets the 3-D grid step size in percent of full scale for Cartesian 3-D plots and in degrees for spherical plots. The data is interpolated as necessary when generating the 3-D grid.

Animation allows entering settings to animate the rotation of a 3-D graph. Note that CPU speed and 3-D grid step size will have a large impact on the available frame rate of this feature. While it is possible to animate linked graphs, it is not recommended for slow machines, and care must be exercised to avoid potential problems. Only one linked graph should have animation enabled at any time. Also, Windows limits the number of timers available for simultaneous use, so animating multiple unlinked graphs may result in exceptions due to reaching that limit.


73


Animate 3-D Rotation enables animation of a 3-D plot when checked. The visible graph will be rotated the specified number of degrees horizontally and vertically at each step. The rotation is performed similar to that created using the rotation cursor control.

Horizontal Step allows entering the desired rotation step around the vertical screen axis in degrees.

Vertical Step allows entering the desired rotation step around the horizontal screen axis in degrees.

Frame Rate allows specifying the desired frame rate for the animation. Slower machines and/or complex graphs and graph combinations will not be able to reach high frame rates. Setting this to a high number will cause the computer to spend all of its processing power animating the graph and leave little time for it to respond to user input.

Dimension Depth contains settings for multi-dimensional datasets and will only be visible if there are more than one trace.

Reduce dataset by N dimension(s) allows reducing the displayed dataset. For each dimension that the dataset is reduced (up to the maximum of the current dataset) a slider will appear in the dialog to allow selection of the desired value of each reduced dimension. When reduced dataset is being viewed in the graph, a button will appear under the cursor when hovering in the upper right hand corner of the graph window. Pressing this button will expand a panel that contains similar dimension value sliders to allow real-time manipulation of the visible data. When the data exceeds a certain size (currently 100,000 points), the graph will automatically reduce the view by one or more dimensions on initial display if the dataset is multi-dimensional. This avoids requiring an excessive time to plot a large dataset when a file is first loaded.

Dimension Value Slider(s) are shown for each dimension that the dataset has been reduced. These sliders allow selecting the desired value to be viewed for that dimension. Each dimension value defines the path into the dataset for the resulting plot data.



8.2 Data Table Component EMQuest utilizes a text grid component for displaying tabular data. This grid component allows viewing, exporting, and copying of measured data, as well as parameter and data entry. The grid component is used in a variety of places including the Table tab of a data file and in various parameter frames and dialogs.

Most functions are available from the application Main Menu, although there are a couple of button functions for the data table. The menu and button functions will act on the selected table.

8.2.1 Exporting and Copying

The contents of a selected data table can be exported to a file or copied to the clipboard. The export function (File:Export…) supports the formats of Comma Separated Variables (CSV), Tab Delimited Text (TXT), and Microsoft® Excel Spreadsheets (XLS). The latter requires a copy of Microsoft Excel be installed in order to export to an Excel spreadsheet. An Export to Excel Worksheet button, , is also provided, which will start Excel and send the table directly to a new worksheet. Both of the Excel export options use dynamic data exchange (DDE) and object linking and embedding (OLE) to transfer all of the tabular information including grid background colors, etc. As such, the export process can be extremely slow, especially when large tables are involved. For rapid export to Excel, use the CSV format, which is recognized automatically by Excel.

In addition to exporting the table, all or part of the data can be copied to the clipboard and pasted directly to an Excel spreadsheet or other application. Where the grid component is used for input, data can be pasted to the grid as well.


75


8.2.1.1 Viewing All Data vs. Selected Points Pressing the Selected/All Data button toggles between

viewing all measured data and the selected points specified under Output Points on the Output parameters tab. By entering desired output points, the visible data set can be reduced. Tabular data will be interpolated or extrapolated as necessary, so care should be taken to avoid selected output points that produce erroneous output. For large datasets, the output points may be used to reduce the visible tabular data to a more manageable size. When the data exceeds a certain size (currently 100,000 points), the grid component will warn that filling the grid will take an excessive amount of time, allowing the user to avoid displaying the un-reduced dataset.

8.3 Document Editor/Report Generator

8.3.1 Template Editor

EMQuest contains a word-processor style template editor used to generate report templates and display automatically generated reports using those templates. The template editor provides a "what you see is what you get" (WYSIWYG) environment with functions similar to those found in Microsoft® Word. Fields for desired parameters, graphs, or tabular data can be entered into the template and formatted as necessary. Once the template has been created, it may be selected under the "Output" node of the test parameters in order to format the data output. Formatted output can be printed directly or exported to an RTF file to be imported into Microsoft Word or other word processor for additional modifications.

The template editor window contains common word processing controls such as a ruler, status bar, and tool bar. For information on the available commands and toolbar buttons, refer to the Main Menu. The template editor contains two tabs at the bottom of the window. These tabs allow switching between the Template View and the Report View. In the Template View, the report template is shown with all fields showing the actual field name/code. Upon switching to the Report View, a merge is performed with any associated datafile, and the actual report that would be



generated by the template is shown. Note that while it is possible to edit the report generated in the report view, the edits will not translate back to the template. The template editor is not available in Lite versions of EMQuest.

The report view is also used to facilitate the Print Preview mode, which shows the report to be generated prior to sending to a printer. The print preview can be exported to an RTF file for import to a word processor.

8.4 Data File Window

8.4.1 Test Parameters Page

The Parameters page is used to select or display the desired test method, and to enter and/or review test parameters required to perform that test. For test parameter files, test selection and parameter entry is allowed, while for data files, only parameter review is allowed, with the exception of output related parameters. The Parameters page consists of the test selection box, the parameter tree, and the parameter edit/view frame.

The Test Select combobox at the top right of the page allows selection of the desired test or displays the currently selected or measured test. Once a test type is displayed in the test selection box, the Parameter Tree will contain nodes representing the various types of parameter information required by the test. The available nodes will vary depending on the test, but some typical nodes include:

Test Information is used for selection of the desired test and entry of IUT information.

Operator/Comments is used for entry of test operator information, comments, and similar information.

Parameters is used for entry of test specific parameters.


77


Corrections is used for entry or selection of correction factors for various measurement components (i.e. cable loss, amplifier gain, range calibrations, etc.). This may be have one panel for all corrections, or, for more complicated tests, may open to branches with panels for each specific type of correction data.

Frequency Range(s) is a placeholder for a list of parameters for multi-range tests, or contains the frequency range information for single range tests.

Range # is used for entering range specific configuration information. Additional nodes beneath this one provide additional range specific configurations for equipment, etc. Note that not all equipment will support all possible configurations offered by this node.

Equipment is used for selection of test equipment supported by the test for the corresponding range. Each selected piece of equipment will add a node to the tree-view beneath the Equipment node, allowing entry of test specific equipment configuration information (i.e. bandwidth, points per trace, rotational speed, etc.)

Paths allows entry of source and output directories/files that differ from the default paths configured under Tools : Options….

Output allows the entry of selected data points for interpolated/extrapolated output.

Notification allows configuring an alert sound or e-mail notification at the completion of the test. The settings in this dialog will override the global notifications settings in the Tools : Options… menu.

Ancillary Equipment allows selecting specialized settings for specific types of equipment (i.e. switches and positioners) not normally required to perform the test, in order to set them to predefined states at certain points in the test.

If any node has additional parameter nodes under it, there will be a [+] symbol by the node name. Clicking on that [+] will open the parameter branch to show the additional parameter nodes. Clicking on a node will display the associated Parameter Frame below the test selection box. For parameter files, this will allow setting of any available parameters associated with the node. The contents of a given parameter frame depends on the particular test and node selected. For information on the individual settings for



a given piece of equipment, use the context sensitive help either by selecting the control in question and pressing F1, or by pressing the button and then selecting the control or function group of interest.

8.4.2 Graph Page

The Graph page is used to review acquired data in graphical format. It will only be visible for data files that contain graphable data. Depending on the available data set and data type, there will be one or more graphs which can be displayed in one or more formats. For more information on graphing capabilities, refer to the documentation on the graph component.

8.4.3 Table Page

The Table page is used to review acquired data in tabular form. It will only be visible for data files that contain tabular data. Depending on the complexity of the data set, the table will be formatted to show measured and/or post-processed data in columns as a function of the various independent parameters (frequency, angle, height, polarization, etc.) used to acquire the data. For more information on tabular capabilities, refer to the documentation on the data table component .

8.4.4 Measurement Progress Page

The Measurement Progress page provides feedback to the user as data is acquired. This may be in the form of graphical data and/or various static values, depending on the test.


79


8.5 Equipment Control Panel The equipment control panel is used to install and configure the various test equipment that will be used to perform the data acquisition tests provided with the EMQuest package. Based on the options purchased with the EMQuest package, there will be a number of equipment drivers that have been installed and enabled by the license certificate. Before running a test, EMQuest needs to know what equipment is connected to the computer as well as information on how to communicate with it and what options are installed on the equipment. This is done by adding instances of the equipment driver configurations for each piece of equipment that will be used.

The driver selection tree is displayed on the left hand side of the control panel. The available equipment drivers are subdivided into various categories organized by generic device types (spectrum analyzer, network analyzer, linear positioner, rotational positioner, hybrid, etc.) The categories listed are determined by the available drivers; a category will only be listed if at least one driver of that type is installed and enabled. Clicking on the [+] symbol next to a category name will open that branch of the tree listing the available driver types beneath it. Right clicking on a driver name will provide a menu option to Add New that, when clicked, will create a new instance of the equipment, giving it a unique name and placing it as a node under the driver name. If any of the drivers have existing instances already configured, there will be a [+] symbol by the driver name. Clicking on that [+] will open the driver branch to show the configured instances of that equipment type.

Clicking on the name of an equipment instance will show the equipment configuration pane on the right hand side of the control panel. This will allow setting of any available device configuration information. For information on the individual settings for a given piece of equipment, use the context sensitive help either by selecting the control in question and pressing F1, or by pressing the

button and then selecting the control or function group of interest.

Clicking again on the name of a selected equipment instance allows renaming that instance. This allows entering a more descriptive name for each instance to aid in identifying it later. Each equipment instance must have a unique name and each name must conform to the requirements of a Windows long file name.



Right clicking on the name of an equipment instance will show a menu that will allow you to Duplicate the instance, automatically assigning it a new unique name, or to Delete the selected instance. The duplicate option provides an easy way to create two instances with identical option settings. All that is required is that the GPIB address of the duplicate instance be changed to reflect the address of the second device.

8.5.1 Equipment Configurations

Most equipment drivers support pre-defined configurations that can be added under the configuration node for that equipment instance. Right-clicking on the Equipment Configurations node under a configuration node will bring up a menu to allow defining pre-configured test parameter settings for the device. Each new configuration will appear in its own node with a default name. Right clicking a configuration node gives additional menu items to delete or rename the node. Once defined, these pre-configured settings can be used to quickly set up equipment in a test parameter file. Right-click on the equipment parameter page in a parameter file to access the pre-configured parameter list for the selected equipment. For most instruments, the exercise dialog also supports a right-click menu applying settings from the pre-configured parameters.

8.5.2 Ancillary Configurations

For equipment drivers that support ancillary equipment states, the control panel supports pre-defined ancillary configurations that can be added under the configuration node for that equipment instance. Right-clicking on the Ancillary Configurations node under a configuration node will bring up a menu to allow defining pre-configured ancillary parameter settings for the device. Each new configuration will appear in its own node with a default name. Right clicking an ancillary configuration node gives additional menu items to delete or rename the node. Once defined, these pre-configured settings can be used to quickly set up ancillary equipment in a test parameter file. Right-click on the ancillary equipment parameter page in a parameter file to access the pre-configured parameter list for the selected equipment. For some instruments, the exercise dialog also


81


supports a right-click menu applying settings from the pre-configured ancillary parameters.

8.5.3 Equipment Configuration Pane

This pane of the equipment control panel displays the configuration panel for the selected equipment configuration instance. It allows the review and setting of any available device configuration information. The base configuration information required will be that necessary to establish communication with the device and define any optional features or capabilities installed on the device. Information required to configure the device for a specific test will be entered into the parameter page of the equipment once it has been selected for use in the test parameters.

In addition to the base configuration, most equipment drivers allow adding pre-defined test parameter settings to the equipment configuration. This allows definition of commonly used equipment parameters for quick setup of new test parameter files. Equipment that supports this feature will show their configuration panel on the first page (Equipment Settings) of a set of tabbed pages lined up across the bottom of the window. Additional pre-defined parameter pages may be added to the equipment configuration by right-clicking on the configuration pane. Right clicking on a parameter page will allow renaming or deleting the page, as well as adding another page. In the equipment parameter node of a parameter set, right clicking on the page will display a list of the available pre-defined parameters for that equipment, allowing the parameters to be updated from the selected configuration. Some exercise dialogs also support a right click menu to set the device to the pre-defined state.

For more information on the individual settings for a given piece of equipment, use the context sensitive help either by selecting the control in question and pressing F1, or by pressing the button and then selecting the control or function group of interest.



9 Licensing and Registration

9.1 Entering License Certificates The License Certificate dialog allows entering a license certificate to enable the functionality of the EMQuest package. Refer to the Getting Started section on license certificates for more information on the different types of certificates, where to find them, and how to use them.

To enable EMQuest, copy and paste the entire license certificate, including header and footer information, into the edit box of the License Certificate dialog. It won’t hurt if there is additional text outside the header or footer of the certificate. The Ctrl-V or Shift-Insert keyboard shortcuts can be used to paste the certificate into the control, or right click on the box and select paste. Press the Ok button to accept the new certificate. If there is any problem with the certificate that was entered, a message box will indicate the cause of the error.

Once a valid license certificate has been entered, the application will restart, or, if the license dialog was shown at application start, complete the initialization process.

The License Certificate dialog also provides access to the Registration Information dialog by pressing the Register… button. In order to permanently enable the EMQuest software with all licensed features, it is necessary to send in a registration form and certificate in order to receive a full registration certificate. The registration must be performed on the machine for which the license is to be granted, since the registration certificate will lock the software to that machine only. Note: Registration is only required if you have purchased a fully licensed copy of EMQuest. If you are using a demo or evaluation copy of EMQuest, please do not send in the registration information.

9.1.1 Entering Registration Information

The Registration Information dialog allows entry and automatic delivery of required registration information. This registration information must be provided prior to obtaining a full registration license certificate to permanently enable all purchased functions. The available fields and functions include:


83


Send automatically sends the entered registration information to ets-lindgren.com through an available Messaging API (MAPI) compliant e-mail program. If the attempt to send the registration fails, a message box will appear warning of the failure.

Register… brings up a dialog to allow manual submission of the registration. This dialog will display the registration information in a text box, allowing the user to copy and paste the registration information to another location. The dialog will indicate the location to e-mail the registration to, or if e-mail is totally unavailable, the registration can be saved to a text file on a 3.5" floppy and mailed in. The registration information MUST be received in electronic format to allow generating the registration license certificate.

Cancel closes the registration dialog.

Authorized User: is for entering the company, organization, or division name that will appear in the "registered to:" location in the "About" box. This should normally NOT be the name of an individual.

Name: is the name of the primary contact for this copy of the software.

Company: is the company name of the registered owner of the license.

Address:, City:, State:, Zip:, & Country: allow the entry of the mailing address of the primary contact. Phone: is the phone number of the primary contact.

Fax: is the fax number of the primary contact. E-Mail: is the e-mail address of the primary contact. This information is required to automatically receive the registration license certificate via e-mail.

Comments: any comments entered here will automatically be added to the registration message.



9.2 Submitting Registration Information If the registration information can’t be e-mailed automatically from the Registration Information dialog, this dialog can be used to manually submit the registration information. This dialog will display the registration information in a text box, allowing the user to copy and paste the registration information to another location, or save it to a text file by pressing the Save As… button. The dialog will indicate the location to e-mail the registration to, or if e-mail is totally unavailable, the registration can be saved to a text file using the Save As… option and mailed in on a 3.5" floppy disk. The registration information MUST be received in electronic format to allow generating the registration license certificate. Do not send in hard copy registration information.


85





10 Tools

10.1 Options Dialog The Options dialog, available from the Tools menu, provides control over a number of global preference settings for EMQuest. Many of the default behaviors of various controls can be set from this dialog. These settings are divided among a number of tabbed entries, which include:

Preferences tab contains many of the basic preference settings for application.

General Preferences control functionality of the main application.

Most recently used file list: allows setting the desired number of entries in the most recently used file list under the File menu. The default is four, but can be increased up to 14.

Print button skips print dialog (quick print) will, when checked, cause the print button on the button bar to print immediately, without displaying the printer select dialog. The print function from the File menu will still operate normally.

Migrate parameters on test selection change causes the matching parameters to be maintained between parameter sets when the test selection is changed for a parameter file. When checked, EMQuest will map as many parameters as possible from the original parameter tree to the new parameter tree for the newly selected test. Note that not all parameters have the same range of values or same meaning for different tests, so the user must take care to inspect the parameters to make sure the migration set all parameters as desired prior to executing a test.

Data Acquisition Preferences control behavior of tests and related data acquisition functionality.

Always prompt for IUT preparation at start of test will, when checked, force any optional dialogs to prompt the user to setup the instrument(s) under test prior to recording any data. These dialog will normally display automatically between any equipment initialization and the beginning of the data acquisition process, but won’t display if no equipment initialization is required (due to having been configured properly before a previous test).


87


Run test measurements in threads will use versions of the tests designed to run in their own Windows thread. Threaded tests operate separately from the user interface thread so that user interactions with the program will have less impact on the data acquisition process. While such interaction will still require processor time and slow the measurement process, it will not completely stop. The default is to run threaded tests. This option is only provided temporarily during the migration process to threaded tests in order to allow reverting to a non-threaded test should problems be encountered. It will probably be removed by the next release of the software.

Graphs tab contains global settings for the graphing components.

Default Settings list a number of graph settings that can have their default values defined globally.

Polar graphs have zero along vertical (Y) axis and Polar graphs have zero along horizontal (X) axis change the orientation of the zero axis of polar plots. By default, zero as at the top of the graph (i.e. along the vertical or Y axis), but this can be changed to orient zero along the right hand side of the graph, along the horizontal or X axis. The latter is common with most textbook polar representations, and is useful for reflecting the physical orientation of the AUT during MAPS based spherical pattern measurements.

Auto scale to visible traces only when checked, will change the autoscaling behavior so that only visible traces are used to determine the scale. When cleared, all traces are used to determine the scale.

Multi-Graph displays default to panes and Multi-Graph displays default to tabs determine the default setting for graphs in new data files and most other multi-graph displays. They can either show initially in the normal multi-graph view where all graphs are visible simultaneously or where all each graph is on a separate tab. Note that this setting will not affect data files that are reloaded after saving their graph settings. Those files will display in the exact same format as prior to saving.

Directories tab contains global settings for the location of various input and output directories. The desired path may be entered directly into the edit boxes, or the Browse… buttons beside each box can be used to bring up a file dialog and find the desired file or path on the computer. Leaving a field blank will return it to the default setting. The combobox dropdown contains a recently used list of values for each field.

Output Data Storage Paths allow customizing the target storage location for the specified test. These paths include:



History List, which controls where the test history database is stored. This allows maintaining different history lists for different groups of testing. When this selection is changed, EMQuest will switch to the test database in the corresponding directory, creating a new one if necessary.

Raw Data, which controls where automatically generated raw data files will be stored at the end of a test or after update of an existing raw data file. This setting can be overridden by the corresponding setting in the parameter file.

Final Data, which controls the default path for individual final data files when Save As… is used to save the processed data from a raw data file. This setting can be overridden by the corresponding setting in the parameter file.

Source Data Files, which allow specifying the location of certain special files that may be useful. These paths include:

Standard allows the selection of a reference file for comparison to measured data for certain file types. This setting can be overridden by the corresponding setting in the parameter file.

Note: This feature will be supported in a later revision, but is provided to maintain backwards compatibility.

Output Templates, which allow selection of report template (.RTT) files for generating formatted output. These paths include:

Report specifies the main report template used to output a customized report. This template is used when the print function is activated from the Parameters tab. This setting can be overridden by the corresponding setting in the parameter file.

Graph specifies the template used to output the selected graph on the Graph page. In this case, the current settings and appearance of the selected graph override any settings embedded in the template to allow capture of the current graph view. This setting can be overridden by the corresponding setting in the parameter file.

Alerts tab contains global settings for e-mail and audio alert notifications. These settings may be overridden on the Notifications tab of a parameter file.


89


E-Mail Notification provides options for e-mailing notifications on various test conditions. E-Mail notification requires a properly configured Simple MAPI compatible e-mail program without any security restrictions against background e-mailing. This feature is useful for remote monitoring of an unattended test or automatic notification of test progress to supervisory personnel.

Send e-mail notification on test completion, when checked, will generate an e-mail to those addresses in the list upon successful completion of a test.

Attach raw data file to e-mail causes the just measured raw data file to be attached to the test completion e-mail. This is useful for remote analysis of data using a post-processing license of EMQuest.

Send e-mail notification on errors or warnings will, when checked, generate an e-mail to those addresses in the list upon popup of an error or warning dialog.

E-mail address list contains the list of e-mail contacts that will receive the automatic notifications caused by the checkboxes listed above. Double-click on an address to remove or edit it.

Add e-mail contact adds a new address to the E-Mail address list. Type in the address and press Add to add it to the list.

Alert Sound, provides options for playing an alert sound on various test conditions.

Play alert sound on test completion, when checked, will play the selected alert wave file upon successful completion of a test.

Use continuous play will, when checked, cause the alert sound to be repeated continuously until a user intervenes. Clearing the checkbox will cause the alert to play only once.

Alert wave file allows specifying the desired wave file for the alert. Press the Browse… button to search for the desired wave file.

Operators tab contains a list of test operators that can be selected from the Operator combobox under the Operator/Comments node of the parameter tree.

Test Operator List contains the list and list editor field. To add an entry to the list, type it into the edit box and press Add. To remove or edit an entry, double click on the entry in the list box and it will be removed from the list and placed in the edit box for editing.

Instrument Types tab contains a list of instrument under test (IUT) types that can be selected from the Type combobox under the Test Information node of the parameter tree.



Instrument Under Test (IUT) Type List contains the list and list editor field. To add an entry to the list, type it into the edit box and press Add. To remove or edit an entry, double click on the entry in the list box and it will be removed from the list and placed in the edit box for editing.

Manufacturers tab contains a list of instrument under test (IUT) manufacturers that can be selected from the Manufacturer combobox under the Test Information node of the parameter tree.

Instrument Under Test (IUT) Manufacturer List contains the list and list editor field. To add an entry to the list, type it into the edit box and press Add. To remove or edit an entry, double click on the entry in the list box and it will be removed from the list and placed in the edit box for editing.

Instrument Models tab contains a list of instrument under test (IUT) model numbers that can be selected from the Model combobox under the Test Information node of the parameter tree.

Instrument Under Test (IUT) Model Number List contains the list and list editor field. To add an entry to the list, type it into the edit box and press Add. To remove or edit an entry, double click on the entry in the list box and it will be removed from the list and placed in the edit box for editing.

10.2 Tabular Data Graphing Tool This tool allows entering 2-D and 3-D datasets in order to use the graphing capabilities of EMQuest to view the data. Data can be pasted into the table on the Enter Data tab from another spreadsheet in EMQuest or from a Microsoft® Excel spreadsheet. Then, by toggling to the View Graph tab, the corresponding data can be viewed in graphical format. The graph can be exported from this view similar to any other data set graph. The View Data tab shows the data in tabular form for verification of how the entered data was interpreted.

The pictures below illustrate the format for entering data. The axes can be manually labeled as indicated in the first screen shot, or the comboboxes can be used to set up the axis labels and units as indicated in the second screenshot.


91


Note: This tool has been added as a bonus feature to the EMQuest package, and is not directly supported under any technical support or maintenance agreements. It is provided as-is and may be enhanced as resources allow.



11 Measurements

11.1 Generic Test Parameters

11.1.1 IUT Panes

The IUT Pane(s) are used to describe the instrument(s) under test. In keeping with common calibration terminology, the device(s) being measured or calibrated is referred to as Instrumentation, and the test and measurement equipment used to perform the measurement is referred to as Equipment. This terminology will be used regularly throughout the EMQuest application and documentation. Depending on the test, however, the descriptor at the top of the IUT pane(s) may be customized to refer to specific instrument types (such as "antenna under test" (AUT)). For a test with multiple IUTs, indexing information may also be contained in the labels. In addition, drag-and-drop capability is supported to allow rearranging the order of IUTs in the list.

The information recorded for each IUT is as follows:

Manufacturer allows entry of the IUT manufacturer or selection from a predefined list.

Model allows entry of the IUT model number or selection from a predefined list.

Serial Number allows entry of the IUT serial number or selection from a predefined list.

Type allows entry of the IUT device type information or selection from a predefined list.

The data for each predefined list can be entered using Tools : Options….


93


11.1.2 Operator/Comments Pane

The Operator/Comments Pane is used to enter additional information about the test, including the test operator and any other incidental information not covered by other parameters in the parameter tree. The available fields include:

Operator allows entry of the test operator or selection from a predefined list. The data for the predefined list can be entered using Tools : Options….

Comments provides a large text field for entering any user comments or setup description information not addressed by other test parameters.

Test Time consists of a group of fields as follows:

Test Start Time is a read only field indicating what time and date the test execution began. This value is automatically generated when the test is run, and cannot be entered into the parameter list manually.

Test End Time is a read only field indicating what time and date the test execution completed. This value is automatically generated when the test is run, and cannot be entered into the parameter list manually.

Test Duration is a read only field indicating how long the test took to complete. This value is automatically generated when the test is run, and cannot be entered into the parameter list manually.

Temperature/Humidity consists of a group of fields as follows:

Temperature is used to record the temperature at the time of the test. If an automatic temperature sensor and driver are available, this measurement can be automated.

Humidity is used to record the humidity at the time of the test. If an automatic humidity sensor and driver are available, this measurement can be automated.



11.1.3 Frequency Range Pane

The Frequency Range Pane provides for the entry of frequency information for most tests. Some tests may support multiple ranges and provide multiple frequency range panes, each with their own equipment configurations. The available settings include:

Frequency Range Type, which allows the selection of one of three different frequency range formats:

Linear Frequency is the default format, with frequency points spaced linearly between a start and stop frequency. This mode is supported by most available test equipment.

List Frequency switches to the list frequency display and provides a table for entry of the desired discrete frequency points. Note: Not all equipment has this capability, and the number of available frequency points varies by equipment type and manufacturer. Refer to your equipment documentation for more information on available list or segmented frequency range settings. The result of using list frequency for unsupported equipment or with too many list points is undefined.

Log Frequency records data with frequency points spaced logarithmically between a start and stop frequency. Note: Not all equipment has this capability, and the range of frequencies where logarithmic frequency data is valid varies by equipment type and manufacturer. Refer to your equipment documentation for more information on available log frequency range settings. The result of using log frequency for unsupported equipment or outside the frequency bands supported by the equipment is undefined.

Frequency Range allows the selection of the frequency range for linear and log frequency ranges. The settings include:

Start allows entry of the desired starting frequency of the frequency range in MHz. Changing this value will automatically adjust the center and span settings appropriately.

Stop allows entry of the desired ending frequency of the frequency range in MHz. Changing this value will automatically adjust the center and span settings appropriately.


95


Center allows entry of the desired center frequency of the frequency range in MHz. Changing this value will automatically adjust the start and stop settings appropriately.

Span allows entry of the desired span of the frequency range in MHz. Changing this value will automatically adjust the start and stop settings appropriately. This value can only be changed for user defined frequency ranges.

Range Control determines how the frequency information will be handled and overrides certain frequency range settings. The range control selections are:

Zero Span, which will force the frequency range to zero span and automatically lock start, stop, and center frequency settings to the same value. This is the desired mode when the exact frequency of the received signal is known and/or time dependent data acquisition is required. In zero span mode, swept devices will generate data as a function of sweep time at the specified frequency. The mode can also provide the fastest sweep time for CW measurements. Setting the Span setting to zero will normally generate the same result.

Default Span sets the frequency span at test time based on the bandwidth setting. This mode is used primarily for signals that may not be located exactly at the specified center frequency. It allows the use of a max marker search to track the peak within a small band.

User Defined allows complete control of the start, stop, center, and span settings of the frequency range.

Discrete Frequency Points provides the table for entering list frequency points.



11.1.4 Corrections Pane

The Corrections Pane allows the entry of constant and/or frequency dependent corrections to be applied to measured data. A given test may have one or more correction sets to be applied to different portions of the data. Each set of corrections will have its own pane in the parameter tree. The available settings are as follows:

The Corrections list box holds a list of response file names for frequency dependent corrections. The response files can be either .RSP files or raw data files (.RAW) from a response measurement. Each file name will have a "+" or "-" in front of it to indicate that the corresponding data will be either added to or subtracted from the measured data. Note: The user must ensure that the files in the list match the expected format, units, and required frequency range to avoid unpredictable results. Otherwise extrapolation or other errors may result. While it is possible to apply specialized corrections to intentionally change the data type and meaning of the resulting data (i.e. apply a correction of +107 dB to convert from dBm to dBµV), the data will still maintain the original labeling information. Therefore, while the expert user can take advantage of this capability, appropriate measures should be taken to provide comments or other indications to document the intended effect of the special corrections.

The following buttons are used to edit the corrections list:

Add… displays the file open dialog box to search for a response file to add to the measured data. The path to the selected file will be appended to the end of the list with a "+" in front of it to indicate that the data will be added to the measured result.

Subtract… displays the file open dialog box to search for a response file to add to the measured data. The path to the selected file will be appended to the end of the list with a "-" in front of it to indicate that the data will be subtracted from the measured result.

Remove deletes the selected path from the list.

Toggle Sign toggles the selected entry between adding and subtracting from the measured result.

The Constant edit box allows the entry of a single constant correction to be applied to all data points.


97


11.1.5 Paths Pane

The Paths Pane allows specifying source and output directories/files for this particular parameter or data file that differ from the default paths configured under Tools : Options…. These include:

Output Data Storage Paths, which allow customizing the target storage location for the specified test. These paths include:

Raw Data, which controls where automatically generated raw data files will be stored at the end of a test or after update of an existing raw data file.

Final Data, which controls the default path for individual final data files when Save As… is used to save the processed data from a raw data file.

Source Data Files, which allow specifying the location of certain special files that may be useful. These paths include:

Standard allows the selection of a reference file for comparison to measured data for certain file types. Note: This feature will be supported in a later revision, but is provided to maintain backwards compatibility.

Output Templates, which allow selection of report template (.RTT) files for generating formatted output. These paths include:

Report specifies the main report template used to output a customized report. This template is used when the print function is activated from the Parameters tab.

Graph specifies the template used to output the selected graph on the Graph page. In this case, the current settings and appearance of the selected graph override any settings embedded in the template to allow capture of the current graph view.

The desired path may be entered directly into the edit boxes, or the Browse… buttons beside each box can be used to bring up a file dialog and find the desired file or path on the computer. Leaving a field blank will return it to the default setting. The combobox dropdown contains a recently used list of values for each field.



11.1.6 Output Pane

The Output Pane is used to configure any available formatting parameters for data review and output. These include:

Y-Axis Format allows formatting the number of digits to display for the Y-axis (actual measured data) values. The available settings include:

Override Default Formatting, when checked, will use the format information specified here in place of the default format defined by the test for all Y values.

Width specifies the desired minimum width of the floating-point value in characters. The output value will be padded with zeros on the left as needed to reach the requested width. Specifying a width less than the available number of digits will have no effect.

Precision specifies the desired number of digits to be displayed after the decimal place. The output value will be padded with zeros on the right as needed to reach the requested number of digits after the decimal.

Example Output shows the effect of the previous two settings on a floating-point number.

Output Points provides a table with a column for each available X-axis that supports formatting. By entering values into each column, the tabular data shown on the Table page and the tabular data generated by a report can be aligned to the requested values. The data will automatically be interpolated or extrapolated as necessary to align it with the requested points. Note: The requested points should lie within the expected range of data to avoid extrapolation errors that could result in erroneous data.

Right clicking on the table will provide a menu with options for filling or clearing a range, as well as formatting the output X-axis values of the selected column.


99


11.1.7 Notification Pane

The Notification Pane allows overriding the default event notification features set under Tools : Options… for the associated parameter file. The available settings include:

Notification Options, control the behavior of the notifications:

Use Default Notification Options, when checked, will use the notification options set in Tools : Options… instead of those in the parameter file. Clear this checkbox to enable the parameter file notification settings.

E-Mail Notification, provides options for e-mailing notifications on various test conditions. E-Mail notification requires a properly configured Simple MAPI compatible e-mail program without any security restrictions against background e-mailing. This feature is useful for remote monitoring of an unattended test or automatic notification of test progress to supervisory personnel.

Send E-Mail Notification on Test Completion, when checked, will generate an e-mail to those addresses in the list upon successful completion of a test.

Attach Raw Data File causes the just measured raw data file to be attached to the test completion e-mail. This is useful for remote analysis of data using a post-processing license of EMQuest.

Send E-Mail Notification on Errors or Warnings will, when checked, generate an e-mail to those addresses in the list upon popup of an error or warning dialog.

E-Mail Address List contains the list of e-mail contacts that will receive the automatic notifications caused by the checkboxes listed above. Double-click on an address to remove or edit it.

Add E-Mail Contact adds a new address to the E-Mail address list. Type in the address and press Add to add it to the list.

Alert Sound, provides options for playing an alert sound on various test conditions.

Play Alert Sound on Test Completion, when checked, will play the selected alert wave file upon successful completion of a test.



Use Continuous Play will, when checked, cause the alert sound to be repeated continuously until a user intervenes. Clearing the checkbox will cause the alert to play only once.

Alert Wave File allows specifying the desired wave file for the alert. Press the Browse… button to search for the desired wave file.

11.1.8 Ancillary Equipment Pane

The Ancillary Equipment Pane allows configuring a target state for selected ancillary support equipment. The available settings will depend on the equipment selected (use the context sensitive help on each tabbed page for more information on the equipment settings), and can be set to take action at a number of points in a typical test process. The available test points (ancillary states) are represented by separate tabs and include:

Pre-Calibration allows configuring a state to be applied prior to performing any equipment calibration step. This state can be used to automatically switch in a special calibration fixture, etc. and is only applied if a calibration step is performed.

Pre-Test allows configuring a state to be applied prior to the beginning of a test, but after any equipment calibration step(s) have been performed. This state is typically used to position the DUT to a desired test position or to initialize a signal path between the DUT and the rest of the test equipment. The state will always be applied unless disabled.

Sequential Polarization allows configuring a state to be applied at the polarization step of a sequentially polarized pattern test. This can be used to switch and RF switch or rotate a mechanical polarization control.

Post-Test allows configuring a state to be applied at the end of a test. This state is useful for returning the equipment to its original state at the end of a test. The state will always be applied unless disabled.


101


11.2 Batch Tests

11.2.1 Running Batch Tests Using EMQuest Introduction

EMQuest supports basic batch test functionality, allowing a sequence of tests to be defined and run in order. This capability is currently provided to satisfy the general need for batch tests and will be enhanced in later releases. It allows configuring a list of tests and executing them one after the other, adding common comments and other information to each test. The tests will execute normally, and any user intervention normally required to run the test will still be necessary in batch mode. This can be minimized by ensuring that any equipment calibrations are performed prior to running a batch test, and that the "Always prompt for IUT preparation at start of test" checkbox is cleared in the Tools:Options:Preferences tab. The addition of ancillary equipment support adds to the batch test capability by allowing the addition of supporting positioners and switches to each test process. Thus, for example, identical tests can be repeated with different position states to add position dependence to a test, or different tests can be run with different equipment switched into the circuit as needed. Each test is stored into its own raw data file as usual.



11.2.2 Configuring a Batch Test

The following is an overview of the steps required to set up a batch test.

11.2.2.1 Individual Test Setup

Each test that is to be included in a batch test must first have an appropriate parameter file created and saved to disk. Refer to the documentation for the particular test for more information on setting up the parameter file(s).

11.2.2.2 Parameters Create a new parameter file and then select Batch Test Measurements to enter the necessary test information. Refer to the help for each page of the parameters for more details on each parameter. Most parameters have default settings which will allow an almost immediate "ready to run" state. It’s only necessary to select the appropriate test parameters and press the Run button to start a test. However, these default settings probably won’t be exactly what’s required for a given application, so it’s necessary to review and modify the parameters as needed.

The Batch Select node allows selection of the list of parameter files to be run in the batch. Refer to the Batch Select help section for more information on selecting the parameter files.

Most of the remaining nodes provide the ability to enter information to replace or supplement the equivalent information in each of the selected test parameters as they are executed. The identifying information in the Test Information node will be used in all batch parameter files, as well as the Operator, Temperature, and Humidity from the Operator/Comments node. The Comments field will be appended to the comments in each test parameter to avoid losing any test specific comments in each file. Use the Paths node to specify any custom output paths and/or output templates for this data. Otherwise each test will use those configured in its own Paths node.

The Notification tab to changes the default test completion notification for the batch test from that configured in the Tools : Options… dialog. Notifications are suppressed from individual tests in the batch.


103


11.2.2.3 Running a Batch Test Once all parameter files have been developed for each test and selected into the batch parameter file, the data acquisition process is as simple as all other EMQuest tests. Make sure that all cables and equipment are connected, warmed up, and operating properly, and press the "Run" button. Each test will execute in order according to the corresponding test procedure. Since the test process takes precedence, the raw data files for each test are generated, but are not automatically loaded and displayed. Use the measurement history list to select and load the raw data.

11.2.3 Batch Select Pane, Batch Test Measurements

The Batch Select pane allows the selection of a list of parameter files to be run in a batch. When the batch test is executed, it will run each selected test in the order specified in the list. The available settings include:

Parameter Files contains a list of all selected parameter files to run in order.

Add… brings up a file open dialog to allow adding files to the list. Multiple files can be loaded at once.

Remove removes the highlighted parameter file from the list.

Move Up moves the highlighted parameter file up one position in the list.

Move Down moves the highlighted parameter file down one position in the list.



11.3 Pattern Measurement

11.3.1 Pattern Measurement Basics Introduction

Antenna pattern measurement refers to the determination of the radiation pattern of an antenna under test (AUT). That is, the measurement of the relative magnitude and sometimes phase of an electromagnetic signal received from the AUT. While highly directional antennas (i.e. horns) are often measured by scanning a plane perpendicular to the bore sight axis of the antenna (that is, parallel to the face of the horn) at some distance, this document will focus primarily on total spherical pattern measurements. A subset of this is the simple polar planar cut, where the pattern is determined for a single azimuth rotation around the antenna.

It should be noted that since a passive antenna is reciprocal, the pattern information could be obtained by using it either as the transmitter or receiver. However, in addition to the relative information that makes up the antenna pattern itself, and the various pieces of information that can be determined from it, there are a variety of other results that can be determined when dealing with an active antenna system. In that case, transmit and receive behavior may be considerably different, and thus both relative pattern and absolute power information is required.

While complex antenna pattern measurement has been a common requirement in the microwave antenna arena for many years, recently it has become a more common feature to other areas, including electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and wireless telecommunication. On the EMC front, the interest in pattern measurements appears to stem from a range of sources. The first is that as EMC standards are forced to move higher in frequency, the effects of narrow beam radiation from the equipment under test (EUT) and the corresponding interaction with the receive antenna are of increasing concern. It is important that the test antenna be able to see all signals radiated from the EUT. In addition to this, broadband antennas designed for EMC work are finding their way into other applications where concern for antenna patterns have always been an issue. Finally, many engineers with microwave backgrounds are now having to deal with EMC issues and want more information than has traditionally been provided on these antennas.


105


For the wireless industry, base station antenna patterns have always been important in order to insure coverage. Understanding the pattern of each cell tower is critical to determining the required spacing between them. However, lately the industry has put considerable emphasis on handset pattern measurement as well. The Cellular Telecommunications and Internet Association (CTIA) has drafted a set of test plans aimed at verifying the performance of cellular telephone handsets. Where, previously, cell phones were required to meet a peak signal requirement, they’re now required to meet a total radiated power requirement. This helps to insure that a phone is transmitting energy in a broad pattern rather than a narrow beam, and therefore it is less likely to lose contact on the cellular network. The tests are also designed to characterize both transmitted and received power and pattern, as well as that for the minimum signal that the phone can properly detect. There are also calculations designed to determine the effectiveness of the phone where the base station antennas are located along the horizon (the typical configuration). This helps to insure that all of the radiated energy is not being directed up into space or down into the ground. While cell phone manufacturers are often interested in the performance of the phone by itself, the CTIA requirements include testing with a liquid filled "phantom" head or torso to simulate the effect of the human interaction with the phone.

Other wireless requirements that continue to grow include the wireless personal digital assistants (PDAs) which are typically covered under the cellular requirements, and a growing number of home and office based local wireless networks including wireless LAN and Bluetooth devices.

11.3.2 Measurement Techniques

The most basic pattern measurement that most people are familiar with is a single axis rotational pattern. That is where the antenna under test is placed on a rotational positioner and rotated about the azimuth to generate a two-dimensional polar pattern. This is commonly done for the two principle axes of the antenna to determine things like antenna beamwidth in both the E- and H-planes. Such data is typically only measured for the co-polar field component for simple horns or dipoles where the general polarization of the



pattern is well know. However, for more complicated radiators, where the polarization may not be known, or may vary as a function of angle, it is important to be able to measure two ortho-normal (perpendicular) field components. This is usually accomplished by using a dual polarized horn, log periodic dipole array (LPDA), or dipole antenna as the measurement antenna (MA). Although it provides the best result, this technique does require two receivers or the ability to automate switching of one receiver between the two polarizations, which can significantly increase the cost of the test. A slower, and possibly less accurate option is to repeat the identical pattern test for each measurement antenna polarization. This could result in time variations and alignment issues that could have significant effects. Figure 1 shows a typical polar pattern test setup. The AUT (a cell phone in this case) is placed on a rotating turntable and a dual polarized antenna is placed level with the AUT a fixed distance away. The turntable is rotated 360° and the response between the antennas is measured as a function of angle. Normally these measurements are performed in a fully anechoic (simulated free-space) environment, although sometimes it may be desirable to measure the pattern over conducting ground or in some other "as used" geometry to get "real world" pattern information. Figure 2 shows some polar patterns for some typical antenna types and polarizations.

Image not available, see software Help File

Figure 1. Test setup for single axis polar pattern measurement.

Image not available, see software Help File e

Figure 2. Co-polarized polar patterns for a vertically polarized dipole, horizontally polarized dipole, and standard gain

horn.

In order to generate a full spherical pattern measurement, it is necessary to change the relationship between the AUT and the MA and repeat the previous polar test for each new orientation. In order to completely cover a spherical service, the changes in orientation must be perpendicular to the plane of measurement. In simpler terms, the second axis of rotation must be perpendicular to and intersect the first axis


107


of rotation. These two axes correspond to the θ and φ angles of the spherical coordinate system, and are typically referred to as elevation and azimuth respectively for reasons that will become apparent. Note that, just as in the spherical coordinate system, only one axis needs to be rotated through 360° while the other is only rotated through 180°. It turns out that with the proper processing of the resulting data, it really doesn’t matter which axis is which! As will also be shown shortly, either antenna can be rotated around this second axis in order to generate the same pattern, but each technique can have its advantages and disadvantages.

11.3.2.1 Method 1: Conical Sections The first method to consider is one where an elevated turntable is used to support the AUT and the MA is moved around the AUT on an axis perpendicular to the vertical rotational axis of the turntable, as illustrated in Figure 3. This method fits the geometric picture that most people have for spherical coordinate systems, and so it’s often the concept used for pattern measurements. The turntable continues to provide the azimuth (φ) rotation, while the MA is raised (elevated) or lowered in an arc around the AUT, thus the term elevation axis. A common misconception when visualizing this technique is to consider moving the MA in a 180° arc across the top of the AUT. However, a quick look at Figure 3 will show that this would just duplicate the measurement across the top half of the AUT (the points at φ=0°, θ=+a° and φ=180°, θ=-a° (where θ=0° directly above the AUT) are the same) and never measure the bottom half of the pattern.

Image not available, see software Help File Figure 3. Illustration of the conical section method for

spherical antenna pattern measurement.

This method results in the measurement antenna describing circles of varying diameter, thus the reference to conical sections. The circles may be thought of as latitude lines on a globe, from the north (+Z) to south (-Z) poles, with the largest circle being at the equator. Only the one circle where the MA is at the same height as the AUT (i.e. the equator) results in a true polar pattern measurement.



While this method is conceptually simple, there are a number of drawbacks. A large pivot arm or arch support is required to manipulate the measurement antenna. For long range lengths, this can be a difficult proposition. Similarly, if this test is to be performed in a fully anechoic chamber, the chamber must be much larger than would normally be necessary to support the required range length, since the floor and ceiling must be the same distance away as the rear wall behind the MA. This can dramatically increase the cost of the antenna measurement range. In order to perform a full surface measurement, the turntable must also be cantilevered out from a wall or other support in order to allow the MA to be moved under the turntable. Otherwise, there will be a "dead zone" where the antenna is blocked by the supporting structure. In any case, the turntable itself can have a significant effect on the pattern measured if it is too massive or made of the wrong materials.

11.3.2.2 Method 2: Great Circle For the second method, the measurement antenna is fixed and the AUT is repositioned on the turntable to generate each polar cut. Since the MA is fixed pointing perpendicular to the rotation axis in this case, every cut is a true polar pattern. Thus, each rotation of the turntable represents the greatest diameter circle possible. In order to be able to compare the two methods, the AUT must be laid on its side with respect to the setup for Method 1 to represent the associated shift in coordinate systems (Figure 4).

Image not available, see software Help File Figure 4. "Great circle" configuration of antenna under test.

By rotating the AUT about one horizontal axis between each great circle cut, the entire spherical surface can be covered (Figure 5). Note that each polar cut passes through the others at the horizontal axis of rotation. Comparing to the conical section method, it’s apparent that the intersection points at the axis are equivalent to the top and bottom MA position in the previous method. That is why the AUT was laid on its side to support the change in coordinates. In this case, the circles can be thought of as longitude lines, running from the north (+Z) pole to the south (-Z) pole and


109


back around the other side. As before, it’s only necessary to rotate the AUT (instead of the MA) through 180° to cover the entire sphere, since the great circles are covering the "front" and "back" of the sphere simultaneously. It should also be noted that, with the shift in coordinate systems, the turntable is now an elevation positioner rather than an azimuth positioner, since it changes the MA position from pole to pole rather than parallel to the equator. The horizontal rotation axis of the AUT provides the azimuth positioning.

Image not available, see software Help File Figure 5. Illustration of the great circle method for spherical

antenna pattern measurement. (Note: The "back" sides of the polar cuts have been removed for clarity.)

This method has the advantage of being relatively easy to perform with a low cost system by rotating the AUT manually about the horizontal axis, but as with most such endeavors, it can be extremely tedious without additional automation. It also has the added benefit that the path between the AUT and MA is never obscured by the support structure, although care must be taken to insure that the existing support structure does not have reflective properties that could still alter the antenna pattern, especially if additional material is required to support the AUT in different orientations. Finally, since the measurement antenna is fixed, the chamber only needs to support the required range length in one dimension. This opens up the possibility of using tapered chambers and the like to obtain high performance and large range lengths affordably.



11.3.2.3 Comparison of Methods While each method has its advantages and disadvantages, it’s important to verify that they are both capable of producing the same results. Figure 6 shows both conical section (a) and great circle (b) results where the same step size between measurement points was taken on both rotational axes, and where the coordinate systems have been aligned. Overlaying the two plots (c) shows that the actual measured data points are identical, no matter which method is used. Thus, given just the resulting data points (d), it’s not possible to determine which method was used to generate them!

Figure 6. Comparison of measurement points between (a) conical section method and (b) great circle method. (c) shows the two results overlaid, and (d) indicates that it’s impossible to tell which method was

used given only the resulting data points.

(a) (b)


111


11.3.2.4 Two-Axis Positioners—The Best of Both Worlds By adopting the great circle configuration and manipulating the AUT in two axes, it’s possible to automate the test such that data can be acquired according to either measurement sequence. Figure 7 shows a simple two-axis positioner that can automate the rotation of the AUT on both axes. By rotating the turntable (elevation) 360° and stepping the horizontal axis (azimuth) between each turntable rotation, we duplicate the great circle method (Figure 8a). On the other hand, by rotating the horizontal azimuth axis 360° and stepping the turntable, we duplicate the conical section method (Figure 8b).

Image not available, see software Help File Figure 7. Example of a two-axis positioner setup for pattern

measurement testing.

Figure 8. (a) Great circle method and (b) conical section method performed using the same two-axis positioner.

The two-axis positioner does suffer from one of the limitations mentioned for the conical section method in general. That is, for some portion of the pattern (the south (-Z) pole in the illustration), the support structure is between the AUT and the measurement antenna. Insuring that the support structure is matched to the load being rotated in order to reduce the amount of interposing material required can minimize this effect. Controlling the orientation of the

(a) (b)



AUT with respect to the support can also help insure better results. By making sure the support is in a null or back-lobe, its effects on pattern related measurements can be minimized.

11.3.2.5 3-D Patterns No matter which method is used to acquire the data, the analysis of the result is made easier by the use of a 3-D spherical plot to graph the output. Figure 9 gives an example of a dipole pattern and a standard gain horn pattern plotted in three dimensions. This type of graphing capability allows rotating the pattern around for different views in order to get an idea of the relative magnitude of the signal in various directions.

Image not available, see software Help File Figure 9. 3-D spherical plot of (a) simple dipole and (b)

standard gain horn. Note the expected toroidal (donut) shape of the dipole pattern and the strong directionality and sidelobes of the

standard gain horn.

11.3.2.6 Near-Field Versus Far-Field Measurements Regardless of how the data are acquired, one of the available system variables is the range length. Usually, when one refers to the properties of an antenna, be it antenna pattern, gain, or another property, they are referring to the far-field, free-space properties of the antenna. In the far-field, free-space condition, the measured properties of the antenna do not appear to vary as a function of separation distance or antenna location. That is not to say that the measured field levels themselves do not vary, but that the measured gain or pattern does not vary. To state it simply, the far-field, free-space condition is the condition in which all of the theoretical equations typically used for calculating antenna properties are valid.

In a near-field and/or non-free-space environment, the antenna properties that are measured appear to vary as a function of their environment. Effects like mutual coupling between the AUT and the measurement antenna or the antennas and other objects around them, as well as other near-field perturbations prevent the direct determination of the desired antenna properties. Even assuming a good free-


113


space environment (i.e., a fully anechoic chamber), there are still limitations to near-field testing.

Most readers will be familiar with at least one rule of thumb for near- versus far-field determinations. In reality, there are two very different definitions. The first, which is usually more important at low frequencies, is represented by the near-field term(s) of the electric and/or magnetic field equations. These are the terms that behave as 1/rn, where 1> . These termsrepresent the nonpropagating or evanescent electric and magnetic fields—those caused by capacitively or inductively stored energy in the antenna. Therefore, this region is referred to as the reactive region of the antenna. These reactive fields decay rapidly with distance from the antenna, leaving only the

n

HErr

× term, which has a 1/r behavior. In this case, the far-field condition is satisfied by λ/r << 1, that is, where the measurement distance, r, is much larger than the wavelength, λ. The reactive region is commonly defined as

λ/62.0 3D< , where D is the largest dimension of the radiating object. For practical applications, a simpler rule of thumb suitable for most antennas is given by r < 2λ. Within this region, any measurement antenna or probe would have asignificant effect on the transmit

r

antenna.

The second far-field requirement, which is more familiar to microwave engineers, is usually the dominant factor at higher frequencies. In this case, the objects involved (either the actual antennas or larger devices containing small antennas) are large compared to the wavelength. The effects of scattering from different points on the object, or from different emissions points in the case of an antenna array or a leaky shielded enclosure with multiple openings, result in wave fronts propagating in multiple directions. The far-field condition is met when all of these different wave fronts merge to form one wave front, that is, when the multiple sources are indistinguishable from a single source. This condition is met when the separation distance r > 2D2/λ. Therefore, the bigger the object or the smaller the wavelength, the farther away the receive antenna has to be for that object to appear as a single source. The region inside the 2D2/λ distance, but outside the reactive near-field region, is referred to as the radiating near-field or Fresnel region, whereas the region outside this distance is the far-field or Fraunhofer region.

In terms of antenna pattern measurements, normally there is little useful information to be gained within the reactive region of an antenna. The one possible exception would be



when the antenna is to be used in the reactive region as well. However, it would not be possible to eliminate the effect of the measurement antenna on the AUT, and therefore the usefulness of such data would be limited. The Fresnel region contains propagating electromagnetic energy, but not in a cohesive form. Therefore, pattern measurements done in this region can readily determine quantities such as total radiated power but may only provide an approximation to the far-field pattern, gain, and other properties.

11.3.2.7 Converting from Near Field to Far Field A common practice in microwave antenna measurements, and something of a Holy Grail for EMC measurements, is the use of near-field measurements to predict far-field results. In the Fresnel region, it is possible to scan the magnitude and phase of the field along a closed surface (or, in the case of planar near-field scanning, an open surface intersecting the vast majority of the propagating energy) and predict the far-field levels. Doing so requires the use of a reference signal in addition to that from the measurement antenna in order to get the relative phase and magnitude at each point on the surface. The fixed reference is needed to track the relative phase of the signal in time because each point in space is not sampled at the same instant in time.

For passive antennas, a vector network analyzer is normally used, which acquires both magnitude and phase information against its own reference signal. Active devices are more complicated, requiring the use of a fixed reference antenna or sensor in addition to the measurement antenna to obtain both phase and magnitude references (because an active device may not maintain a constant magnitude or phase relationship). In either case, the calculations required to do the conversion are beyond the scope of this article.

For EMC testing, the conversion of radiated-emissions measurements from near field to far field is made much more difficult by the nature of the electromagnetic signature of the device under test and the frequency range required for EMC testing. EMC emissions are far from continuous-wave (CW), often consisting of harmonics, broadband noise, and spurious signals. Obtaining the same radiation signature at each point of a near-field scan is very unlikely. To further complicate matters, low-frequency EMC measurements are often performed in the reactive region of both the EUT and the receive antenna. Although near-field reactive terms can


115


be easily determined for simple dipole elements, such predictions for more-complicated antennas or emitters are extremely difficult. The amount of data and processing required to correctly separate the effects of the EUT from the receive antenna and the rest of the environment to truly predict a far-field result is far beyond the current state of the art.

11.3.2.8 Range Calibration With the setup described above, it’s quite straightforward to perform general pattern measurements and determine a large variety of relative information such as 3 dB beamwidth, front-to-back ratio, and directivity. However, before accurate absolute value measurements of values such as total radiated power (TRP), effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP), or antenna gain can be performed, it is necessary to perform a reference calibration in order to correct for the various factors affecting these tests. These include components like range length loss, gain of the receive antenna, cable losses, etc. Normally, this calibration is done using a reference antenna (typically either a dipole or standard gain horn) with known gain characteristics. The reference antenna is mounted at the center of the positioner as the antenna under test and adjusted to be bore sight with the receive antenna. The reference calibration is repeated for each polarization of the receive antenna, with the reference antenna polarized parallel to the corresponding receive element. Figure 10 shows a typical range calibration setup and calls out various components that are included in the measurement.



Figure 10. Some typical components of a range calibration setup.

Typically, a signal generator or the output of a network analyzer is connected to the reference antenna by one or more cables, possibly through a power amplifier. The receive antenna is connected to a receiver or the input of a network analyzer through one or more additional cables, possibly through a preamplifier. The power at the transmit antenna input port, Pt, is given in terms of the signal generator output, PSG, by:

SiglGent

Reci

PSG

Gt Gr

Pt

ga

cl

2

cl

1

cl

3

cl

4

gpa

Pr

PRX

r

21clclgP

P aSGt =

,


117


where ga is the gain of the amplifier, and cl1 and cl2 are the cable losses of the corresponding transmit cables. The power at the receiver, PRX, is given in terms of the power at the receive antenna output port, Pr, by the similar equation:

43 ,

where gpa is the gain of the preamplifier, and cl3 and cl4 arthe cable losses of the corresponding receive cables. If any of the components are missing, the corresponding gain or loss for that variable in the equation should be one. In t

clclgPP

clclP pa

RX =

e

erms of dB, these formulae become aSGt

gPr

21 −−+= and 43 clclgPP parRX −−+= , and the gain or loss of missing components

11.3.2.9 on governs the interaction

bet n e far field:

where:

po

mit antenna input port,

nsmit antenna,

the gain of the receive antenna,

would be zero dB.

Friis Transmission Equation The Friis Transmission Equati

ween two anten as in th

r is the power measured at the receive antenna output Prt,

t is the power measured at the transP

t is the gain of the traG

rG isλ is

and

the wavelength,

r is the separation between the two antennas (the range length). r

2)4( rπ

2GGPP rtt

rλ

=



The exact definition of t is often a source of some confusion and is somewhat dependant on what terms are included in the definition of gain. If the antenna is perfectly matched to the source cable, then all power applied to the antenna is radiated (or absorbed by losses in the antenna). However, in the more common case of a mismatch betthe source impedance and the antenna impedance, a portionof the energy is reflected back to the source so that the nepower transmitted is the difference between the applied forward incident power and the power reflected back to the source:

P

ween

t

If a theoretical gain value is used in the Friis equation, should be used for tP since the theoretical formula typicallywon’t be able to account for the VSWR caused by the impedance mismatch. This requires either using a bi-directional coupler and power meter configuration at the transmit antenna in order to be able to determine directly, or measuring the VSWR of the antenna and performing additional calculations to predict the net power from the forward power. If measured gain values are used it’s important to know how those gain values where determined and whether or not they already contain a contribution due to VSWR. Since any calibration technique is still inherently governed by this same formula, the resulting gain will be different depending on whether or not the VSWR effects have been accounted for separately. If not, the gain will be changed simply by the ratio of net power to forward power:

netP

netP

Itshould be noted that if the receive antenna has a mismatch (equally as likely as the transmit antenna) the same issue exists on the receive antenna but isn’t as easy to directly observe since the reflected energy is re-radiated in this case. There’s no good way to measure the forward and reflected receive energy! However, the VSWR of the receive antenna can be used to determine this effect as well. Fortunately as will be shown here, the gain of the receive antenna does not need to be known exactly (other than to double-check the calibration result against theoretical predictions) since it will be measured as part of the range calibration process.

reflincnet PPP −=

2

2

2

2

2

2

)4()4()/(

)4( rGGP

rGPPGP

rGGP

P rinctincrincnetnettincrnettnetr π

λπ

λπ

λ=

⋅==


119


As indicated in Figure 10, there are typically other factors involved in the measurement, unless power meters and directional couplers are used right at the antennas to measure the net transmitted and received power. These include losses from all cables, etc. and gain of any power amplifiers or pre-amps. To minimize the uncertainty of resulting measurements it is usually desirable to perform the range calibration with all cables, etc. in place and use the same configuration for calibration and pattern measurements. However, should any component be changed or damaged, the entire calibration must be redone. It is possible to perform individual calibrations on various system components, but each additional measurement increases the total measurement uncertainty involved. Thus, it is still usually preferable to calibrate the system as a while when possible.

11.3.2.10 Total Radiated Power To determine exactly how to apply the range calibration, it’s important to investigate the desired measurement quantities versus what will actually be measured by the test system. The primary quantity of interest is the total radiated power (TRP), which can be obtained by integrating the time averaged power density of the radiated signal across the entire spherical surface enclosing the AUT. The time averaged power density of a radiating signal is given by the real part of the Poynting vector:

where: ρ is the time averaged power density, E is the peak electric field strength, H is the peak magnetic field strength,

RMSE is the RMS electric field strength,

and η is the impedance of free space (120π).

πηηρ

12021)Re(

21

222RMSRMS EEE

HE ===×=rr



Notice the factor of 1/2 in the definition of the power density. This occurs due to the time averaging of the power across a complete period. It should be noted that while most reference materials and numerical analysis tools refer to wave magnitudes by their peak values: r

tjEeE ω−= ,

most measurement instrumentation reports RMS values:

.

Thus, when determining the power density from the RMS electric field, the factor of 1/2 has already been accounted for. The difference between RMS and peak field values can result in an immediate 3 dB error in reported measurement results if it is not treated correctly!

The total radiated power is then given by integrating the power density across the surface of the reference sphere:

where:

TRP is the total radiated power,

ρ is the time averaged power density,

r is the radius of the sphere (the range length),

θ is the elevation angle,

and

φ is the azimuth angle.

The electric field generated at a point in the far field as a function of the transmitted power is given by:

rGP

E tt ),(30 φθ=

,

where: E is the electric field generated at the distance r from the transmit antenna,

t is the power measured at the transmit antenna input port,P ),( φθtG is the angular dependent gain of the transmit

antenna,

and r is the distance from the transmit antenna to the test point (the range length).

EERMS 21

=

φθθρπ

θ

π

φddrTRP )sin(

0

2

0

2∫ ∫= ==


121


So the power density at that point becomes: 24

),(r

GtP t

πφθ

ρ =,

and then the total radiated power is given by:

.

φθθφθπ

π

θ

π

φddGPTRP t

t )sin(),(4 0

2

0∫ ∫= ==

11.3.2.11 Range Calibration, Part 2 Unfortunately, the receiver used to perform the test can’t measure power density directly, but instead, measures received power (again, neglecting cable losses, etc.). A related quantity, then, to the total radiated power would be the total received power, given by integrating the received power across all of the measurement points of the AUT.

where:

is the total power received,

and

is the power measured at the receive antenna output port.

The received power is given by the Friis transmission equation described earlier, so in terms of the transmit power and the angular dependent gain, the equation becomes:

Since the desired value is the total radiated power, the required correction factor is simply the ratio of the total radiated power to the total power received:

∫ ∫= ==

π

θ

π

φφθθφθ

0

2

0)sin(),( ddPTP rr

rTP

),( φθrP

∫ ∫= ==

π

θ

π

φφθθφθ

πλ

0

2

02

2

)sin(),()4(

ddGr

GPTP t

rtr



which, when simplified, becomes:

This constant makes sense, since the factor is related to the range length and the gain of the receive antenna, both of which are exactly what we want to calibrate out of the system! Going back to the Friis equation one last time, the reference measurement performed with the reference antenna results in a site reference constant given by:

where C is the ratio of received to transmitted power.

Substituting this into the previous equation gives a correction factor of:

Now we’ve successfully represented the required site calibration constant in terms of the gain of our reference antenna and a single path loss measurement for each polarization. It should be noted that C can contain contributions from other terms such as cable loss, etc. as long as those contributions are present in both the reference calibration and the pattern measurements.

∫ ∫

∫ ∫

= =

= ==

π

θ

π

φ

π

θ

π

φ

φθθφθπ

λ

φθθφθπ

0

2

02

2

0

2

0

)sin(),()4(

)sin(),(4

ddGr

GP

ddGP

TPTRP

trt

tt

r

2

24λ

π

rr Gr

TPTRP

=

2

2

)4( rGG

PPC rt

t

r

πλ

==

CG

TPTRP t

r π4=


123


11.3.2.12 Accounting for VSWR As mentioned previously, the treatment of the transmit antenna voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) is an important part of both the range calibration and the measurement of various antenna properties. In general, VSWR is a measurement of the mismatch between two transmission lines. It provides a measurement of the amount of signal being reflected back from the mismatch, which is directly related to the amount of energy that is transmitted. For many antennas, the VSWR represents the largest component of the antenna efficiency (the rest resulting from Ohmic losses in the antenna itself). In order to determine the contribution due to the VSWR, it’s necessary to calculate the ratio of the net power to the forward power. VSWR is defined as the ratio of maximum to minimum voltage on the transmission line and is given by:

where:

max is the maximum voltage on the transmission line (fee

cable),

V d

.

minV is the minimum voltage on the transmission line, min V

incV is the magnitude of the incident wave,

and refl is the magnitude of the reflected waveV

The reflection coefficient, ρ , (not to be confused with the power density describe above) the ratio of reflected to incident waves and is given by:

+V , or in terms of impedan−=

Vρ

ce,

where: +V is the incident wave (magnitude and phase),

reflinc

reflinc

VVVV

VV

VSWR−

+==

min

max

0

0

ZZZZ

L

L

+−

=ρ



− is the reflected wave (magnitude and phase), V

is the characteristic impedance of the transmission line (magnitude and phase),

and

is the impedance of the load line (magnitude and phase).

Note that if the load impedance is equal to the characteristic impedance of the transmission line then the reflection coefficient is zero. This makes sense since there is no mismatch in this case. Also note that, unlike the VSWR, the reflection coefficient has both magnitude and phase. The magnitude of the reflection coefficient is then:

The transmission coefficient, τ , is defined as the ratio of transmitted to incident waves is given by:

+V , or in terms of impeda

=VL

nce,τ

0ZZ L

02Z=τ

,

+

where:

L is the wave transmitted through the mismatch to the loadside (magnitude and phase). V

By definition, 1=− ρτ ,

however, the transmission coefficient isn’t very useful for determining the net transmitted power from the VSWR since it also requires some knowledge of the impedance of the load. While the necessary information could be determined from the reflection coefficient, it’s considerably easier to determine the ratio of the reflected power to the incident power and then use that to determine the net transmitted power.

so that:

Z 0

Z L

11

+−

==VSWRVSWR

VV

inc

reflρ

22 ρ==

VP

2

inc

refl

inc

refl VP

)1( 2

2

ρ

ρ

−=

⋅−=−=

inc

incincreflincnet

P

PPPPP


125


This just results in a VSWR correction factor given in dB by:

It should be noted that the VSWR component covered here is not the only antenna VSWR term related to antenna measurements. If an antenna is not in a free space environment, energy reflected back from other objects will be seen to affect the VSWR measurement. However, this term is a measure of the antenna’s interaction with its environment rather than a measurement of an inherent property of the antenna. Care should be taken when measuring VSWR to be used for range calibrations to insure that the measurement represents a true free space VSWR. A simple way to do this is to alter the orientation and location of the reference antenna when measuring VSWR. If no variation is seen in the resulting VSWR measurements, then the environment is not likely to be having a significant impact.

⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛+

⋅=

−=

210

210

)1(4log10

)1(log10

VSWRVSWR

CVSWR ρ

11.3.2.13 Gain, Directivity, Efficiency, and EIRP Once the range has been calibrated, a number of antenna properties can be determined from the pattern measurement. The first property of interest is the effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP). The EIRP is the power required for a theoretical isotropic radiator (one that radiates the same power in all directions) to generate the same field level in all directions as the maximum field seen from the AUT. Starting from the definition of total radiated power, EIRP is given by:

where maxρ is the maximum time averaged power density found over the surface of the measurement sphere.

Assuming that the maximum power density can be defined using the boresight gain of the AUT:

,

φθθρπ

θ

π

φddrEIRP )sin(

0

2

0

2max∫ ∫= =

=

2max 4 rGP tt

πρ =



then the EIRP becomes:

,

Note that the EIRP is simply the transmitted power increased by the AUT gain, which brings some clarity to the definition of gain. Gain (over isotropic) is defined as the increase in received signal from the AUT over that which would be received from an isotropic radiator with the same source power. Thus, to create an isotropic radiator that generates the same field level as the maximum seen from the AUT, the source power must be increased by the gain. Rearranging the equation for EIRP gives the definition of gain:

,

where is often referred to as the antenna port input power (APIP). Again, there is the question of whether or not this term should be the incident power or the net power. That decision will affect the calculation of the efficiency of the antenna, as will be shown shortly.

tP

The ratio of the EIRP to the total radiated power is defined as the directivity of the antenna:

,

tt

tt

GP

ddrrGP

EIRP

=

= ∫ ∫= =φθθ

ππ

θ

π

φ)sin(

4

2

0

2

0 2

tt P

EIRPG =

φθθφθ

π

φθθφθπ

π

θ

π

φ

π

θ

π

φ

dd

ddGP

GPTRPEIRPD

t

tt

tt

)sin(),(

4

)sin(),(4

0

2

0

0

2

0

∫ ∫

∫ ∫

= =

= =

∆=

==


127


where ),( φθt is the relative magnitude of the AUT pattern at any angle with respect to the maximum. For an isoradiator, this would be a constant one, so that the directivity was also one. For any real antenna, ),(

∆

tropic

φθt∆ is less than one for much of the surface, resulting in a directivity greater than one. Note that the directivity is the only term related to the antenna gain which is solely a relative term. The range calibration does not show up in this equation.

As with the TRP measurement, the measurement system is only capable of measuring received power, so instead of EIRP, the corresponding value calculated would be the effective isotropic received power:

,

where max is the maximum received power from the pattemeasurement. Assuming again that the maximum received power is the boresight transmission response, the same site reference constant, C, can be used:

rP rn

,

so it’s apparent that the same range calibration holds in this case as well. Thus, the directivity can also be represented directly in terms of measured quantities as:

.

The efficiency of the AUT is defined as the ratio of the total radiated power to the antenna port input power. As mentioned, the definition of APIP as incident power vs. net power will determine whether or not the VSWR is part of the efficiency term. If net power is used, the efficiency only represents the Ohmic losses of the antenna and not the mismatch effects.

max

0

2

0 max

4

)sin(

r

rr

P

ddPEIP

π

φθθπ

θ

π

φ

=

= ∫ ∫= =

CG

PGP

EIPEIRP t

r

tt

r ππ 44 max

==

r

r

TPEIPD =



.

Comparing this to the definition of gain and directivity given earlier, it’s apparent that the gain is given by the product of the directivity and efficiency:

.

If the AUT has no losses or mismatch, the directivity and gain should be equivalent.

tPTRP

=ε

εDP

TRPTRPEIRP

PEIRPG

ttt

=

==

11.3.2.14 Applying the Range Calibration Starting from the equation for the effective isotropic receive power given above, if we define an angular dependent effective isotropic receive power in terms of the received power at a give angle, we get

.

Similarly then, the angular dependent effective isotropic radiated power, which is the power required for a theoretical isotropic radiator to generate the received power for each measurement point, becomes

,

so that the boresight EIRP defined above is given by substituting in the angular position of the boresight maximum. This is a convenient quantity to work with since it has both the reference gain and the range path loss applied to the measured data points.

Since the total radiated power is given by

),(4),( φθπφθ rr Peip =

),(4

),(),( φθ

πφθ

φθ rtrt P

CG

CeipG

eirp ==

∫ ∫= ===

π

θ

π

φφθθφθ

ππ 0

2

0)sin(),(

44ddP

CG

TPC

GTRP r

tr

t


129


then, in terms of the angular dependent eirp, the integral for total radiated power becomes

.

Note that these equations are presented as applying a net correction to the net power at the measurement antenna, but in reality there are two polarizations, each of which is likely to have their own path loss factor and possibly even a different reference antenna gain. In that case, the equations are modified as follows:

It’s important to take a look at the units involved in the definition of eirp. The inherent assumption in defining eirp is that the reference antenna gain, Gt, is the gain over an isotropic radiator. In some cases, it may be desirable to use a half-wavelength dipole radiator as the reference source, or to tie the reference to gain over a dipole instead of gain over isotropic, in which case the associated term would be the effective dipole radiated power (edrp). However, the TRP still requires the integration of the eirp, not the edrp, so there is a 2.15 dB correction that must be applied in order to use edrp instead of eirp.

∫ ∫= ==

π

θ

π

φφθθφθ

π 0

2

0)sin(),(

41 ddeirpTRP

[ ]∫ ∫

∫ ∫

= =

= =

+=

⎥⎥⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎣

⎡+=

π

θ

π

φ φθ

π

θ

π

φφ

φφ

θ

θθ

φθθφθφθπ

φθθφθφθ

π

0

2

0

0

2

0

)sin(),(),(41

)sin(),(),(

4

ddeirpeirp

ddC

PGC

PGC

GTRP rtrtt

∫ ∫= =≈

π

θ

π

φφθθφθ

π 0

2

0)sin(),(

464.1 ddedrpTRP

11.3.2.15 Other Antenna Properties There are plenty of other properties that can be determined from an antenna pattern, such as front-to-back ratio, average radiated power, average gain, and beamwidths. The calculation of most of these properties is pretty straightforward, usually with simple formulas, but the most important part of many of them is the data search algorithms used to find values like the maximum point, minimum point, -3 dB points, etc. In addition, some of these properties have



little or no meaning for some antennas, and the orientation of the AUT can affect the result of an automated calculation without additional input from the user to indicate desired alignment information. For example, the meaning of E- and H-plane beamwidths is commonly understood. However, if an AUT is randomly oriented for the pattern test, or has an unusual pattern, there is no simple way to automatically determine what constitutes each plane.

11.3.2.16 Reversing the Flow – Total Isotropic Power Received

The evaluation of an antenna in receive mode isn’t quite as obvious as it might seem. In transmit mode, a dual polarized antenna is used to receive both polarizations of the transmitted signal and determine the net power radiated. In receive mode, the receive antenna can only respond to one polarization at a time, so in order to determine its relative response to any arbitrary polarization, it’s necessary to measure the sensitivity of each transmit polarization and then combine the results. However, combining the signals in the conventional manner to determine the net power would generate an erroneous result (lower sensitivity) since it would indicate a higher received power for a given sensitivity level.

By reversing the direction of propagation of the spherical wavefront, the equation for total power received now represents the integral of the power received by the AUT from an incoming isotropic wave with equal power in both polarizations. The integral is then:

where ),( φθAUTP is the total power measured at the AUT antenna port at each angular position.

Using the Friis Transmission Equation to represent the relationship between the measurement antenna and the AUT, we get:

∫ ∫= ==

π

θ

π

φφθθφθ

0

2

0)sin(),( ddPTP AUTr

2

2

)4(),(

),(r

GGPP AUTMAMA

AUT πλφθ

φθ =


131


which, in terms of the range path loss, C, and the calibration reference antenna gain, Gt, used in the range calibration is given by:

so that the total power received becomes

For an isotropic receiver, for which the gain in all directions is 1, this simplifies to:

This total isotropic power received can be written in terms of the total power received by the AUT as:

In reality, the measurement antenna cannot transmit both polarizations simultaneously (unless circular polarization is used, which adds a whole new level of complexity to the situation) so the TPr measurement will be performed using one polarization of the MA at a time. Referring to the spherical pattern geometries shown earlier, it’s apparent that the two polarizations of the measurement antenna (now the transmit antenna) correspond to the θ and φ directions on the spherical measurement surface. The AUT will have a different gain and corresponding receive power for each of these polarizations, so that

),(),( φθφθ AUTMAt

AUT GPGCP =

∫ ∫

∫ ∫

= =

= =

=

=

π

θ

π

φ

π

θ

π

φ

φθθφθ

φθθφθπ

λ

0

2

0

0

2

02

2

)sin(),(

)sin(),()4(

ddGPGC

ddGr

GPTP

AUTMAt

AUTMAMA

r

MAt

r PG

CTIP π4=

∫ ∫= =

= π

θ

π

φφθθφθ

0

2

0)sin(),(

)(ddG

TPTPTIP

AUT

rrr

and the TIPr can be written as:

),(),(),( φθφθφθ φθ AUTAUTAUT PPP +=

[ ]∫ ∫= =+

= π

θ

π

φ φθ φθθφθφθ

π

0

2

0)sin(),(),(

4)(ddGG

TPTPTIPAUTAUT

rrr



While this equation may be interesting, it’s not very useful as it is. The problem is, we need to determine the angular dependent gains to obtain anything from the equation.

Returning to our use of the Friis transmission equation, note that the previous formulation assumes that the power transmitted by the MA is constant as a function of position so that the power received by the AUT varies with angle. We could as easily define the equation such that the power received is constant as a function of angle, requiring that the power transmitted by the MA must vary:

More generally, it makes sense to allow either value to vary as a function of angle:

We can define a term similar to the EIRP that was used for the AUT in transmit mode to represent the power transmitted by the measurement antenna for each polarization after the range calibration factors have been applied. This angular dependent effective isotropic receive power (eirxp) is then defined as:

for the two possible polarizations, x = θ or φ , of the MA. This term has the same advantage as the angular dependent eirp in that it incorporates the range calibration terms so that the calculations are done after the same range calibration has been applied to the measured data. One important thing to note is the inversion of the calibration terms. This results in a sign change when the terms are applied in dB.

By solving for the gain in the previous equation and substituting that into the equation for TIPr, we get:

),(),( φθφθ AUTMAt

AUT GPGCP =

),(),(),( φθφθφθ AUTMAt

AUT GPGCP =

),(),(

),(),(φθφθ

φθφθxAUT

xAUTxMA

xt

xx G

PP

GC

eirxp ==

∫ ∫= = ⎥⎥⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎣

⎡+

=π

θ

π

φφ

φ

θ

θ φθθφθφθ

φθφθ

π

0

2

0)sin(

),(),(

),(),(

4)(

ddeirxpP

eirxpP

TPTPTIPAUTAUT

rrr


133


Now, instead of holding the transmit power from the MA constant, consider what happens when the receive power at the AUT is kept constant for each polarization, forcing the transmit power and thus the eirxp to vary with position of the AUT.

This equation represents the total power received by an isotropic receiver in terms of the plane waves required to create a given receive power level at the AUT. For the case where the total power received by the AUT from this collection of plane waves is set equivalent to that received for each polarization and position (TPr=PAUT) then the total power that an isotropic receiver would see from that same incoming assortment of plane waves is given by:

It’s interesting to note the similarities between this formula and that for parallel resistors. Where the TRP represents the addition of all angular eirp terms, TIPr is reduced for each eirxp term that is added to it. Going back to the discussion at the start of this segment, since the eirxp represents the power necessary to make the antenna receive a given fixed receive power from a plane wave source, then the power necessary to generate that same fixed receive power from an isotropic spherical wave coming from all directions must be less than or equal to that from the plane wave. Also, in terms of the two polarization components, it’s apparent that the net eirxp at each angular position is given by:

∫ ∫= = ⎥⎥⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎣

⎡+

=π

θ

π

φφθ

φθθφθφθ

π

0

2

0)sin(

),(1

),(1

4)(

ddeirxpeirxp

PTPTPTIP

AUT

rrr

∫ ∫= = ⎥⎥⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎣

⎡+

=π

θ

π

φφθ

φθθφθφθ

π

0

2

0)sin(

),(1

),(1

4)(

ddeirxpeirxp

PTIP AUTr

),(1

),(1

),(1

φθφθφθ φθ eirxpeirxpeirxpNet

+=



11.3.2.17 CTIA Requirements The Cellular Telecommunications and Internet Association (CTIA) has developed some very specific antenna property requirements in addition to the EIRP and TRP measurements described above. One of these is the Near-Horizon Partial Radiated Power (NHPRP), which is used to determine the power radiated in a small band (typically ±22.5° or ±45°) along the azimuth axis. This requirement is intended to determine how a cellular phone will interact with the network of cellular base stations arranged around it along the horizon during normal operation. Note that the orientation of the AUT will have a great impact on this result, so the standard calls out precise positioning requirements for the phone. Since a cellular phone has both transmit and receive modes, the CTIA standard also contains receive property requirements including Total Isotropic Sensitivity (TIS) and Near-Horizon Partial Isotropic Sensitivity (NHPIS), in addition to the radiated pattern requirements. These values are calculated from the received power pattern instead of the transmitted power pattern, in a method similar to that given for TIPr in the segment above. While the TIPr derivation was presented in a more generic context than that used in the CTIA document, the definition for TIS may be obtained by defining the fixed power received by the AUT as the minimum sensitivity level of the receiver. The eirxp necessary to drive the receiver at that sensitivity level is then referred to as the angular and polarization dependent Effective Isotropic Sensitivity (EIS) such that the TIS is then given by the TIPr at that minimum sensitivity level:

It should be noted that while the CTIA derivation of TIS uses the peak electric field value instead of the RMS value, resulting in a difference of 3 dB between their definition of electric field and the RMS values normally measured by test equipment, the end result is the same since the electric field terms used throughout their derivation cancel each other out. The resulting equation for TIS is in terms of power, not field levels.

φθθφθφθ

ππ

θ

π

φφθ

ddEISEIS

PTIPTIS ysensitivitr

)sin(),(

1),(

1

4)(

0

2

0∫ ∫= = ⎥⎥⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎣

⎡+

==


135


11.3.2.18 Numerical Considerations When processing data acquired during a pattern measurement, the method used to perform the integrations required can result in significant errors if done incorrectly. There is no way to perform a true integration of the power density across the spherical surface. Thus, we must instead rely on some sort of summation of a limited number of data points to approximate these integrals.

The simplest option is to just convert the integrals to sums, summing up all of the data points with the appropriate weighting terms applied and dividing by the number of points in the sum. This is a good first approximation, but can suffer from some significant failings. First off, there is no accounting for the step size between each data point, so if the step size is not consistent then the points will not receive the proper amount of weight in the sum and will skew the results. Secondly, the approximation of a function by single fixed points breaks down rapidly as the step size increases or as the slope becomes increasingly large. Finally, the treatment of end points can result in a significant error, especially when large step sizes are used.

Figure 11 shows the elevation curve shapes for a tuned dipole and an isotropic source from θ = 0-180°. The shaded area under each curve is the desired resulting integral value. In figure 12, data points taken every 15 degrees are summed to generate an approximation of the area under each curve. While the summation shown doesn’t appear to do a very good job of representing the area under the curve, figure 13 shows what happens when the corners of each rectangle outside the curve are cut off to fill in the missing corners inside the curve, converting the rectangles to trapezoids. This doesn’t change the total area resulting from the summation, but rather just more clearly represents the quality of the result. There it is evident that the summation does do a pretty good job of representing the area under the curve, at least for a dipole pattern. For the isotropic pattern there’s a noticeable deficiency in the result of the summation.



Figure 11. Elevation curve for tuned dipole and isotropic source including sin(θ) weighting. The area under the

curve represents the integral of the curve.

Figure 12. Effect of summing data points taken every 15 degrees.

0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180°0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180°

Tuned Dipole Isotropic Source

0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180°0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180°



137


Figure 13. Effect of summing data points taken every 15 degrees, where the rectangles have been converted to

trapezoids to better follow the shape of the curve. This has the same area as the previous figure.

In order to improve upon the result of a simple sum, a trapezoidal rule summation can be used to represent the desired integral. Instead of each individual data point representing a rectangle (or trapezoid as in figure 13) of a given area, the area between each point is represented by a trapezoid as shown in figure 14. The trapezoidal rule is implemented by multiplying the midpoint between each pair of points (given by adding the two points and dividing by two) by the distance between the two points. Thus, if the spacing between points changes, it is automatically accounted for.

0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180°0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180°




Figure 14. Effect of trapezoidal rule on data points taken every 15 degrees.

To illustrate the effect of random step sizes on the two techniques, figure 15 shows what happens to the previous graphs of the tuned dipole curve when the positions of the measured data points change slightly. The width of the summed sections is assumed to remain constant, while the actual point spacing does not. This causes a significant error in the resulting integration, while the trapezoidal rule result sees little change.

0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180°0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180°



139


(a)

(c)

(b)

(d)

0°

0°

0°

0°

30°

30°

30°

30°

60°

60°

60°

60°

90°

90°

90°

90°

120°

120°

120°

120°

150°

150°

150°

150°

180°

180°

180°

180°

Continuous Integral

Summed Points

Summed Points

Trapezoidal Rule

Figure 15. Effect of changing step sizes on summation vs. trapezoidal rule integrals for data points taken every 10-20 degrees.

The error due to the summation integral can become much worse with the desired end points don’t line up with the edge of the rectangles used in the sum. The CTIA has established two near-horizon integration metrics (NHPRP and NHPIS) with two ranges (horizon ± π/8 (22.5°) and horizon ± π/4 (45°)). As can be seen in figure 16, when summed per the equation in the CTIA test plan, the ±π/4 result has a large error signified by the crosshatched sections. It just so happens that the edge of the summed rectangles end up on the edge of the ±π/8 region so that the result there is acceptable. For the trapezoidal integral, while the end data points line up on the edge of the ±π/4 region and not the ±π/8 region, it is a simple matter to interpolate the end points in order to only cover the desired region, thus provided an accurate result no matter what the selected range.



Figure 16. Effect of truncating data at the two CTIA Near Horizon Partial Power integration limits on summation vs. trapezoidal rule integrals for

data points taken every 15 degrees.

The previous results are presented for the 15° steps of the radiated test used to generate the NHPRP. However, currently the CTIA specifies a 30° step for the sensitivity test used to generate the NHPIS value. If the sum given for NHPIS is used, the ±π/4 region lines up with the edge of the rectangles and the ±π/8 region sums only the values along the 90° elevation! The following table details the relative errors between the theoretical values for an isotropic source and a tuned dipole and the results obtained by summing individual data points vs. using the trapezoidal integration for a number of step sizes. As shown, for the total radiated power integral, the difference between the two methods is negligible, with both methods having a worst-case error of -0.1 dB for the isotropic source at 30° steps. At that step size, both methods are underestimating the TRP since they’re attempting to approximate a circle with course straight lines. As predicted, the summation method has a difficult time with the near-horizon partial results, with the

(a)

(c)

(b)

(d)

Continuous Integral

Summed Points

Summed Points

Trapezoidal Rule

π4

π4

π4

π4

3π4

3π4

3π4

3π4

3π8

3π8

3π8

3π8

0°

0°

0°

0°

30°

30°

30°

30°

60°

60°

60°

60°

90°

90°

90°

90°

120°

120°

120°

120°

150°

150°

150°

150°

180°

180°

180°

180°

58π

58π

58π

58π


141


±π/4 region giving significant errors for the 5 and 15° step sizes (2.5 and 7.5° segments left over, respectively) while the ±π/8 region fails miserably for 30° steps, giving over a dB of error for both sources. In general, the results shown in the table support the apparent conclusion from the graphs above, that the trapezoidal rule integration provides a better result than the summation method, providing roughly equivalent or significantly better results in most cases. In the cases where the summation rule appears to produce a better result, the difference in error magnitude between the two methods is of the same order of magnitude as each method’s difference from the theoretical value.



11.3.2.19 Summary The need for antenna pattern information is increasing, as the EMC community moves to higher frequencies and more advanced techniques, and as wireless devices continue to pervade our everyday RF environment. The techniques for complex pattern measurement are rather straightforward, but there are some pitfalls. However, the calculations involved to determine certain antenna properties can be much more complicated. Nonetheless, with appropriate care and understanding of the associated quantities, it is not difficult to obtain excellent results. The information provided here can help even the novice RF or EMC Engineer to determine a wide variety of antenna properties.


143





12 Making Pattern Measurements Using EMQuest

12.1 Introduction EMQuest provides a variety of powerful antenna pattern measurement tests bundled as the EMQ-100 Antenna Pattern Measurement Software package. The pattern measurement tests that will be available will depend on the options purchased with your EMQuest EMQ-100 license. The available tests are designed to perform both passive testing of antennas and active testing of wireless devices. With the appropriate parameter settings, measurements compliant to the Cellular Telecommunications and Internet Association’s (CTIA’s) Mobile Station Over-the-Air Performance Test Plan may be obtained. This section will describe some of the basics for configuring each test for typical pattern measurements. For more information on general pattern measurement concepts, terms, and theory, refer to the Pattern Measurement Basics section in this online manual. This section assumes that the reader has read the Getting Started section and is familiar with the basic operation of the EMQuest package, including equipment configuration and parameter file generation. In addition to the material provided here, each page of the parameters for a selected pattern test will have additional detailed information on those parameters. Use the context sensitive help to obtain more information on a given parameter or page.

12.2 Pattern Measurement Test Types The EMQ-100 package is intended primarily for performing polar or spherical pattern measurements, although it currently also provides rudimentary support for linear, planar, and cylindrical pattern measurements as well. These latter capabilities are provided as a bonus feature and may be enhanced in future releases, as the market requires. The available post-processing and analysis features are designed solely for the polar and spherical patterns, and the documentation will concentrate on those tests. Given the increasing number of pattern tests available, they have been subdivided into categories:


145


12.2.1 Scalar Pattern Measurements

Scalar pattern measurements are suitable for active or passive devices. The available scalar pattern tests can be divided into two categories based on the positioning equipment available or the data desired. Using a single-axis positioner (or a single-axis of a multi-axis positioner (MAPS)) produces 2-D polar patterns that plot signal magnitude as a function of positioner angle. With a two-axis positioner such as a MAPS, a full spherical surface is covered producing 3-D spherical surface patterns that plot signal magnitude as a function of the angles of both positioner axes. For either of these test configurations, signal magnitude data can be acquired for either a single polarization of the measurement antenna, or for two orthogonal polarizations simultaneously. This results in a total of four possible scalar radiated pattern tests:

12.2.2 Vector Pattern Measurements

A bonus feature for users making passive antenna measurements using a vector network analyzer is a set of vector versions of the same tests. These vector tests allow capturing both magnitude and phase or real and imaginary parts of the vector pattern. The vector tests do not currently support the same post-processing features as the scalar tests above, but they will be enhanced in future releases as the market requires.

12.2.3 Sensitivity Pattern Measurements

For sensitivity testing of cellular mobile stations, there is another set of tests for performing sensitivity pattern measurements. These follow the same data acquisition processes as the scalar pattern measurements, but perform sensitivity post-processing on the data instead of total radiated power processing.



12.2.4 Throughput Pattern Measurements

The optional EMQ-105 Network Throughput Test Package provides four additional pattern tests for testing network throughput of wireless networking components. These follow the same basic data acquisition processes as the scalar pattern measurements, but instead acquire throughput as a function of attenuation at each position (see Throughput Tester/Attenuator hybrid for more information). The resulting post processing is considerably different as well.

12.2.5 Configuring a Pattern Test

The following is an overview of the steps required to set up a pattern test.

12.2.5.1 Hardware Setup Normally, the required hardware for pattern testing is installed at system setup and little day-to-day modification is required. In general, pattern measurements require a properly configured GPIB controlled single- or dual-axis positioning system, a single-or dual-polarized measurement antenna (MA), and appropriate cabling and test equipment (network analyzer, spectrum analyzer, etc.). Testing of wireless devices will also require a base station simulator to establish and maintain a telephone call to the wireless device.

For passive antennas, a cable must be routed from the output of the network analyzer, or tracking/signal generator to the antenna under test. For active wireless devices, the cable is routed from the base station simulator to one or more communication antennas placed near the device using RF switches as necessary. The communication antennas should be placed so as not to interfere with the pattern measurement, while still maintaining a strong signal connection to the wireless device. Splitters/combiners may be used to connect the base station simulator to the measurement antenna along with the receiver, but care should be taken to ensure that the proper calibration is used for the path loss and to avoid cross-talk issues between the simulator and receiver.


147


Each polarization of the measurement antenna should be connected to a receiver. For dual-polarization tests, this can be accomplished in a number of ways. Most network analyzers have two receivers built in and can be used directly for passive antenna testing. This requires direct access to the receiver ports, which is standard on many analyzers and an option on others. For other receivers, two different receivers (spectrum analyzers, tuned receivers, power meters) may be used, but additional testing should be performed to determine a relative correction between the two receivers to adjust for any difference in their readings at the same input level. Without this correction, there may be significant anomalies in the resulting pattern. A less expensive solution is to use one receiver and an RF switch to toggle between two polarizations. This is slower since the measurements must always occur sequentially rather than simultaneously, but it eliminates any difference between equipment. In all cases, both paths from the antenna under test (AUT) through the measurement antenna to the receiver(s) must be calibrated as described in Pattern Measurement Basics and applied as described below. For best results, a pair of phase-matched RF cables is recommended for dual-polarization tests.

Configure and label the required test equipment using the Equipment Control Panel. Be sure to enable any installed options or features that are required and use labels that clearly identify the equipment. These labels will be used to identify the equipment in the test parameters.

12.2.5.2 Parameters Create a new parameter file and then select the desired test to enter the necessary test information. Refer to the help for each page of the parameters for more details on each parameter. Most parameters have default settings which will allow an almost immediate "ready to run" state. It’s only necessary to select the appropriate equipment and press the Run button to start a test. However, these default settings probably won’t be exactly what’s required for a given application, so it’s necessary to review and modify the parameters as needed.

In general, the Parameters node controls the basic operation of the test. It allows setting the desired range of motion of the positioner axes for the test, as well as positioning step size or continuous (as fast as possible) data



acquisition, and, for two-axis tests, the order of data acquisition. While data acquisition order (the difference between "Conical Section" and "Great Circle" order) has little effect on the final data acquired, it can have significant effects on the speed of the test. Using the "Conical Section" order (primary axis = theta from 0-180°, and secondary axis = phi from 0-360°) is recommended for the ETS-Lindgren MAPS since the phi-axis runs twice as fast as the theta-axis, allowing the same surface area to be covered in less time. In addition, acquiring data in this order allows the close pattern and single-point or extrapolate poles optimizations to be used to reduce measurement time as well. Use the single-point poles optimization to only measure one data point at theta = 0° and theta = 180° and rotate the vector sum around the phi axis to generate all of the corresponding data points at each angle for each polarization. Use the extrapolate poles optimization to create the data points at theta = 0° and theta = 180° based on the average value of the next nearest conical cut. Note that while this may not be the correct value for this position, it will have no effect on post processed quantities such as TRP and gain since the net contribution of the points at the poles is zero. Use the close surface optimization to duplicate the phi = 0° data at phi = 360°. This ensures that no gaps are seen in the 3-D plot, due to slight differences in repeat measurements at the same point, but more importantly it allows reducing the amount of data measured by not ever measuring a value at 360°. Just reduce the range of phi axis motion to one step less than 360° and then check the Close Surface optimization.

The Parameters node also allows labeling the polarization associated with each measurement channel and control over the actual data to be acquired (e.g. single points vs. frequency dependent data).

The Frequency node is used to set the desired frequency range or points for the test. The desired settings will depend on the equipment used, the data acquisition settings in the Parameters node and the frequency stability of the signal source. For most simple patterns, a zero-span setting is preferable.

Use the Equipment node to select and configure the equipment to be used for the test. Select the desired positioner(s), making sure that the appropriate positioner is selected for each axis of a two-axis test. Remember, each axis of a multi-axis positioner will have to have its own driver


149


configured in the control panel. For ETS-Lindgren positioners, the default GPIB addresses for the two axes will be 8 and 9. If the positioners are selected backwards into the equipment selection fields, or the GPIB addresses are wrong, erroneous results will be obtained. Set the speed settings appropriate to the test. If continuous acquisition is used, make sure the continuous acquisition speed of the positioner is slow enough to acquire the desired points per revolution. For stepped acquisition, adjust the stepped speed setting to minimize vibration at each stop while keeping it high enough to maintain the desired test speed. The delay setting can be used to allow vibration to dampen between each step prior to measuring data.

Also select the desired analyzer/receiver for the measurement. Dual-polarization tests require two channel receivers, while single-polarization tests only need one. Dual channel requirements can be satisfied by a dual receiver network analyzer or by using dual-channel hybrids to combine two devices to appear to the test as one. Adjust the desired device settings for the chosen instrument(s). Most spectrum analyzers allow setting resolution and video bandwidth, or leaving them auto-coupled to the frequency span. Sweep time settings are typically used when in zero-span, but it is normally left auto-coupled to the bandwidth settings when a frequency span is used. Attenuation and reference level settings can be used to adjust the relationship between the noise floor, the available dynamic range in the analyzer window, and the signal level(s) to be measured. The trigger settings are usually set to free run. Other trigger options are normally only used for zero-span tests to synchronize the trace to a specific event. For network analyzers, settings such as points per trace, IF bandwidth, averaging, and output power are available. For single frequency pattern tests, the points per trace should be set to the minimum for fastest acquisition rate. The bandwidth should be set to provide sufficient dynamic range. Note that the HP/Agilent 87XX series of network analyzers contain a defect that will cause erroneous results for long signal paths unless the bandwidth is set to 30 Hz or lower. This is apparently due to the analyzer stepping to the next frequency before the signal at the current frequency has made it through the path and been measured. For all receiver types, the calibration option, which performs a cable/path loss calibration prior to the test, is normally not used. Note that doing so will result in relative data being



acquired no matter what the labeling and acquisition selections made in the Parameters node. This is because, when calibrated, the analyzer will subtract the reference calibration from the current reading to provide the difference (always a relative value in dB, not power in dBm). Improper use of the calibration capability may result in erroneous results.

Most equipment drivers support pre-defined parameter configurations, which can be defined in the equipment control panel and then selected into the equipment parameters by right-clicking on the equipment parameter pane to display a list. This allows common parameter configurations to be pre-defined and quickly selected to configure a test.

Select the desired output format under the Corrections node. The nodes beneath Corrections provide a number of correction selection panels for different values used in the post processing. For dual-polarization tests, three panels allow the application of appropriate corrections for each polarization separately, as well as a common correction for both. For single-polarization tests, there is only one correction panel. For total radiated power testing, the range calibration information should be applied using these panes. Since the range path loss correction is in the denominator of the TRP/EIRP formula, the measured frequency response (typically generated from a frequency response calibration of the range) should be subtracted from the measured data. Thus, it should be applied as a negative correction. For dual polarized tests there should be a separate range measurement for each polarization of the measurement antenna, so use the polarization specific corrections to apply these. The gain of the reference antenna used for the range calibration is in the numerator of the TRP/EIRP formula, so it should be added to the measured data. For dual polarized tests the gain data could be applied to both polarizations separately using the individual polarization correction nodes, but a common correction node is provided to correct both polarizations with the same value. For sensitivity tests, the signs of the corrections are inverted (add range path loss and subtract gain) for TIS/EIS.

In addition to the measurement corrections node(s), there is a node for specifying the antenna port input power (APIP), which is used to calculate gain and efficiency using the directivity and total radiated power. For relative measurements, the APIP is used to offset the data from


151


relative power in dB to absolute power in dBm. For sensitivity patterns, the equivalent correction is the conducted sensitivity, which allows entering a reference value for the sensitivity of the receiver at the point where the antenna is attached.

Use the Paths node to specify any custom output paths and/or output templates for this data. Otherwise the test will use those configured under the Tools : Options… menu. Use the Output node to reduce or interpolate the tabular data shown in the Table tab and in report output. Use the Notification tab to change the default test completion notification for this test from that configured in the Tools : Options… dialog.

12.3 Mobile Phone Testing EMQuest is capable of performing active testing of mobile stations, measuring either radiated power or sensitivity data at each position. For radiated power, patterns can be acquired using either a dedicated receiver, such as a spectrum analyzer, or by using the power measurement capabilities of a communication tester. Note, however, that the receiver of a communication tester typically lacks the dynamic range necessary to accurately measure a pattern. For sensitivity, the communication tester is used as the measuring instrument.

To perform fully automated radiated power measurements using a communication tester and receiver, configure a hybrid driver for the required equipment combination (i.e. communication tester and receiver hybrid for single polarization tests; communication tester/receiver/switch hybrid or communication tester/dual receiver hybrid for dual polarization tests). The hybrid will normally only accept list frequency data, so configure the list frequency table to correspond to the desired test channels. Use the Wireless Channel Tool to easily enter the test frequencies for the desired channels. On the Parameters page, set the Receiver Mode to Absolute and the Data Acquisition Mode to Frequency Range. The hybrid will handle setting the analyzer to zero span and changing the channel and center frequency for each data point, as well as ensuring that the call is maintained. The positioner should be set to stepped mode to ensure that all data is acquired at the same position. Use the close surface and single point poles optimizations as described above to reduce the total test time.

For stand-alone radiated power measurements (no automation of communication tester) a single channel can be measured. When



using a spectrum analyzer, set the Receiver Mode to Absolute and the Data Acquisition Mode to Filtered Trace Point and configure the Frequency Range to zero span, centered at the desired channel. Manually establish the call and direct the mobile to the required channel and power level.

The following table lists some recommended settings for using a spectrum analyzer. Ensure that the analyzer has sufficient resolution and sweep rate, and configure its parameters to the following:

1 Dependent on available spectrum analyzer resolution. It’s important that there be enough resolution to detect all peaks and nulls in the resulting signal. The specified value should be acceptable for a 501 point/per/trace analyzer. For analyzers with fewer points, reduce the span to just slightly wider than the maximum pulse width. 2 For multislot measurements, widen this span by multiplying by the appropriate number of timeslots to be measured and set the GSM Timeslots to the same number of slots. 3 The positive peak detector has been used traditionally for pulsed measurements, however the benefits of the RMS detector make it likely that it will replace the peak detector for pulsed power measurements in the future.


153


4 The RMS detector is preferred, as it averages many samples for each data point. The sample detector only records one sample per data point. The trace is noisier, resulting in a noisier resulting average power. 5 The trigger level should be set just above the noise floor (5-10 dB), sufficient to avoid spurious triggers from the noise floor, but low enough to provide maximum dynamic range.

6 The attenuation and reference level settings should be adjusted to give maximum dynamic range (lowest noise floor) while ensuring that the maximum signal level received stays away from the top of the spectrum analyzer graticule. The attenuation should be set to the minimum value possible that still allows a reference level that’s at least 5 dB above the maximum expected input to the analyzer. For most OTA configurations, a reference level of 0 dBm and 0 dB attenuation work well, however for lower path losses or stronger mobile signals, a higher reference level is required, usually requiring the addition of some attenuation. Gain compression is likely if the signal gets within a few dB of or passes the top of the spectrum analyzer window, depending on the instrument. The ceiling level setting is provided for the filter to detect this occurrence and avoid bad data. Set the ceiling just below the top of the spectrum window for most configurations. The floor level is used to ensure that valid data is detected above the noise floor. Results below this level typically represent a dropped call. Set the floor level a few dB above the noise floor to ensure that valid data can be distinguished from the noise floor. If the signal moves outside the window between the ceiling and floor, the software will retry the specified number of times and then pop up a dialog for user intervention. † GPRS/EGPRS and WCDMA are new test technologies that have not be well standardized. These are preliminary recommendations and subject to change..



For sensitivity measurements, configure to use a communication tester for single polarization tests or a communication tester/switch hybrid for dual polarized tests. Refer to the help sections for the given test and communication tester parameter frames for more information on the available settings. Given the amount of time necessary to perform each sensitivity measurement, larger angular steps are normally used to reduce total test time. Be sure to use the close surface and single point poles optimizations as described above to reduce the total test time even further.

12.4 CTIA Testing There are a number of specific settings required to perform total radiated power (TRP) and total isotropic sensitivity (TIS) testing of wireless devices per the CTIA test plan. The settings given here are based on the current revision (version 2.1) of the standard and are subject to change. Always refer to the latest standard for all settings and procedures.

For TRP testing, start with the scalar Two-Axis Dual-Polarization Pattern Measurement and set the step size for both axes to 15°, and the axis measurement mode to stepped. (For fast receivers, continuous mode may be used for single frequency measurements by specifying the appropriate 15° spacing for the output points. However, this may not be considered to officially comply with the standard.) Configure the test equipment selection and associated parameters as indicated above. Refer to Appendix D of the CTIA Mobile Station Over-the-Air Performance Test Plan for more detailed information on power measurement requirements. Note that the settings shown above represent settings that have been incorporated into the current release (V2.1) or are being recommended for incorporation into the next release of the test plan.

For TIS testing, use a Two-Axis Dual-Polarization Sensitivity Pattern Measurement and configure as described under Mobile Phone Testing above, setting the step size for both axes to 30°.refer to the latest version of the CTIA OTA test plan for more detailed information on the required sensitivity settings.


155


12.5 Running a Pattern Test Once a parameter file has been developed for the test, the data acquisition process is as simple as all other EMQuest tests. Make sure that all cables, equipment, and the AUT are mounted, connected, warmed up, and operating properly (for wireless testing, establish a call if required), insure that the positioners are unobstructed and free to rotate, and press the "Run" button. The test will proceed through the automated sequence in the order specified in the parameters. Upon completion, the test will automatically calculate all of the post-processed pattern properties (TRP, Gain, etc.), save the data to a time-stamped raw data file, create a new window for the resulting data file, and display the Graph tab.



13 Post Processing At the end of a test, all post-processing is performed automatically. The corrections are applied as specified, for dual-polarized tests, the total power is calculated by combining the two polarizations assuming linearly polarized signals, and then a variety of values are calculated based on the resulting data. For single-polarization tests, the calculations are performed on the measured polarization as though it represents the total power. Finally, the data is reformatted as requested in the Corrections node of the parameters. The list below describes the various antenna attributes that are calculated. The available values are different for single-axis and two-axis tests, and are different for scalar tests vs. sensitivity tests or throughput tests. Note that by default the post processing algorithms expect the θ and φ angles to be in the range of 0-360° with no overlap anywhere on the surface (i.e. . θ = 0-180° and φ = 0-360° or vice-versa). Deviating from this assumption may produce unexpected/invalid results for some of the reported values.

Ant. Port Input Pwr. (dBm) is simply a re-statement of the value entered for the APIP correction for scalar tests.

Cond. Sensitivity (dBm) is simply a re-statement of the value entered for the Conducted Sensitivity correction for sensitivity tests.

Tot. Rad. Pwr. (dBm) is the total radiated power determined by integrating the surface or circle or portion thereof covered by a scalar test. EMQuest performs its integration using the trapezoidal rule as described in Pattern Measurement Basics. If only a partial surface is covered, the integral will indicate the partial radiated power for that surface. This value will not be valid without proper range calibration values entered into the corrections.

TIS (dBm) is the total isotropic sensitivity determined by integrating the surface or circle or portion thereof covered by a sensitivity test. Conceptually, it corresponds to the inverse of the TRP for a radiated power test. EMQuest performs its integration using the trapezoidal rule for sensitivity as described in Pattern Measurement Basics. If only a partial surface is covered, the integral will indicate the partial isotropic sensitivity for that surface. This value will not be valid without proper range calibration values entered into the corrections.


157


Peak EIRP (dBm) is the traditional effective isotropic radiated power based on the value of the maximum signal received in a scalar test, once the range calibration has been applied. This value will not be valid without proper range calibration values entered into the corrections.

Min. EIS (dBm) is the minimum effective isotropic sensitivity, representing the most sensitive point measured on a sensitivity test, once the range calibration has been applied. Conceptually, it corresponds to the inverse of the peak EIRP for a radiated power test. This value will not be valid without proper range calibration values entered into the corrections.

Directivity (dBi) is determined as the difference between the peak EIRP and the TRP for scalar radiated power tests, and the difference between the TIS and the minimum EIS (note the sign change) for a sensitivity test. Since it is a ratio of two measured values, this value is accurate whether or not a valid range calibration has been applied.

Efficiency (dB) is a measure of the loss of the AUT and is given by the difference between the TRP and the APIP for scalar radiated power tests, and by the difference between conducted sensitivity and the TIS for sensitivity measurements. It is also represented as a relative value in % as Efficiency (%). This value will not be valid without a proper range calibration and the correct APIP or conducted sensitivity value entered into the corrections.

Gain (dBi) gain is the combination of efficiency and directivity and is given by the sum of those two values. This value will not be valid without a proper range calibration and the correct APIP or conducted sensitivity value entered into the corrections.

Average Gain (dBi) is defined as the difference between the TRP and APIP (thus it will be the same value as that reported for Efficiency). This value only has relevant meaning when analyzing the behavior of a single cut of a pattern, where understanding the performance of the antenna in all directions of a single plane may be useful.

NHPRP ±Pi/4 (dBm), NHPRP ±Pi/6 (dBm), and NHPRP ±Pi/8 (dBm) are near-horizon partial radiated power values required for CTIA tests. They are calculated using the same trapezoidal rule integration as the TRP, where the endpoints have been interpolated to θ = 90° ± 45°, 30°, or 22.5°, respectively. These values will not be valid without proper range calibration values entered into the corrections.

NHPIS ±Pi/4 (dBm), NHPIS ±Pi/6 (dBm), and NHPIS ±Pi/8 (dBm) are near-horizon partial isotropic sensitivity values required for CTIA tests. They are calculated using the same trapezoidal rule integration as the TIS, where the endpoints have been interpolated to θ = 90° ± 45°, 30°, or 22.5°, respectively. These values will not be valid without proper range calibration values entered into the corrections.



Upper Hem. PRP (dBm) and Lower Hem. PRP (dBm) are partial radiated power values representing the upper and lower hemispheres of the TRP pattern. They are calculated using the same trapezoidal rule integration as the TRP, where the endpoints have been interpolated to θ = 0 to 90° and 90 to 180°, respectively. These values will not be valid without proper range calibration values entered into the corrections.

Upper Hem. PIS (dBm) and Lower Hem. PIS (dBm) are partial isotropic sensitivity values representing the upper and lower hemispheres of the TIS pattern. They are calculated using the same trapezoidal rule integration as the TIS, where the endpoints have been interpolated to θ = 0 to 90° and 90 to 180°, respectively. These values will not be valid without proper range calibration values entered into the corrections.

Partial Surface Ratios (_PRP/TRP and TIS/_PIS ratios) are provided in both linear (%) and dB units, comparing the near horizon and hemispherical partial surface results to the TRP/TIS results. These values clearly indicate what percentage of the total power is included in the partial surface results, or how much power is lost in the excluded portion(s). The ratios for TIS are inverted to reflect equivalent quantities to those for TRP.

Front/Back Ratio (dB) is determined by taking the difference between the peak EIRP or minimum EIS and the value on the exact opposite side of the pattern from it.

Theta BW (°) and Phi BW (°) refer to the beamwidths along the theta and phi polarization directions. The values + Th. BW (°), - Th. BW (°), + Phi BW (°), and - Phi BW (°) refer to the two halves of these beamwidths on either side of the maximum. To determine these values, two cuts are taken through the surface intersecting at the maximum EIRP or minimum EIS point, with the first cut oriented along the theta polarization and the second cut made perpendicular to the first (note that this cut is not the same as a phi-angle cut, which corresponds to a conical section cut). For each cut, the algorithm steps in one-degree increments in each direction from the peak to find the -3 dB points or until it reaches a total of 360 degrees (± 180°). Beamwidth (°) refers to the beamwidth along the rotation directions. + Beamwidth (°), and - Beamwidth (°) refer to the two halves of the beamwidth on either side of the maximum. To determine these values, the algorithm steps in one-degree increments from the maximum EIRP or minimum EIS point along the axis of rotation to find the -3 dB points. If the beamwidth passes ± 180°, the algorithm assumes a dipole pattern and stops searching. Boresight Th. (°), Boresight Phi (°), and Boresight Angle (°) refer to the angular location of the maximum EIRP or minimum EIS.


159


E-Plane BW (°) and H-Plane BW (°) refer to the beamwidths parallel to and perpendicular to the electric field direction at the maximum EIRP/minimum EIS location as determined from the available polarization information. The values + E-Plane BW (°), - E-Plane BW (°), + H-Plane BW (°), and - H-Plane BW (°) refer to the two halves of these beamwidths on either side of the maximum. To determine these values, two cuts are taken through the surface and intersecting at the maximum EIRP or minimum EIS point, with one oriented along the apparent E-field direction and the other oriented perpendicular to the first. For each cut, the algorithm steps in one-degree increments in each direction from the peak to find the -3 dB points or until it reaches a total of 360 degrees (± 180°). Note: Since this calculation is made based on the available scalar pattern information only, which has only magnitude information, there is a relative sign missing between the two components. Therefore, there are typically two possible orientations for the electric field vector at the boresight location. The algorithm evaluates every point on the surface for both possible cuts to determine the best representation of the E- and H-plane cuts before calculating the resulting beamwidth. This value is only available for two-axis, dual polarized patterns. Maximum Power (dBm) is the maximum corrected signal (same as peak EIRP).

Minimum Power (dBm) is the minimum corrected signal (same as minimum EIS). Average Power (dBm) is the average of all measured points. This is different from the TRP or TIS integral in that neither step size nor any polar weighting are taken into account.

Max/Min Ratio (dB) is given by the difference between the maximum and minimum power.

Max/Avg Ratio (dB) is given by the difference between the maximum and average power.

Min/Avg Ratio (dB) is given by the difference between the minimum and average power.

Theta Src. Pwr. @ Boresight (dBm) indicates the raw (uncorrected) source power setting of the communication tester at the boresight (minimum EIS) direction and specified sensitivity level for the theta polarization. This value is useful for determining the required communication tester power level for intermediate channel sensitivity measurements.



Phi Src. Pwr. @ Boresight (dBm) indicates the raw (uncorrected) source power setting of the communication tester at the boresight (minimum EIS) direction and specified sensitivity level for the phi polarization. This value is useful for determining the required communication tester power level for intermediate channel sensitivity measurements.

Axial Ratio is only available for dual polarized vector patterns and represents the ratio of major to minor axis for elliptically polarized signals at boresight. A value of +INF is displayed for perfectly linearly polarized signals.

13.1 Test Parameters

13.1.1 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Single-Polarization Pattern Measurement

The Parameters Pane is used to enter the majority of the required test parameters specific to this test. The settings are split between two tabs:

Measurement Configuration contains most of the general test settings. These parameters include:

Rotational Axis Control controls the range of motion of the rotational axis. The associated axis can be a turntable or single axis positioner, or one axis of a two-axis positioner or MAPS (see the Equipment Pane to select the desired positioner). The available parameters here include:

Upper Rotational Limit allows the entry of the upper or clockwise limit of this axis in degrees.

Lower Rotational Limit allows the entry of the lower or counterclockwise limit of this axis in degrees.

The normal range of operation is 0-360°, and, although the software will support different ranges, the effects on the antenna property calculations are undefined.

Rotational Step Size allows entry of the step size for this axis in degrees. This control is disabled when the motion is set to continuous.


161


Polarization is used to indicate the polarization of the receive antenna used for the test. The single-polarization tests are normally used when only one receiver is available, or when this is the only information required. If two receivers or a dual channel network analyzer are available, a dual-polarization pattern measurement will record both polarizations simultaneously and calculate the net power when done. The available choices for the polarization setting are Horizontal and Vertical. This selection simply labels the data appropriately.

Rotational Axis Measurement Mode controls the behavior of the rotational axis during a measurement. The available modes are:

Continuous, which will run the axis at the continuous speed setting of the motor (see the documentation for the positioner for more information) and acquire data as it moves. This mode provides the fastest test, since the positioner does not have to accelerate and decelerate between each measured point, but there are some disadvantages. The number of points measured per revolution is given approximately by the period of rotation divided by the data acquisition speed of the receiver. The test records the axis position before and after each measurement and by default assumes that each data point was recorded at the midpoint between those two positions. However, the data could really be measured anywhere between the two positions, resulting in a certain amount of skew to the measured results. The larger the resultant step between each measured point, the larger the possible skew, but it should always be the same relative value, assuming the measurement is repeatable. The Skew Correction provides a way to manually adjust for this effect. The skew correction can be used to move the reported measurement position anywhere between the first position (-50% skew) and the second position (+50% skew). This mode will give the best results with a very fast receiver or at very low positioner speed settings. Note: This mode is susceptible to variations due to processor loading and Windows message processing. Any interruption during data acquisition will cause gaps in the resulting data since the positioner will continue to move but the test will not be able to acquire data. For best results, the user should avoid interacting with menus or other applications during continuous data acquisition.



Stepped, which will step the axis at the stepped speed setting of the motor, stopping at each step to acquire a single data point. This mode gives the best possible result since the data is acquired at the exact position indicated. For tests which require dwell time at each point (such as swept frequency measurements) stepped mode is necessary to insure that the entire measurement is performed at the same physical position.

Antenna Position is used to record information about the position of the antenna under test (AUT). Currently these fields are simply informational.

Transmit Height is used to indicate an offset from boresight in a fully anechoic environment, or to indicate a distance above the ground plane in a semi-anechoic environment. Note that when using a MAPS, it will normally not be possible to offset in one absolute direction since any mounting offset will rotate around the horizontal axis. However, this field can still be used to represent the offset from center if desired.

Separation Distance is used to record the separation distance between the AUT and the receive antenna (the range length). Future enhancements to the antenna property calculations may use this value to determine additional information.

Pattern Type allows selection of different single-axis pattern acquisition modes. Note: This feature is provided as part of a future expansion to provide non-polar pattern measurements in addition to the default polar pattern. All associated labeling and features may not be complete.

Polar is the default pattern type for the single-axis pattern test. It requires a rotational positioner and is designed to acquire data along a single circular cut around the antenna under test.

Linear requires a linear positioner and is designed to acquire data along a single linear axis. It is the counterpart to a planar 2-axis measurement, or the linear axis of a cylindrical pattern. This mode is currently only provided for data acquisition and future expansion.

Data Format contains settings related to data acquisition and processing modes. These parameters include:


163


Receiver Mode determines how the receiver will be configured for the test and how the measured data is interpreted. The available modes are:

Absolute (Measure A and B in dBm) will use a network analyzer as a tuned receiver and record power levels in dBm. Most other receivers (spectrum analyzers, power meters, etc.) only support this mode in normal operation. For this mode to be valid, the reference (cable) calibration should be disabled (set to none) on the equipment settings.

Relative (Measure A/R and B/R in dB) will measure the receive channels of a network analyzer relative to its reference signal. Other receiver types can also generate relative measurements if a reference calibration is performed prior to the test (see the equipment pane for the given receiver). The reference level is set to 0 dB by the EMQuest software. The equipment driver records the reference signal and subtracts it from later measurements to generate a relative result.

Data Acquisition Mode controls how the data will be read from the receiver.

Max Marker performs a peak search with a marker after each sweep and returns that value. This mode is used primarily for CW signals that may not be centered in the analyzer frequency span, or to find the peak of time dependent signals (such as TDMA digital packets) in zero-span mode. For tuned receivers and power meters, this mode is the same as the center frequency mode unless the device driver or hybrid is configured to simulate a swept measurement. (Note that for some analyzers in zero-span mode, the marker may not behave as described here.)

Center Frequency records the marker reading at the center frequency of the analyzer span. This mode is best when a frequency span is required (i.e. to support time gating on a network analyzer) but the frequency of the maximum signal may vary as a function of position. (Note that for some analyzers in zero-span mode, the marker may not behave as described here.)



Frequency Range records an entire trace from the analyzer at each data acquisition point. This mode should only be used in stepped mode, since in continuous measurement mode, the location of the first frequency will be different from the last frequency, resulting in significant skew. In addition, continuous measurement mode will acquire data at random positions, which will result in interpolation errors in a transposed dataset. Note: This mode can generate an excessive amount of data! The resulting data set will be N times the size of a traditional pattern generated by either of the marker modes, where N is the number of frequency points supported by the equipment used. This can result in long load and display times as well as issues in graphing the resulting data. In this mode, data is acquired as magnitude vs. frequency traces as a function of position. Due to the organization of the data in this form, normal polar plotting of a pattern is not available. Use the transpose option under the Corrections tab to format the data as patterns vs. frequency. The pattern at each frequency can then be viewed by using the reduced dataset option of the graph control. Filtered Trace Point is intended for use with a spectrum analyzer in zero-span mode. It allows applying different processing filters to a measured trace and return a single value to be recorded. A number of filters are provided in the various spectrum analyzer drivers for recording peak, average, or pulse signal levels. A number of the filters provided are compatible with the requirements of the CTIA’s Mobile Station Over-the-Air Performance Test Plan. Refer to the help section for the particular equipment parameter frame for more information on the available filters. Since these filters require an entire trace be transferred from the analyzer and processed, it is recommended that this acquisition mode only be used in stepped measurement mode.

Network Analyzer Ports allows overriding the default configuration of using the network analyzer as a two-port receiver. The available settings are:


165


A and B Ports uses the network analyzer as a dual channel receiver, the default configuration for a dual-polarization measurement. This allows both polarizations to be measured simultaneously, and therefore is ideal for a dual-polarization measurement. While many network analyzers provide direct access to the receivers as a standard feature, a number of newer network analyzers provide this feature only as an option.

S Parameters treats the network analyzer as a normal S-parameter network analyzer, utilizing any associated switching and directional couplers. A single channel is configured to read S21 for the pattern measurement. This feature is provided to allow data acquisition using a network analyzer without the direct access described above.

Optimizations provides access to features intended to decrease test time. Such features may have significant side effects, so care must be taken to understand the benefits and risks associates with these features. The available optimizations are:

Close Pattern duplicates the first data point as the last data point and adds 360° to the recorded position. This results in a closed surface and avoids the "seam" sometimes visible in polar plots. This also allows speeding up a test by not re-measuring the end points. The requested range of motion can be reduced and still result in complete pattern coverage. Without this option, reducing the range of motion would result in a partial polar plot, which would be integrated as a partial cut rather than the complete 360° for the post-processing calculations. This option is only valid for polar pattern measurements.

Options allow modifying other aspects of the test. The available options are:

Record Actual Axis Position forces the test to record the actual physical position of the positioner at each stepped position instead of the target position. This is only necessary if the positioner’s targeting capability is insufficient to position to the target within the desired positioning uncertainty.



13.1.2 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Dual-Polarization Pattern Measurement








Polarization (Channel 1/Channel 2) assigns the corresponding polarization of the dual polarized receive antenna to each channel of the dual channel receiver. Note that a dual-polarization pattern measurement will record both polarizations simultaneously and calculate the net power when done. While two separate antennas may be used instead of a single dual-polarized antenna, there is no provision for accommodating any offset in position between the two. Thus, the net pattern and associated antenna properties will be incorrect if there is any boresight offset between the two antenna polarizations. Selecting Horizontal/Vertical will make channel 1 record the horizontal polarization and channel 2 record the vertical, while selecting Vertical/Horizontal will reverse this.


Continuous, which will run the axis at the continuous speed setting of the motor (see the documentation for the


167


positioner for more information) and acquire data as it moves. This mode provides the fastest test, since the positioner does not have to accelerate and decelerate between each measured point, but there are som disadvantages. The number of points measured per revolution is given approximately by the period of rotation divided by the data acquisition speed of the receivers. The test records the axis position before and after each measurement and by default assumes that each data point was recorded at the midpoint between those two positions. However, the data could really be measured anywhere between the two positions, resulting in a certain amount of skew to the measured results. The larger the resultant step between each measured point, the larger the possible skew, but it should always be the same relative value, assuming the measurement is repeatable. The Skew Correction provides a way to manually adjust for this effect. The skew correction can be used to move the reported measurement position anywhere between the first position (-50% skew) and the second position (+50% skew). This mode will give the best results with a very fast receiver or at very low positioner speed settings. Note: This mode is susceptible to variations due to processor loading and Windows message processing. Any interruption during data acquisition will cause gaps in the resulting data since the positioner will continue to move but the test will not be able to acquire data. For best results, the user should avoid interacting with menus or other applications during continuous data acquisition.











Receiver Mode determines how the receivers will be configured for the test and how the measured data is interpreted. The available modes are:



169



Data Acquisition Mode controls how the data will be read from the receivers.



Frequency Range records an entire trace from the analyzer at each data acquisition point. This mode should only be used in stepped mode, since in continuous measurement mode, the location of the first frequency will be different from the last frequency, resulting in significant skew. In addition, continuous measurement mode will acquire data at random positions, which will result in interpolation errors in a transposed dataset.



Note: This mode can generate an excessive amount of data! The resulting data set will be N times the size of a traditional pattern generated by either of the marker modes, where N is the number of frequency points supported by the equipment used. This can result in long load and display times as well as issues in graphing the resulting data. In this mode, data is acquired as magnitude vs. frequency traces as a function of position. Due to the organization of the data in this form, normal polar plotting of a pattern is not available. Use the transpose option under the Corrections tab to format the data as patterns vs. frequency. The pattern at each frequency can then be viewed by using the reduced dataset option of the graph control.

Filtered Trace Point is intended for use with a spectrum analyzer in zero-span mode. It allows applying different processing filters to a measured trace and return a single value to be recorded. A number of filters are provided in the various spectrum analyzer drivers for recording peak, average, or pulse signal levels. A number of the filters provided are compatible with the requirements of the CTIA’s Mobile Station Over-the-Air Performance Test Plan. Refer to the help section for the particular equipment parameter frame for more information on the available filters. Since these filters require an entire trace be transferred from the analyzer and processed, it is recommended that this acquisition mode only be used in stepped measurement mode.



171




Record Actual Axis Position forces the test to record the actual physical position of the positioner at each stepped position instead of the target position. This is only necessary if the positioner’s targeting capability is insufficient to position to the target within the desired positioning uncertainty. Measure Polarizations Sequentially will cause the dual polarized test to perform two single polarization tests sequentially, pausing in between each test sequence to allow manually changing the polarization of the measurement antenna. This option is only available for dual polarized tests.

13.1.3 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Single-Polarization Pattern Measurement



Primary/Secondary Axis Control controls the range of motion of each axis of the two-axis positioner or MAPS and selects which positioner to use for each. For a two-axis test, the primary axis is stepped, while the secondary axis can be stepped or run continuously while data is being acquired. The secondary axis will make a complete circuit from one limit setting to the other between each step of the primary axis. The available parameters here include:





To cover the surface of an entire sphere once, one axis should have its upper limit set to 180°, while the other should be set to 360°. The lower limits should normally be set to zero. Going beyond the 0-180° range on both axes will result in duplicate points being measured, and will yield unpredictable antenna property calculation results. The system can also measure fractional surfaces by reducing the range of the limits for either or both axes, but again, the effect on the calculations is undefined. For proper antenna property calculation results, a full spherical surface should be measured, with one axis set from 0-180° and the other from 0-360°.

Rotational Step Size allows entry of the step size for this axis in degrees. This control is disabled for the secondary axis when the motion is set to continuous.

Positioner allows selection of which axis (Phi Angle or Theta Angle for spherical patterns, X or Y for planar patterns, and Phi Angle or Z for cylindrical patterns) of the two-axis positioner to use for the primary or secondary axis. The controls are linked between the primary and secondary axis so that selecting Phi Angle/X/Phi Angle for one will automatically set the other to Theta Angle/Y/Z.

Polarization is used to indicate the polarization of the receive antenna used for the test. The single-polarization tests are normally used when only one receiver is available, or when this is the only information required. If two receivers, a receiver and remote RF switch, or a dual-channel network analyzer are available, a dual-polarization pattern measurement will record both polarizations simultaneously and calculate the net power when done.

To minimize confusion in interpreting data, the polarizations are labeled to correspond to the motion direction that is parallel to the polarization direction. That is, for spherical patterns, the Theta polarization should be set perpendicular to the theta rotational axis (parallel to the measurement antenna’s rotation about that axis) and the Phi polarization should be set perpendicular to the phi rotational axis. Similarly for cylindrical patterns, the Phi polarization should be perpendicular to the rotational axis. For linear positioners


173


(X, Y, and Z), the polarization should be along the corresponding axis of motion. This is simply a labeling convention and does not affect the resultant data. If a non-standard configuration is used where the polarization direction does not correspond to the directions of motion, the labels may be used arbitrarily, and their meanings interpreted as such.

The available selections are Theta or Phi for spherical patterns, X or Y for planar patterns, and Phi or Z cylindrical patterns.

Secondary Axis Measurement Mode controls the behavior of the secondary axis during a measurement. The available modes are:




Stepped, which will step the axis at the stepped speed setting of the motor, stopping at each step to acquire a single data point. This mode gives the best possible result since the data is acquired at the exact position indicated. For tests that require dwell time at each point (such as swept frequency measurements) stepped mode is necessary to insure that the entire measurement is performed at the same physical position.




Pattern Type allows selection of different two-axis pattern acquisition modes. Note: This feature is provided as part of a future expansion to provide non-spherical pattern measurements in addition to the default spherical pattern. All associated labeling and features may not be complete.

Spherical is the default pattern type for the two-axis pattern test. It requires two orthogonal rotational positioners and is designed to acquire data along the theta and phi axes of a spherical coordinate system (i.e. the longitude and latitude lines of a globe).

Planar requires two orthogonal linear positioners and is designed to acquire data along an X-Y planar grid. This mode is currently only provided for data acquisition and future expansion.

Cylindrical requires one linear positioner and one rotational positioner with parallel axes (orthogonal axes of motion) and is designed to acquire data along a cylindrical grid. This mode is currently only provided for data acquisition and future expansion.


175



Receiver Mode determines how the receiver will be configured for the test and how the measured data is interpreted. The available modes are:








Frequency Range records an entire trace from the analyzer at each data acquisition point. This mode should only be used in stepped mode, since in continuous measurement mode, the location of the first frequency will be different from the last frequency, resulting in significant skew. In addition, continuous measurement mode will acquire data at random positions, which will result in interpolation errors in a transposed dataset.

Note: This mode can generate an excessive amount of data! The resulting data set will be N times the size of a traditional pattern generated by either of the marker modes, where N is the number of frequency points supported by the equipment used. This can result in long load and display times as well as issues in graphing the resulting data. In this mode, data is acquired as magnitude vs. frequency traces as a function of position. Due to the organization of the data in this form, normal 3-D plotting of a pattern is not available. Use the transpose option under the Corrections tab to format the data as patterns vs. frequency. The pattern at each frequency can then be viewed by using the reduced dataset option of the graph control.




177


Single Point Poles are only valid for full spherical pattern measurements using the conical section (stepped theta) data acquisition order. When checked, the program will only measure the points at theta = 0, 180, and 360° at the initial phi angle. The corresponding data will then be rotated around the Z-axis for all other phi angles. The assumption is that the total field is constant at these points and only the polarization direction changes. In an effort to maintain the appearance of the 3-D plots for both polarizations, the vector component is rotated through the range of phi values to generate new values for each polarization. However, a single scalar measurement is insufficient to determine the vector direction of the resultant field, so there is a 50% chance that the rotation will be in the wrong direction. This can be mitigated by starting from a known polarization such that the rotation is symmetrical (polarization at phi = 0° is along one of the two measurement polarizations) or increases in the expected rotation direction. These issues will not affect the total field/power plot or any quantities derived from it. Future revisions may offer a two-point pole option to determine the actual vector direction. Close Pattern duplicates the first phi-axis data point as the last data point and adds 360° to the recorded position. This results in a closed surface and avoids the "seam" sometimes visible in polar or 3-D plots. This also allows speeding up a test by not re-measuring the end points. The requested range of motion can be reduced for the "seam" axis and still result in complete pattern coverage. Without this option, reducing the range of motion would result in a partial surface, which would be integrated as a partial surface rather than the complete surface for the post-processing calculations. This option is only valid for polar, cylindrical, or full spherical pattern measurements using the conical section (stepped theta) data acquisition order.



Extrapolate Poles provides another optimization for cases where the exact pattern at the poles is not critical. Since the spherical integration applies a sin(θ) term to the measured data, the values of the poles do not affect the integral. However, EMQuest requires these points to be present in the data set in order to differentiate between a full surface integration and a partial surface integration. Selecting this option will replace the points at theta = 0, and either 180 or 360° with the linear average of all phi values at the next nearest theta angle. This substitution only occurs if the end point is not expressly measured. Thus, specifying a theta range from 0 to 180° will not extrapolate either pole. This option is only valid for full spherical pattern measurements using the conical section (stepped theta) data acquisition order.

Network Analyzer Ports allows overriding the default configuration of using the network analyzer as a two-port receiver. The available settings are:






179


13.1.4 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Dual-Polarization Pattern Measurement











Polarization (Channel 1/Channel 2) assigns the corresponding polarization of the dual polarized receive antenna to each channel of the dual channel receiver. Note that a dual-polarization pattern measurement will record both polarizations simultaneously and calculate the net power when done. While two separate antennas may be used instead of a single dual-polarized antenna, there is no provision for accommodating any offset in position between the two. Thus, the net pattern and associated antenna properties will be incorrect if there is any boresight offset between the two antenna polarizations.

To minimize confusion in interpreting data, the polarizations are labeled to correspond to the motion direction that is parallel to the polarization direction. That is, for spherical patterns, the Theta polarization should be set perpendicular to the theta rotational axis (parallel to the measurement antenna’s rotation about that axis) and the Phi polarization should be set perpendicular to the phi rotational axis. Similarly for cylindrical patterns, the Phi polarization should be perpendicular to the rotational axis. For linear positioners (X, Y, and Z), the polarization should be along the corresponding axis of motion. This is simply a labeling convention and does not affect the resultant data. If a non-standard configuration is used where the polarization direction does not correspond to the directions of motion, the labels may be used arbitrarily, and their meanings interpreted as such.

Selecting Theta/Phi will make channel 1 record the theta polarization and channel 2 record the phi, while selecting Phi/Theta will reverse this. The same is true for X/Y vs. Y/X for planar patterns and Phi/Z vs. Z/Phi for cylindrical patterns.



181


Continuous, which will run the axis at the continuous speed setting of the motor (see the documentation for the positioner for more information) and acquire data as it moves. This mode provides the fastest test, since the positioner does not have to accelerate and decelerate between each measured point, but there are some disadvantages. The number of points measured per revolution is given approximately by the period of rotation divided by the data acquisition speed of the receivers. The test records the axis position before and after each measurement and by default assumes that each data point was recorded at the midpoint between those two positions. However, the data could really be measured anywhere between the two positions, resulting in a certain amount of skew to the measured results. The larger the resultant step between each measured point, the larger the possible skew, but it should always be the same relative value, assuming the measurement is repeatable. The Skew Correction provides a way to manually adjust for this effect. The skew correction can be used to move the reported measurement position anywhere between the first position (-50% skew) and the second position (+50% skew). Continuous mode will give the best results with a very fast receiver or at very low positioner speed settings. Note: This mode is susceptible to variations due to processor loading and Windows message processing. Any interruption during data acquisition will cause gaps in the resulting data since the positioner will continue to move but the test will not be able to acquire data. For best results, the user should avoid interacting with menus or other applications during continuous data acquisition.



Transmit Height is used to indicate an offset from boresight in a fully anechoic environment, or to indicate a distance above the ground plane in a semi-anechoic environment.



Note that when using a MAPS, it will normally not be possible to offset in one absolute direction since any mounting offset will rotate around the horizontal axis. However, this field can still be used to represent the offset from center if desired.







Receiver Mode determines how the receivers will be configured for the test and how the measured data is interpreted. The available modes are:



183



Data Acquisition Mode controls how the data will be read from the receivers.



Frequency Range records an entire trace from the analyzer at each data acquisition point. This mode should only be used in stepped mode, since in continuous measurement mode, the location of the first frequency will be different from the last frequency, resulting in significant skew. In addition, continuous measurement mode will acquire data at random positions, which will result in interpolation errors in a transposed dataset. .



Note: This mode can generate an excessive amount of data! The resulting data set will be N times the size of a traditional pattern generated by either of the marker modes, where N is the number of frequency points supported by the equipment used. This can result in long load and display times as well as issues in graphing the resulting data. In this mode, data is acquired as magnitude vs. frequency traces as a function of position. Due to the organization of the data in this form, normal 3-D plotting of a pattern is not available. Use the transpose option under the Corrections tab to format the data as patterns vs. frequency. The pattern at each frequency can then be viewed by using the reduced dataset option of the graph control.



Single Point Poles are only valid for full spherical pattern measurements using the conical section (stepped theta) data acquisition order. When checked, the program will only measure the points at theta = 0, 180, and 360° at the initial phi angle. The corresponding data will then be rotated around the Z-axis for all other phi angles. The assumption is that the total field is constant at these points and only the polarization direction changes. In an effort to maintain the appearance of the 3-D plots for both polarizations, the vector component is rotated through the range of phi values to generate new values for each polarization. However, a


185


single scalar measurement is insufficient to determine the vector direction of the resultant field, so there is a 50% chance that the rotation will be in the wrong direction. This can be mitigated by starting from a known polarization such that the rotation is symmetrical (polarization at phi = 0° is along one of the two measurement polarizations) or increases in the expected rotation direction. These issues will not affect the total field/power plot or any quantities derived from it. Future revisions may offer a two-point pole option to determine the actual vector direction. Close Pattern duplicates the first phi-axis data point as the last data point and adds 360° to the recorded position. This results in a closed surface and avoids the "seam" sometimes visible in polar or 3-D plots. This also allows speeding up a test by not re-measuring the end points. The requested range of motion can be reduced for the "seam" axis and still result in complete pattern coverage. Without this option, reducing the range of motion would result in a partial surface, which would be integrated as a partial surface rather than the complete surface for the post-processing calculations. This option is only valid for polar, cylindrical, or full spherical pattern measurements using the conical section (stepped theta) data acquisition order.

Extrapolate Poles provides another optimization for cases where the exact pattern at the poles is not critical. Since the spherical integration applies a sin(θ) term to the measured data, the values of the poles do not affect the integral. However, EMQuest requires these points to be present in the data set in order to differentiate between a full surface integration and a partial surface integration. Selecting this option will replace the points at theta = 0, and either 180 or 360° with the linear average of all phi values at the next nearest theta angle. This substitution only occurs if the end point is not expressly measured. Thus, specifying a theta range from 0 to 180° will not extrapolate either pole. This option is only valid for full spherical pattern measurements using the conical section (stepped theta) data acquisition order.





13.1.5 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Sensitivity Pattern Measurement

The Parameters Pane is used to enter the majority of the required test parameters specific to this test.






Polarization is used to indicate the polarization of the receive antenna used for the test. The single-polarization tests are normally used when only one vector network analyzer signal path is available (i.e. S21), or when this is the only information required. If two signal paths are available (i.e. Ports A and B) or a hybrid is used to generate a dual channel vector analyzer, a dual-polarization pattern measurement will record both polarizations simultaneously.


187


The available choices for the polarization setting for single-polarization tests are Horizontal and Vertical. For dual-polarization tests, selecting Horizontal/Vertical will make channel 1 record the horizontal polarization and channel 2 record the vertical, while selecting Vertical/Horizontal will reverse this. These selections simply label the data appropriately.



Stepped, which will step the axis at the stepped speed setting of the motor, stopping at each step to acquire a single data point. This mode gives the best possible result since the data is acquired at the exact position indicated.



For tests which require dwell time at each point (such as swept frequency measurements) stepped mode is necessary to insure that the entire measurement is performed at the same physical position.








Close Pattern duplicates the first data point as the last data point and adds 360° to the recorded position. This results in a closed surface and avoids the "seam" sometimes visible in


189


polar plots. This also allows speeding up a test by not re-measuring the end points. The requested range of motion can be reduced and still result in complete pattern coverage. Without this option, reducing the range of motion would result in a partial polar plot, which would be integrated as a partial cut rather than the complete 360° for the post-processing calculations. This option is only valid for polar pattern measurements.



Remove Single Point Frequency Axis provides a data set reduction that removes the frequency axis from frequency dependent data sets having only one frequency point in the list. The option defaults to "on". Measure Polarizations Sequentially will cause the dual polarized test to perform two single polarization tests sequentially, pausing in between each test sequence to allow manually changing the polarization of the measurement antenna. This option is only available for dual polarized tests.

13.1.5.1 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Sensitivity Pattern Measurement











To minimize confusion in interpreting data, the polarizations for dual-axis tests are labeled to correspond to the motion direction that is parallel to the polarization direction. That is, for spherical patterns, the Theta polarization should be set perpendicular to the theta rotational axis (parallel to the measurement antenna’s rotation about that axis) and the Phi polarization should be set perpendicular to the phi rotational axis. Similarly for cylindrical patterns, the Phi polarization should be perpendicular to the rotational axis. For linear positioners (X, Y, and Z), the polarization should be along the corresponding axis of motion. This is simply a labeling convention and does not affect the resultant data. If a non-standard configuration is used where the polarization direction does not correspond to the directions of motion, the


191


labels may be used arbitrarily, and their meanings interpreted as such.

The available selections for a single-polarization test are Theta or Phi for spherical patterns, X or Y for planar patterns, and Phi or Z for cylindrical patterns. For a dual polarized test, Selecting Theta/Phi will make channel 1 record the theta polarization and channel 2 record the phi, while selecting Phi/Theta will reverse this. The same is true for X/Y vs. Y/X for planar patterns and Phi/Z vs. Z/Phi for cylindrical patterns.













193






Record Actual Axis Position forces the test to record the actual physical position of the positioner at each stepped position instead of the target position. This is only necessary if the positioner’s targeting capability is insufficient to position to the target within the desired positioning uncertainty. Remove Single Point Frequency Axis provides a data set reduction that removes the frequency axis from frequency dependent data sets having only one frequency point in the list. The option defaults to "on". Measure Polarizations Sequentially will cause the dual polarized test to perform two single polarization tests sequentially, pausing in between each test sequence to allow manually changing the polarization of the measurement antenna. This option is only available for dual polarized tests.



13.1.6 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Throughput Pattern Measurement










Continuous, which will run the axis at the continuous speed setting of the motor (see the documentation for the positioner for more information) and acquire data as it moves. This mode provides the fastest test, since the


195


positioner does not have to accelerate and decelerate between each measured point, but there are some disadvantages. The number of points measured per revolution is given approximately by the period of rotation divided by the data acquisition speed of the receiver. The test records the axis position before and after each measurement and by default assumes that each data point was recorded at the midpoint between those two positions. However, the data could really be measured anywhere between the two positions, resulting in a certain amount of skew to the measured results. The larger the resultant step between each measured point, the larger the possible skew, but it should always be the same relative value, assuming the measurement is repeatable. The Skew Correction provides a way to manually adjust for this effect. The skew correction can be used to move the reported measurement position anywhere between the first position (-50% skew) and the second position (+50% skew). This mode will give the best results with a very fast receiver or at very low positioner speed settings. Note: This mode is susceptible to variations due to processor loading and Windows message processing. Any interruption during data acquisition will cause gaps in the resulting data since the positioner will continue to move but the test will not be able to acquire data. For best results, the user should avoid interacting with menus or other applications during continuous data acquisition.



Transmit Height is used to indicate an offset from boresight in a fully anechoic environment, or to indicate a distance above the ground plane in a semi-anechoic environment. Note that when using a MAPS, it will normally not be possible to offset in one absolute direction since any mounting offset will rotate around the horizontal axis.



However, this field can still be used to represent the offset from center if desired.








Record Actual Axis Position forces the test to record the actual physical position of the positioner at each stepped position instead of the target position. This is only necessary


197


if the positioner’s targeting capability is insufficient to position to the target within the desired positioning uncertainty.

Remove Single Point Frequency Axis provides a data set reduction that removes the frequency axis from frequency dependent data sets having only one frequency point in the list. The option defaults to "on".

13.1.7 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Throughput Pattern Measurement







Positioner allows selection of which axis (Phi Angle or Theta Angle for spherical patterns, X or Y for planar



patterns, and Phi Angle or Z for cylindrical patterns) of the two-axis positioner to use for the primary or secondary axis. The controls are linked between the primary and secondary axis so that selecting Phi Angle/X/Phi Angle for one will automatically set the other to Theta Angle/Y/Z.


To minimize confusion in interpreting data, the polarizations for dual-axis tests are labeled to correspond to the motion direction that is parallel to the polarization direction. That is, for spherical patterns, the Theta polarization should be set perpendicular to the theta rotational axis (parallel to the measurement antenna’s rotation about that axis) and the Phi polarization should be set perpendicular to the phi rotational axis. Similarly for cylindrical patterns, the Phi polarization should be perpendicular to the rotational axis. For linear positioners (X, Y, and Z), the polarization should be along the corresponding axis of motion. This is simply a labeling convention and does not affect the resultant data. If a non-standard configuration is used where the polarization direction does not correspond to the directions of motion, the labels may be used arbitrarily, and their meanings interpreted as such.




199


Continuous, which will run the axis at the continuous speed setting of the motor (see the documentation for the positioner for more information) and acquire data as it moves. This mode provides the fastest test, since the positioner does not have to accelerate and decelerate between each measured point, but there are some disadvantages. The number of points measured per revolution is given approximately by the period of rotation divided by the data acquisition speed of the receiver. The test records the axis position before and after each measurement and by default assumes that each data point was recorded at the midpoint between those two positions. However, the data could really be measured anywhere between the two positions, resulting in a certain amount of skew to the measured results. The larger the resultant step between each measured point, the larger the possible skew, but it should always be the same relative value, assuming the measurement is repeatable. The Skew Correction provides a way to manually adjust for this effect. The skew correction can be used to move the reported measurement position anywhere between the first position (-50% skew) and the second position (+50% skew). This mode will give the best results with a very fast receiver or at very low positioner speed settings.

Note: This mode is susceptible to variations due to processor loading and Windows message processing. Any interruption during data acquisition will cause gaps in the resulting data since the positioner will continue to move but the test will not be able to acquire data. For best results, the user should avoid interacting with menus or other applications during continuous data acquisition.













201




Record Actual Axis Position forces the test to record the actual physical position of the positioner at each stepped position instead of the target position. This is only necessary if the positioner’s targeting capability is insufficient to position to the target within the desired positioning uncertainty. Remove Single Point Frequency Axis provides a data set reduction that removes the frequency axis from frequency dependent data sets having only one frequency point in the list. The option defaults to "on".

13.1.8 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Vector Pattern Measurement













Continuous, which will run the axis at the continuous speed setting of the motor (see the documentation for the positioner for more information) and acquire data as it moves. This mode provides the fastest test, since the positioner does not have to accelerate and decelerate between each measured point, but there are some disadvantages. The number of points measured per revolution is given approximately by the period of rotation divided by the data acquisition speed of the receiver. The test records the axis position before and after each measurement and by default assumes that each data point was recorded at the midpoint between those two positions. However, the data could really be measured anywhere between the two positions, resulting in a certain amount of skew to the measured results. The larger the resultant step between each measured point, the larger the possible skew, but it should always be the same relative value, assuming the measurement is repeatable. The Skew Correction provides a way to manually adjust for this effect. The skew correction can be used to move the reported measurement


203


position anywhere between the first position (-50% skew) and the second position (+50% skew). This mode will give the best results with a very fast receiver or at very low positioner speed settings. Note: This mode is susceptible to variations due to processor loading and Windows message processing. Any interruption during data acquisition will cause gaps in the resulting data since the positioner will continue to move but the test will not be able to acquire data. For best results, the user should avoid interacting with menus or other applications during continuous data acquisition.











Vector Data Format controls how the vector data is reported. The available formats are:

Real/Imaginary will record the vector information in unitless linear real and imaginary pairs.

Log Magnitude/Phase will record the vector information as log magnitude in dB and phase in degrees.




Frequency Range records an entire trace from the analyzer at each data acquisition point. This mode should only be used in stepped mode, since in continuous measurement mode, the location of the first frequency will be different from the last frequency, resulting in significant skew.


205


Note: This mode can generate an excessive amount of data! The resulting data set will be N times the size of a traditional pattern generated by either of the marker modes, where N is the number of frequency points supported by the equipment used. This can result in long load and display times as well as issues in graphing the resulting data. In this mode, data is acquired as magnitude vs. frequency traces as a function of position. Due to the organization of the data in this form, normal polar plotting of a pattern is not available.

Network Analyzer Ports allows overriding the default configuration of using the network analyzer as a two-port receiver. This setting is not available for dual-polarized tests. The available settings are:




Close Pattern duplicates the first data point as the last data point and adds 360° to the recorded position. This results in a closed surface and avoids the "seam" sometimes visible in polar plots. This also allows speeding up a test by not re-measuring the end points. The requested range of motion can be reduced and still result in complete pattern coverage. Without this option, reducing the range of motion would result in a partial polar plot, which would be integrated as a partial cut rather than the complete 360° for the post-



processing calculations. This option is only valid for polar pattern measurements.



13.1.9 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Vector Pattern Measurement






To cover the surface of an entire sphere once, one axis should have its upper limit set to 180°, while the other should be set to 360°. The lower limits should normally be set to zero. Going beyond the 0-180° range on both axes will result in duplicate points being measured, and will yield


207


unpredictable antenna property calculation results. The system can also measure fractional surfaces by reducing the range of the limits for either or both axes, but again, the effect on the calculations is undefined. For proper antenna property calculation results, a full spherical surface should be measured, with one axis set from 0-180° and the other from 0-360°.




To minimize confusion in interpreting data, the polarizations for dual-axis tests are labeled to correspond to the motion direction that is parallel to the polarization direction. That is, for spherical patterns, the Theta polarization should be set perpendicular to the theta rotational axis (parallel to the measurement antenna’s rotation about that axis) and the Phi polarization should be set perpendicular to the phi rotational axis. Similarly for cylindrical patterns, the Phi polarization should be perpendicular to the rotational axis. For linear positioners (X, Y, and Z), the polarization should be along the corresponding axis of motion. This is simply a labeling convention and does not affect the resultant data. If a non-standard configuration is used where the polarization direction does not correspond to the directions of motion, the labels may be used arbitrarily, and their meanings interpreted as such.







209













Vector Data Format controls how the vector data is reported. The available formats are:

Real/Imaginary will record the vector information in unitless linear real and imaginary pairs.

Log Magnitude/Phase will record the vector information as log magnitude in dB and phase in degrees.




Frequency Range records an entire trace from the analyzer at each data acquisition point. This mode should only be used in stepped mode, since in continuous measurement mode, the location of the first frequency will be different from the last frequency, resulting in significant skew.

Note: This mode can generate an excessive amount of data! The resulting data set will be N times the size of a traditional pattern generated by either of the marker modes, where N is the number of frequency points supported by the equipment used. This can result in long load and display times as well as issues in graphing the resulting data. In this mode, data is acquired as magnitude vs. frequency traces as a function of position. Due to the organization of the data in this form, normal 3-D plotting of a pattern is not available.


211


Network Analyzer Ports allows overriding the default configuration of using the network analyzer as a two-port receiver. This setting is not available for dual-polarized tests. The available settings are:






Record Actual Axis Position forces the test to record the actual physical position of the positioner at each stepped position instead of the target position. This is only necessary if the positioner’s targeting capability is insufficient to position to the target within the desired positioning uncertainty. Measure Polarizations Sequentially will cause the dual polarized test to perform two single polarization tests



sequentially, pausing in between each test sequence to allow manually changing the polarization of the measurement antenna. This option is only available for dual polarized tests.

13.1.10 Equipment Pane, Pattern Measurement Test

The Equipment Pane is used for selection of test equipment supported by the selected pattern measurement test. Select the desired equipment from the available equipment listed in each combo box. If there is no equipment listed, configure the appropriate equipment type in the Equipment Control Panel. (Note that it will be necessary to switch panes in order to refresh the equipment list after changing settings in the control panel.) Each selected piece of equipment will add a node to the tree-view beneath the Equipment node, allowing entry of test specific equipment configuration information (i.e. bandwidth, points per trace, rotational speed, etc.) The available equipment for the various pattern measurement tests include:

Phi Axis Positioner is used to select the positioner to be used for phi axis rotation for a two-axis (spherical) pattern measurement test. For the ETS-Lindgren MAPS, the phi positioner is the horizontal axis.

Theta Axis Positioner is used to select the positioner to be used for theta axis rotation for a two-axis (spherical) pattern measurement test. For the ETS-Lindgren MAPS, the theta positioner is the vertical (turntable) axis.

Rotational Positioner is used to select the positioner to be used for rotation for a single-axis (polar) pattern measurement test. This can be either axis of a MAPS or a single axis positioner or turntable.

Analyzer is used to select the receiver(s) to be used for the test. A dual polarization test will require a dual channel receiver, while a single polarization test only needs one receiver channel. Depending on the configuration, and with the appropriate drivers, the pattern test can support vector or scalar network analyzers in absolute or relative mode, spectrum analyzers, tuned receivers, or power meters. Dual channel hybrids (configured under the equipment control panel) can be used to combine two single channel devices (i.e. two spectrum analyzers), or one single channel device and an RF switch, to be used as one dual channel receiver.


213


13.1.11 Correction Preferences Frame, Radiated Patterns

The Corrections node for radiated pattern measurements expands to provide corrections for each polarization of a pattern test. The Correction Preferences Frame appears in the parameter pane for the corrections node and provides control over the final format of the data after the post-processing calculations have been performed. These parameters include:

Display Final Data As: controls the format of the resultant data. The available formats include:

Power (dBm) the default setting, leaves the measured and corrected data as is and labeled as measured.

Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (dBm) changes the labeling to indicate the true nature of properly corrected power data. Once the corrections have been applied properly, the data represents angular dependent EIRP. This is a change in label only and does not affect the numeric values of the data.

Effective Dipole Radiated Power (dBm) applies a 2.15 dB correction to the corrected power data to convert properly corrected power data (angular dependent EIRP) to EDRP and labels the data accordingly.

Normalized Pattern (dB) finds the maximum point of the pattern and normalizes all data to that point. After normalization, the maximum is zero and all other values are negative. Normalization is not allowed for patterns of frequency dependent data, however, after transposing, frequency dependent patterns can be normalized.

Other Options allow additional formatting. The available choices include:

Transpose Frequency Dependent Data, when checked, will transpose patterns of frequency dependent data (produced using the Frequency Range data acquisition mode) to frequency dependent patterns. This will allow viewing pattern graphs for each frequency using the reduced dimension depth option of the graph control.

Transpose Frequency Dependent Antenna Attributes, when checked, will transpose the antenna attributes table of



frequency dependent data (produced using the Frequency Range data acquisition mode) to frequency dependent attributes. This will allow viewing frequency dependent graphs for each attribute. Note that the attributes will share one graph, so scaling and labeling will be mixed. By reducing the dimension depth of the graph, each attribute can be viewed separately.

Show Attributes for Each Polarization, when checked, will calculate the antenna attributes table for each polarization of a dual-polarized pattern test.

Reverse Single Point Poles reverses the rotation direction of the single point pole optimization for a two-axis dual polarization test when checked.

13.1.12 Correction Preferences Frame, Sensitivity Patterns

The Corrections node for sensitivity pattern measurements expands to provide corrections for each polarization of a pattern test. The Correction Preferences Frame appears in the parameter pane for the corrections node and provides control over the final format of the data after the post-processing calculations have been performed. These parameters include:


Power (dBm) the default setting, leaves the measured and corrected data as is and labeled as measured.

Effective Isotropic Sensitivity (dBm) changes the labeling to indicate the true nature of properly corrected power data. Once the corrections have been applied properly, the data represents angular dependent EIS. This is a change in label only and does not affect the numeric values of the data.


215


Effective Dipole Sensitivity (dBm) applies a 2.15 dB correction to the corrected power data to convert properly corrected power data (angular dependent EIS) to EDS and labels the data accordingly.

Normalized Pattern (dB) finds the maximum point of the pattern and normalizes all data to that point. After normalization, the maximum is zero and all other values are negative. Normalization is not allowed for patterns of frequency dependent data, however, after transposing, frequency dependent patterns can be normalized.



Transpose Frequency Dependent Antenna Attributes, when checked, will transpose the antenna attributes table of frequency dependent data (produced using the Frequency Range data acquisition mode) to frequency dependent attributes. This will allow viewing frequency dependent graphs for each attribute. Note that the attributes will share one graph, so scaling and labeling will be mixed. By reducing the dimension depth of the graph, each attribute can be viewed separately.


Reverse Single Point Poles reverses the rotation direction of the single point pole optimization for a two-axis dual polarization test when checked.

Invert Sensitivity Pattern (1/P (-dBm)) will, when checked, invert (negate) the EIS data. Since relative EIS is mathematically equivalent to 1/EIRP, inverting the data will give recognizable pattern shapes similar to those produced for radiated power tests. Otherwise, an EIS pattern will have large spikes caused by nulls in the pattern and will in general produce unrecognizable pattern images.



13.1.13 Corrections Pane, Vector Pattern Tests

The Corrections Pane for the vector pattern tests allows the entry of constant and/or frequency dependent corrections to be applied to measured data. A given test may have one or more correction sets to be applied to different portions of the data. Each set of corrections will have its own pane in the parameter tree. The available settings are as follows:

The Corrections list box holds a list of response file names for frequency dependent corrections. The response files can be either .RSP files or raw data files (.RAW) from a response or vector response measurement. Each file name will have a "+" or "-" in front of it to indicate that the corresponding data will be either added to or subtracted from the measured data. This notation follows the standard corrections notation for familiarity. The corrections are treated as complex corrections that are converted to complex (real and imaginary) numbers before applying to the data. The data is then either multiplied (+) or divided (-) by each complex correction. This allows the use of a variety of correction data types that can be properly expressed as valid complex numbers. These types include vector response files containing real and imaginary pairs, or any combination of magnitude, log magnitude, and/or phase information in either vector or scalar response files. It is not possible to apply real or imaginary components separately. Note: The user must ensure that the files in the list match the expected format, units, and required frequency range to avoid unpredictable results. Otherwise extrapolation or other errors may result. While it is possible to apply specialized corrections to intentionally change the data type and meaning of the resulting data (i.e. apply a correction of +107 dB to convert from dBm to dBµV), the data will still maintain the original labeling information. Therefore, while the expert user can take advantage of this capability, appropriate measures should be taken to provide comments or other indications to document the intended effect of the special corrections.


Add displays the file open dialog box to search for a response file to add to the measured data. The path to the selected file will be appended to the end of the list with a "+" in front of it to indicate that the data will be added to the measured result.


217





The Constant edit box allows the entry of a single constant complex correction (log magnitude and phase) to be applied to all data points.



14 Response Measurement

14.1 Making Response Measurements using EMQuest

14.1.1 Introduction

The Response Measurement is the workhorse of the EMQuest software package. Designed to measure a signal as a function of frequency (frequency response) or time (time response), the response test is a useful tool for obtaining frequency or time dependent information on an instrument under test (IUT).

The response file generated by a response measurement can be used as a correction factor or reference value for other tests. While the response test (with the appropriate test equipment) can measure a variety of values, including path loss, VSWR, gain, or absolute signal magnitude; when used as a correction, most tests assume that a response file contains relative response in dB. Care should be taken to avoid using response files containing other types of information in a manner that would produce erroneous results.

A vector response measurement is a variant to the standard scalar response measurement. It captures vector information and can be used as a correction factor for other vector measurements.

There are also a number of other variants to the response measurement, that measure different types of response. These are not covered directly in this section, but have similar features. These include the new time dependent response measurement, that takes multiple readings of an instrument (either traces or single points) as a function of time for a specified period. There are also several response measurements included in the EMQ-105 option, including throughput vs. time and throughput vs. attenuation response tests. None of these response measurements are intended for use as corrections to other measurements.


219


This section will describe some of the basics for configuring a response measurement, and assumes that the reader has read the Getting Started section and is familiar with the basic operation of the EMQuest package, including equipment configuration and parameter file generation. In addition to the material provided here, each page of the parameters for the response test will have additional detailed information on those parameters. Use the context sensitive help to obtain more information on a given parameter or page.

14.1.2 Configuring a Response Test

The following is an overview of the steps required to set up a response test.

14.1.2.1 Hardware Setup Normally, the required hardware for testing is installed at system setup and little day-to-day modification is required. In general, response measurements require a properly configured GPIB controlled piece of test equipment with frequency or time trace information, such as a network analyzer or spectrum analyzer and appropriate cabling for connecting the IUT.

Configure and label the required test equipment using the Equipment Control Panel. Be sure to enable any installed options or features that are required and use labels that clearly identify the equipment. These labels will be used to identify the equipment in the test parameters.

14.1.2.2 Parameters Create a new parameter file and then select the Response Measurement test to enter the necessary test information. Refer to the help for each page of the parameters for more details on each parameter. Most parameters have default settings which will allow an almost immediate "ready to run" state. It’s only necessary to select the appropriate equipment and press the Run button to start a test. However, these default settings probably won’t be exactly what’s required for a given application, so it’s necessary to review and modify the parameters as needed.



In general, the Parameters node controls the basic operation of the test. For a response test, it allows selecting the desired measurement configuration and data format to be acquired. The entire range of settings provided is normally only valid for vector network analyzers. Using other equipment to acquire data types not supported by that instrument will produce undefined results.

The Frequency Ranges node contains a list of one or more frequency ranges (multiple frequency ranges will be supported in a future release). Each range is used to set the desired frequency range or points for the test. If a zero span is selected, the equipment must support time dependent response in zero-span.

Use the Equipment node to select and configure the equipment to be used for the test in that range. Select the desired analyzer/receiver for the measurement. Most spectrum analyzers allow setting resolution and video bandwidth, or leaving them auto-coupled to the frequency span. Sweep time settings are typically used when in zero-span, but it is normally left auto-coupled to the bandwidth settings when a frequency span is used. Attenuation and reference level settings can be used to adjust the relationship between the noise floor, the available dynamic range in the analyzer window, and the signal level(s) to be measured. The trigger settings are usually set to free run. Other trigger options are normally only used for zero-span tests to synchronize the trace to a specific event. For network analyzers, settings such as points per trace, IF bandwidth, averaging, and output power are available. For single frequency pattern tests, the points per trace should be set to the minimum for fastest acquisition rate. The bandwidth should be set to provide sufficient dynamic range. Note that the HP/Agilent 87XX series of network analyzers contain a defect that will cause erroneous results for long signal paths unless the bandwidth is set to 30 Hz or lower, or the sweep time is increased. This is apparently due to the analyzer stepping to the next frequency before the signal at the current frequency has made it through the path and been measured.

For relative measurements, the calibration option(s) are used to perform a cable/path loss calibration prior to the test. Spectrum analyzer drivers only support a simple response calibration that records a reference measurement to subtract from the measured response. Most network analyzers


221


support more advanced calibration modes for both transmission and reflection measurements.

Most equipment drivers support pre-defined parameter configurations, which can be defined in the equipment control panel and then selected into the equipment parameters by right-clicking on the equipment parameter pane to display a list. This allows common parameter configurations to be pre-defined and quickly selected to configure a test.

The Corrections node provides a correction selection panel for applying additional relative corrections to the measured data. This can be used to apply previously measured gain/loss curves for cables, amplifiers, etc., which may not be accounted for in the reference calibration.

Use the Paths node to specify any custom output paths and/or output templates for this data. Otherwise the test will use those configured under the Tools : Options… menu. Use the Output node to reduce or interpolate the tabular data shown in the Table tab and in report output. Use the Notification tab to change the default test completion notification for this test from that configured in the Tools : Options… dialog.

14.1.2.3 Running a Response Test Once a parameter file has been developed for the test, the data acquisition process is as simple as all other EMQuest tests. Make sure that all cables and equipment are connected, warmed up, and operating properly, and press the "Run" button. If a calibration step has been requested, EMQuest will prompt the user through the various calibration steps required. Once the equipment has been configured, the user will be prompted to attach the IUT prior to initiating the measurement. Upon completion, the test will automatically apply any corrections, save the data to a time-stamped raw data file, create a new window for the resulting data file, and display the Graph tab.



14.1.2.4 Parameters Pane, Response Measurement The Parameters Pane is used to enter the majority of the required test parameters specific to this test. These parameters include:

Measurement Configuration allows selection of the desired configuration for a vector network analyzer. For spectrum analyzers and other scalar equipment, this information is used primarily for labeling the type of data acquired. The assumption is that the equipment has been configured with the necessary accessories (i.e. directional couplers, etc) and correction factors to give the resulting data meaning. The available selections include:

S11 measures the forward reflection response using an S-parameter test set.

S12 measures the reverse transmission response using an S-parameter test set.

S21 measures the forward transmission response using an S-parameter test set.

S22 measures the reverse reflection response using an S-parameter test set.

Port A/R measures the ratio of receiver port A to the reference port.

Port B/R measures the ratio of receiver port B to the reference port.

Port A/B measures the ratio of receiver port A to receiver port B.

Port A measures receiver port A. This is an absolute value measurement unless the analyzer is calibrated.

Port B measures receiver port B. This is an absolute value measurement unless the analyzer is calibrated.

Data Format allows selection of the desired data to be measured. Most of the formats are only valid for vector network analyzers. For spectrum analyzers and other scalar equipment, only the log magnitude or linear magnitude formats are valid. The available selections include:

Log Magnitude records the magnitude of the received signal in dB for relative measurements and dBm for absolute.


223


Linear Magnitude records the magnitude of the received signal without units for relative measurements and in milliwatts for absolute.

Phase records the phase relationship in degrees. This format is only valid for vector network analyzers performing ratio measurements (no Port A or Port B configurations). Use with other configurations and equipment is undefined.

Real records the real part of the signal without units. This format is only valid for vector network analyzers performing ratio measurements (no Port A or Port B configurations). Use with other configurations and equipment is undefined.

Imaginary records the imaginary part of the signal without units. This format is only valid for vector network analyzers performing ratio measurements (no Port A or Port B configurations). Use with other configurations and equipment is undefined.

Group Delay records the group delay of the signal in microseconds. This format is only valid for vector network analyzers performing ratio measurements (no Port A or Port B configurations). Use with other configurations and equipment is undefined.

VSWR records the voltage standing wave ratio of the signal without units. This format is only valid for vector network analyzers measuring S11 or S22. Use with other configurations and equipment is undefined.

14.1.2.5 Equipment Pane, Response Measurement The Equipment Pane is used for selection of test equipment supported by the selected response measurement test. Select the desired equipment from the available equipment listed in the combo box. If there is no equipment listed, configure the appropriate equipment type in the Equipment Control Panel. (Note that it will be necessary to switch panes in order to refresh the equipment list after changing settings in the control panel.) The selected piece of equipment will add a node to the tree-view beneath the Equipment node, allowing entry of test specific equipment configuration information (i.e. bandwidth, points per trace, etc.) The available equipment selection for a response test is:

Analyzer is used to select the analyzer, receiver, or hybrid to be used for the test. Depending on the configuration, and



with the appropriate drivers, the response test can support vector or scalar network analyzers in absolute or relative mode, spectrum analyzers, tuned receivers, or oscilloscopes (for time domain response traces). Hybrids may be used to combine a signal generator and power meter or other receiver to create a hybrid capable of generating a frequency response trace.

14.1.2.6 Parameters Pane, Time Dependent Response Measurement

The Time Dependent Response Measurement allows acquiring measured data repeatedly as a function of time for a specified period. The Parameters Pane is used to enter the majority of the required test parameters specific to this test. These parameters include:

Timing controls the duration and sample spacing of the time dependent response measurement.

Test Duration indicates the target length of the measurement, in seconds. The test will stop taking samples once the total duration has exceeded this time. Note that the last recorded sample will always be at a time less than or equal to this value since the sample time is recorded at the start of each sample measurement.

Time Step allows entering the desired time between the start of each sample, in seconds. Note that if the sample takes longer to measure than the time specified, the resulting sample spacing will be larger than this value.



Center Frequency records the marker reading at the center frequency of the analyzer span. (Note that for some


225


analyzers in zero-span mode, the marker may not behave as described here.)

Frequency Range records an entire trace from the analyzer at each data acquisition point.

Filtered Trace Point is intended for use with a spectrum analyzer in zero-span mode. It allows applying different processing filters to a measured trace and return a single value to be recorded. A number of filters are provided in the various spectrum analyzer drivers for recording peak, average, or pulse signal levels. A number of the filters provided are compatible with the requirements of the CTIA’s Mobile Station Over-the-Air Performance Test Plan. Refer to the help section for the particular equipment parameter frame for more information on the available filters.

Measurement Configuration allows selection of the desired configuration for a vector network analyzer. For spectrum analyzers and other scalar equipment, this information is used primarily for labeling the type of data acquired. The assumption is that the equipment has been configured with the necessary accessories (i.e. directional couplers, etc) and correction factors to give the resulting data meaning. The available selections include:

S11 measures the forward reflection response using an S-parameter test set.

S12 measures the reverse transmission response using an S-parameter test set.

S21 measures the forward transmission response using an S-parameter test set.

S22 measures the reverse reflection response using an S-parameter test set.

Port A/R measures the ratio of receiver port A to the reference port.

Port B/R measures the ratio of receiver port B to the reference port.

Port A/B measures the ratio of receiver port A to receiver port B.

Port A measures receiver port A. This is an absolute value measurement unless the analyzer is calibrated.

Port B measures receiver port B. This is an absolute value measurement unless the analyzer is calibrated.



Data Format allows selection of the desired data to be measured. Most of the formats are only valid for vector network analyzers. For spectrum analyzers and other scalar equipment, only the log magnitude or linear magnitude formats are valid. The available selections include:

Log Magnitude records the magnitude of the received signal in dB for relative measurements and dBm for absolute.

Linear Magnitude records the magnitude of the received signal without units for relative measurements and in milliwatts for absolute.

Phase records the phase relationship in degrees. This format is only valid for vector network analyzers performing ratio measurements (no Port A or Port B configurations). Use with other configurations and equipment is undefined.

Real records the real part of the signal without units. This format is only valid for vector network analyzers performing ratio measurements (no Port A or Port B configurations). Use with other configurations and equipment is undefined.

Imaginary records the imaginary part of the signal without units. This format is only valid for vector network analyzers performing ratio measurements (no Port A or Port B configurations). Use with other configurations and equipment is undefined.

Group Delay records the group delay of the signal in microseconds. This format is only valid for vector network analyzers performing ratio measurements (no Port A or Port B configurations). Use with other configurations and equipment is undefined.

VSWR records the voltage standing wave ratio of the signal without units. This format is only valid for vector network analyzers measuring S11 or S22. Use with other configurations and equipment is undefined.


227


14.1.2.7 Parameters Pane, Communication Tester Frequency Response Measurement

The Communication Tester Frequency Response Measurement allows acquiring data from a communication tester as a function of frequency/channel. This measurement is ideal for conducted power or sensitivity measurements of a mobile station and for intermediate channel testing per the CTIA OTA Performance Test requirement. The Parameters Pane is used to enter the majority of the required test parameters specific to this test. These parameters include:

Measurement Configuration allows selection of the desired measurement quantity. Not all communication testers/options will support these functions. The available selections include:

Mobile Station Transmit Power records the reverse/uplink power of the mobile as measured by the communication tester.

Mobile Station Sensitivity records the forward/downlink power setting of the communication tester (to within the specified step size) required to reach the specified digital error rate (BER/FER/BLER/PER) at the mobile station.

Mobile Station BER/FER records the digital error rate (BER/FER/BLER/PER) at the mobile station for the forward/downlink power level configured in the communication tester driver.

BER/FER Pass/Fail records the pass/fail condition of a digital error rate (BER/FER/BLER/PER) measurement at the mobile station for the forward/downlink power level and pass/fail criteria configured in the communication tester driver.

BER/FER vs. Forward Power records the digital error rate (BER/FER/BLER/PER) at the mobile station as a function of forward/downlink power starting at the first detected error and proceeding until the targeted error rate is exceeded.

Mobile Station RSSI records the Received Signal Strength Indicator level reported from the mobile station for the forward/downlink power level configured in the communication tester driver.



14.2 Equipment

14.2.1 Equipment Types

EMQuest supports a wide variety of equipment for different applications. The following list gives a brief description of the available equipment types and associated terminology, as well as some of their typical applications. Depending on the application for which the package is bundled, and the options purchased with the package, not all of the equipment types listed here may be available.

Signal Generator refers to an RF signal source. Usually the source produces a continuous sine wave (CW) signal at a single tunable frequency, although most also support a variety of modulation capabilities. Other non-tunable signal generators include things like fixed oscillators, comb generators, and noise sources.

Receiver refers to an RF receiver. This is usually used as a generic term and may encompass simple tuned receivers, which only tune a specific frequency for each measurement, power meters, which typically have no frequency selection, and swept devices, which scan a range of frequencies and provide frequency dependent RF levels.

Spectrum Analyzers refers to the class of receivers that produce a swept frequency or time dependent trace. Traditionally, spectrum analyzers imply a relatively simple tuning and analog-to-digital process, where built in attenuators and ADC reference level adjustments are used to adjust the tuned signal into the available display range. The noise floor is fixed with respect to the ADC circuitry and the available dynamic range is controlled by the attenuator and reference adjustments. Any signal approaching the top of the display window suffers gain compression or clipping. More recently, a new class of machines has appeared with similar outward characteristics, but considerably different operation. This is the swept tuned receiver. While still producing the same spectrum type measurement, the dynamic range of these instruments is usually fixed at a much wider range than the ADC of a traditional spectrum analyzer, and a valid level is measured anywhere within the dynamic range (subject to noise floor and compression considerations) whether or not the measured level falls into the current display window.


229


Many spectrum analyzers are equipped with Tracking Generators, which are signal generators designed to sweep in frequency with the receiver in order to make "black box" transmission response measurements. The synchronization of the two sweeps is often an accuracy issue, and high frequency tracking generators are rare.

Network Analyzers normally refers to vector network analyzers, which are integrated units containing a synchronized signal generator and one or more highly accurate wide dynamic range tuned receivers. A reference receiver and mixer combination is used to track the transmitted signal and compare it with the received measurement signal. The synchronized RF signal allows determination of both relative magnitude and phase information. Integral directional couplers and specialized calibration functions allow measuring both transmitted and reflected signals (S-parameters) from a "black box" instrument under test. Additionally, although not a primary function, many network analyzers can be used as narrow-band tuned receivers for stable CW signals.

Power Meters encompass a class of typically broadband power sensors with no frequency discrimination. They usually have very accurate measurement capability since the reference dynamic range calibration is usually valid at DC (0 Hz). Power meters use a variety of sensing/detector technologies, including diodes and resistive/thermocouple sensors. These sensors respond to any RF energy applied, and the response to different frequencies will vary, so power meters are usually used in applications where the applied frequency is known and controlled (i.e. from a signal generator). In this case, a frequency dependent calibration factor can be applied to correct for frequency response effects.

Communication Testers or Base Station Simulators provide wireless call simulation and testing capabilities for mobile phones and other wireless devices.

Positioners refers to a general class of devices designed to move an instrument under test (IUT) and/or a measurement antenna to change their position or directional orientation in order to obtain position or direction dependent measurements. EMQuest classifies positioners into two general categories, Linear Positioners and Rotational Positioners. Linear positioners include devices like antenna towers and X-Y positioners, which translate the position of



the attached object. Rotational positioners include devices like turntables and MAPS, which rotate the directional orientation of the attached object. For devices with more than one axis of motion (X-Y, MAPS), each axis is treated as a separate positioner.

Switches provide automated control of signaling and signal paths. Switches may be used to switch RF signals to different measurement configurations or change the configuration or operating mode of an IUT. EMQuest provides a versatile method of handling switching, where a single switch driver may provide any number of switch states (i.e. switch poles) that can have any combination of physical switch settings of the switch or switches controlled by that driver. Thus, a single change in switch state can activate a complicated combination of switch changes.

Throughput Testers refers to a special class of driver included with the optional EMQ-105 Network Throughput Test Package. These testers measure network throughput vs. time.

RF Attenuators include a range of programmable variable attenuators. These are currently only supported for network throughput testing with the EMQ-105 package.

Special Types EMQuest also includes some special equipment driver types to accomplish specific tasks. These types are treated slightly differently in that they aren’t required to be configured in the device control panel. Instead, they will automatically be listed alongside similar device configurations in test parameter equipment select fields where applicable. These special types include the following drivers.

Hybrids refers to the concept of combining two or more standard devices in such a manner as to make them appear to function like another more complicated device. For instance, a signal generator and power meter could be combined to produce a spectrum analyzer-like behavior, when used in a closed system where other signals would not interfere. EMQuest currently supports the following hybrid drivers:


231


Hybrid Dual Receivers combines two identical or different receivers with similar capabilities into one dual-channel receiver. This capability is typically used to satisfy the dual channel requirements for dual polarized measurements.

Hybrid Receiver and Switch provides another dual-channel option using a single receiver and an RF switch to create two signal channels. While less costly than a dual receiver hybrid, it can be significantly slower since all measurements must be performed sequentially, and settling time must be allowed between channel switching.

Hybrid Positioner and Switch allows automated switching to different switch states as a function of position. As the positioner is monitored, the current position is compared to a range of values corresponding to different switch states and the appropriate state is set.

Communication Tester Hybrids are actually three principle classes of hybrids (Hybrid Communication Tester and Receiver; Hybrid Communication Tester, Receiver, and Switch, and Hybrid Communication Tester and Dual Receivers) that combine an RF Communication Tester (Base Station Simulator) with the functionality of a single receiver or the dual receiver or receiver/switch hybrids. These hybrids support tracking of traffic channel and receiver center frequency settings in order to perform frequency dependent measurements of wireless devices. For dual polarization sensitivity testing, or radiated power testing using the communication tester as a receiver, there is also a Hybrid Communication Tester and Switch, which is provides the same functionality as the Hybrid Receiver and Switch.

Throughput Tester Hybrids refers to several classes of hybrids included with the optional EMQ-105 Network Throughput Test Package. These hybrids allow combining a throughput tester with a variable attenuator for the purpose of measuring throughput as a function of path loss between two wireless network devices, and with an RF switch for measuring throughput as a function of polarization or other diversity antenna configuration.

Manual Drivers provide acquisition and logging capabilities for applications where automation may not be available. Drivers are provided for manual positioners, which prompt the user to change the position at each step of a positioner based test, and for each analyzer variety, to allow user entered data logging at each step of a test. The manual



analyzer drivers may also be used to enter data from another source (i.e. an antenna calibration or amplifier gain values) into a response file in order to use them for corrections in a test.

Generic Equipment drivers are provided for a number of the standard types. With these drivers, the user can provide GPIB commands to address basic functional requirements of the device type. This allows the generic driver to be customized for equipment that may not be supported by existing drivers. These drivers are considered bonus technology and are not guaranteed to work in all cases.

14.3 Communication Testers

14.3.1 Agilent 8960

See Help File for more information.

14.3.2 Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200

14.3.2.1 Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 The Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester drivers are designed to be used with one of the communication tester hybrids to automate testing of mobile stations. This section gives a few tips and tricks for configuring and using the CMU for wireless testing. It is assumed that the users of this driver are intimately familiar with the operations and features of the CMU-200 and have the user manual readily available. Refer to the CMU documentation for details on the specific device settings provided by the drivers.

In general, no wireless communication testers/base station simulators available today were designed for over-the-air (OTA) testing. Due to this unfortunate oversight, they do not typically support the operational dynamic range normally expected and required of most test equipment used for antenna measurement. This limitation can make it extremely difficult to establish and maintain a call. However, with a little up-front effort, reliable results can be achieved.


233


The CMU receiver consists of an RF Analyzer having about 40 dB of dynamic range (less in some modes) with a variable front end. The RF Analyzer defaults to an auto-ranging mode where it uses the External Attenuation Input setting to determine the expected receive power and adjust the front end, and the associated dynamic range, accordingly. For most protocols, it also supports manual control over the RF Analyzer front end, which allows setting a max value for the expected RF level (RF Max Level) and fixing the dynamic range that way. This is similar to adjusting the reference level and attenuation settings on a spectrum analyzer. Doing so moves the location of the peak measured signal and/or noise floor within the spectrum window. While the CMU may be able to maintain a call when the received signal is outside this range, any measurements performed by the CMU when the received signal is outside the analyzer’s range are not likely to be valid. The CMU cannot establish a call or change channels unless the received signal for both the control and traffic channels (both before and after the change) are well within the available range of the RF analyzer.

In any case, the first requirement for performing OTA testing is to determine suitable settings to account for the path loss and the expected range of signals. The path loss will depend on the communication antenna setup used, but values of 30-60 dB are not uncommon. Since the path loss between the mobile and the CMU varies as a function of position (due to the orientation of the antenna pattern), there is no perfect choice. This causes some problems in the auto-ranging mode, since the variation in signal cannot be accounted for by the CMU. In the manual (fixed) range mode, it may be possible to select a fixed setting that will cover the range of received signals with the available dynamic range, but that cannot be guaranteed either. For this reason, several of the CMU drivers support a software auto range function that attempts to keep the received signal within the available window of the RF analyzer. Note that this adds overhead to the data acquisition process and may increase test time. Note: This function is in development and may not perform reliably. It is provided as bonus technology on an as-is basis, and not supported under the software maintenance agreement.

The solution that has seen the best success to date is to resolve the dynamic range issue by controlling the input level to the CMU using external hardware. This is accomplished



by adding an RF Limiting Amplifier into the signal path before the input to the CMU. This will require using separate ports for input and output. Limiting or compression amplifiers accept a wide range of input powers and provide a narrow range of output powers. Input dynamic ranges of 70 dB are available commercially.

Another hardware issue that affects digital RF communication is standing waves in cables. For systems with a number of RF switches, there are always imperfections that can cause reflections, resulting in signal fading issues that interfere with communication. Thus, even when the signal is in the available range, the CMU may fail to lock on after a channel change. In this case, it may be necessary is to add small (3-6 dB) attenuators before each switch or other discontinuity in the signal path from the communication antenna to the CMU receive port. Note that even though a discontinuity may not cause a significant change in path loss, the effect of multiple discontinuities can have significant influence on the digital communication.

Determination of a suitable level for either the External Attenuation Input or RF Max Level settings is something of a trial and error process of setting an initial estimated value and watching for registration or attempting to establish a call. Once the call has been established, the value can be tweaked to bring the mobile power monitor reading into the correct range. The acceptable value may vary depending on the mobile station being tested, but once the level has been adjusted to center the reading in the expected dynamic range, a complete single channel test can usually be performed without dropping a call. For multi-channel tests, it takes a bit more fine-tuning, and may require rotating the positioner(s) through a range of positions and watching for over/under range conditions. If deep nulls exist in the pattern, it may not be possible to perform multi-channel tests without losing calls, especially if the nulls go below the minimum signal level that the receiver can respond to.

On the base station side, the forward power should be set as high as necessary to keep the phone in a good signal range. In general, full power seems to work well given the path losses typically involved. It is not recommended to use the External Attenuation Output setting, since it will just interfere with readings of the output level of the CMU that will be required for sensitivity tests. EMQuest has its own correction factor capabilities that can be applied to the test data. This allows frequency dependent correction of the


235


data rather than fixed offsets. However, for CDMA tests, it may be necessary to enter values for both the input and output attenuation values, as the auto power control appears to use both settings to control the behavior of the link.

Normally, dropped calls are caused at the CMU, not the mobile station. If the signal level moves out of the narrow range that the CMU considers acceptable to perform measurements, it will drop the call. For radiated power measurements performed using a separate receiver, disable or extend any timeout settings that are available for the given driver. For measurements performed by the CMU, extending the timeout may result in the CMU reporting a measurement failure upon a dropped call while still reporting that the call is connected. This will result in retries and/or data point failures, possibly to the point of aborting the test. For this reason, it is important to avoid extending the timeout beyond the point where dropped calls are not reported as such at the end of a measurement.

Make sure that the network protocols and initial control and traffic channel settings are correct for the mobile station to be tested. The manufacturer should be able to provide all the necessary information.

We have contacted Rohde & Schwarz asking them to improve the firmware and provide additional range control and timeout disable options for all modes, and we encourage you to do the same.

Refer to the CMU documentation for other details on configuring the CMU and establishing a call. Note that some parameter settings for the CMU may be currently disabled in the drivers, either due to lack of support in the CMU’s GPIB command set or complexity of implementation. These will be addressed when possible.

Refer to the documentation on hybrid drivers and the other sections of the CMU-200 documentation for more information.



14.3.2.2 Band Handoffs The CMU-200 drivers for GSM and CDMA-2000 now support basic band handoff capability. Handoff can be made between non-overlapping (i.e. Cell and PCS) bands of the same protocol only. The target handoff band must have the desired settings pre-configured manually on the CMU, and the CMU does not support handoff between all possible band combinations. Support for more complicated handoff scenarios and configuration of all necessary parameters will be introduced in the next full version. To use the option, simply enter the additional channel frequencies into the list frequency table and the driver will perform handoffs as required. Ideally, the first frequencies would be for the same band as that used to establish the call, and channels for each band would be grouped together. In addition, for normal graph operation, the frequencies should always be entered in ascending order. The wireless channel tool can still be used to set the channels for each band by simply changing the band selection in the tool and entering the channels for that band. The frequencies for other bands will remain even thought the corresponding channel disappears when the band selection changes.

14.3.2.3 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 AMPS

This panel provides control over the settings of the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester with the AMPS Mobile Station options. It provides access to most available user configurable parameters for active testing of AMPS mobile stations. The available settings are spread across several tabbed pages and include:

General contains basic band selection and driver functional control. Settings include:

AMPS Mobile Station Band allows selection of the desired band and signaling mode of the CMU.

Signaling Mode selects the desired signaling mode of the CMU; Signaling or Non-Signaling. Currently, only Signaling is supported.

Options contains various options for driver functionality

Release call at end of test causes the CMU driver to release the call (hang up the phone) at the end of a test when checked.


237


Registration channel required causes the driver to force the CMU back to the voice channel specified under the Base Station Signal tab when a call is dropped, no matter what the current measurement channel. This is necessary for some mobiles that may only allow registration to occur on a specified channel.

Prompt for manual configuration causes the driver to pause after downloading parameters to the CMU and allow the user to make adjustments to any settings of the CMU as needed. This option is intended to allow adjustment of parameters not fully implemented in the CMU-200 driver and should not be used to change existing parameter settings or unexpected behavior may result.

NOTE: The use of manual configuration is only recommended for expert users and is not covered under EMQuest technical support.

Settling Times contains settings to add delays after various changes to the CMU settings. These delays may be necessary to ensure stable operation of the DUT before measurements are made.

Call Established Settling Time indicates how long to wait after establishing a call and setting the VMAC before continuing a measurement.

Channel Change Settling Time indicates how long to wait after changing the voice channel before continuing a measurement.

The remaining tabs contain device specific settings grouped similar to their groupings under the CMU user interface. Refer to appropriate operations manuals for the CMU-200 for more detailed descriptions of each available setting. Note that some settings may be currently disabled, either due to lack of support in the CMU’s GPIB command set or complexity of implementation. These will be addressed when possible.

Mobile Station Signal contains settings found under the MS Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu. Settings under this tab are primarily used for setting the mobile output power by setting the CMAC and VMAC settings.



Base Station Signal contains settings found under the BS Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu. Settings under this tab are primarily used for setting up the initial channel and forward power level of both the control and voice channels.

Network contains settings found under the Network tab of the CMU-200 menu, and primarily controls network identification, registration, and timeouts.

AF/RF Connectors & Analyzer contains settings found under the AF/RF and Analyzer tabs of the CMU-200 menu. These settings control the I/O ports of the CMU and the range control of the RF and AF Analyzers. These settings are critical for establishing and maintaining a call. When the RF Analyzer is in Manual mode, the RF Max Level fixes the available dynamic range of the measurement receiver (about 20 dB for AMPS). In the other modes, the input attenuation value for the selected RF port is used by the CMU to determine the appropriate range. Refer to Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 for more information.

Right clicking on the pane will bring up the pre-configured settings list, if any configurations exist. Selecting an item from the menu will copy all settings from the pre-defined configuration. Pre-configurations can be defined in the device configuration control panel.

14.3.2.4 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA

This panel provides control over the settings of the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester with the CDMA Mobile Station (CDMA One) options. It provides access to most available user configurable parameters for active testing of CDMA mobile stations. The available settings are spread across several tabbed pages and include:


CDMA Mobile Station Band allows selection of the desired band and signaling mode of the CMU.

Option Select selects the desired CDMA software option (communication band) for the CMU. The selected option must be installed and enabled in the CMU in order to run a test.


239




Call Established Settling Time indicates how long to wait after establishing a call and setting the power control bits before continuing a measurement.

Channel Change Settling Time indicates how long to wait after changing the RF channel before continuing a measurement.



Auto establish/re-establish call attempts to establish a call automatically as needed and continue the test without user intervention when checked. Since CDMA test mode calls auto-answer, this allows fully automated tests without any user intervention. If the auto-establish attempt fails, the normal establish call dialog is displayed.

Max Connection Attempts specifies the number of times to attempt paging the mobile automatically before displaying the establish call dialog.

Connection Attempt Interval specifies the amount of time to wait, in milliseconds, between each attempt to establish a call. Extend this value to give the mobile more time to respond to each paging attempt. Entering a value of zero will result in randomly spaced retry intervals ranging from 1 to 10 seconds.

Registration channel required causes the driver to force the CMU back to the RF channel specified under the Base Station Signal tab when a call is dropped, no matter what the current measurement channel. This is necessary for some mobiles that may only allow registration to occur on a specified channel.

Prompt for manual configuration causes the driver to pause after downloading parameters to the CMU and allow the user to make adjustments to any settings of the CMU as needed. This option is intended to allow adjustment of



parameters not fully implemented in the CMU-200 driver and should not be used to change existing parameter settings or unexpected behavior may result. The use of manual configuration is only recommended for expert users and is not covered under EMQuest technical support.

Automatic Retry Settings controls the behavior of various retry loops. These retry loops are implemented to address issues where dropped calls or other measurement difficulties would prevent normal completion of a test.

Data Point Auto Retry sets the number of times to automatically retry measuring a data point before prompting the user for intervention. After retrying the specified number of times, the user is prompted to abort, retry, or ignore the failure.

Sensitivity contains settings for the sensitivity search algorithms and FER testing control. Settings include:

Sensitivity Threshold defines the target sensitivity level.

Frame Error Rate defines the target FER for the sensitivity measurement. The reported sensitivity level will have a FER less than or equal to this value.

Confidence Level defines the statistical confidence interval to be applied to the FER data. This controls early pass/fail behavior and ensures that enough frames are taken to determine the FER to the specified level of certainty.

Pwr Ctrl at Sense Lvl allows running the coarse search for the sensitivity level at one power control setting (i.e. Auto) as defined by the "On Call Established" setting, and then switching to another power control setting (i.e. All Up) at the sensitivity level. This may be useful for preserving battery life.

Power Control Bits sets the mobile station power control loop to the specified mode during FER measurements at the sensitivity level. This setting overrides the equivalent settings during the FER measurement.

Frames Per Data Point controls the required number of frames for the FER measurement.


241


Max Frames defines the maximum number of frames to measure for the FER measurement. FER measurements near the sensitivity threshold will require this number of frames to be measured to determine pass or fail. For absolute FER measurements (no confidence level applied) this indicates the required number of frames for the measurement.

Min Frames defines the minimum number of frames to measure for a FER measurement. Early exit can only occur after measuring the required minimum number of frames.

Power Settling Times allows adding delays after adjusting power control on either the mobile or base station, prior to continuing the measurement. These parameters can have significant effect on test time.

Mobile PC Bits defines the amount of time to delay after adjusting the power control bits setting of the mobile. It may require some time for the mobile to transition to the new power level as directed by the CMU.

CDMA Power defines the amount of time to delay after adjusting the forward channel power. This may be necessary to account for any settling time of the CMU output channel, or for settling of the mobile power level when in Auto mode.

Signal Level Steps controls the sensitivity search algorithm.

Max Step Size specifies the maximum step size to be used in the fast search for the sensitivity floor. This should be set as large as practical, but small enough that a single step will not push the forward power so far below sensitivity that the call is dropped. For the CDMA One option, around 6 dB appears to be the maximum suitable value.

Fine Step Size specifies the minimum step size to be used in the fast search for the sensitivity floor, and the starting step size for the full sensitivity search. This value should be set as small as practical, but ideally, it should be large enough that the desired FER is within one fine step of the last zero FER value. Once the sensitivity floor is located, the sensitivity search then uses a binary search algorithm to divide down to the minimum step size with as few measurements as possible. For this reason, it is also recommended that this be a power of two multiple (i.e. 2, 4, 8, 16…) of the minimum step size setting, in order to maintain sensitivity as a multiple of the minimum step size.



Min Step Size specifies the minimum step size to be used in the final search for the sensitivity level. This value determines the granularity or residual uncertainty in the determination of the sensitivity level. This value should be set as large as practical (or as large as allowed, in the case of CTIA testing) to reduce test time.

Initial Signal Level (Max) defines the starting level for the sensitivity search. This value is also taken as the maximum sensitivity level. A sensitivity search will not be done above this level. This value is also used as the fixed forward power level for constant power FER measurements.

CDMA Power specifies the desired initial or fixed forward power level.

The remaining tabs contain device specific settings grouped similar to their groupings under the CMU user interface. The most important settings are described briefly below. Refer to appropriate operations manuals for the CMU-200 for more detailed descriptions of each available setting. Note that some settings may be currently disabled, either due to lack of support in the CMU’s GPIB command set or complexity of implementation. These will be addressed when possible.

Mobile Station Signal contains settings found under the MS Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu.

Mobile Settings Power Control Bits sets the mobile station power control loop to the specified mode after establishing a call.

Base Station Signal contains settings found under the BS Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu. Settings under this tab are primarily used for setting up the initial RF and traffic channels, forward power levels, and call mode.

Signaling RF Channel sets the RF channel used to register and communicate with the mobile station. Note that CDMA mobile stations may be configured to only register on specific registration channels. Consult the mobile phone manufacturer or service provider for more information.

Network contains settings found under the Network tab of the CMU-200 menu, and primarily controls the network standard and identification.


243


AF/RF Connectors contains settings found under the AF/RF tab of the CMU-200 menu. These settings control the I/O ports of the CMU and are critical for establishing and maintaining a call. The input and output attenuation values for the selected RF port are used by the CMU to determine the appropriate range. Refer to Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 for more information.


Note: Rohde & Schwarz has discontinued support for the B-81 (CDMA One) plug-in and is no longer making enhancements to the associated firmware. Existing limitations in the available functionality limit the capabilities of this CDMA driver. It is provided on an as-is basis and support is not guaranteed for future releases. Users of the B-81 option should upgrade to the B-83 (CDMA 2000) option for continued support.

14.3.2.5 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA 2000

This panel provides control over the settings of the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester with the CDMA 2000 Mobile Station options. It provides access to most available user configurable parameters for active testing of CDMA One and CDMA 2000 mobile stations. The available settings are spread across several tabbed pages and include:


CDMA Mobile Station Band allows selection of the desired band and signaling mode of the CMU.

Option Select selects the desired CDMA 2000 software option (communication band) for the CMU. The selected option must be installed and enabled in the CMU in order to run a test.






Channel Change Settling Time indicates how long to wait after changing the RF channel before continuing a measurement.



Auto establish/re-establish call attempts to establish a call automatically as needed and continue the test without user intervention when checked. Since CDMA test mode calls auto-answer in test mode, this allows fully automated tests without any user intervention. If the auto-establish attempt fails, the normal establish call dialog is displayed.



Registration channel required causes the driver to force the CMU back to the RF channel specified under the Base Station Signal tab when a call is dropped, no matter what the current measurement channel. This is necessary for some mobiles that may only allow registration to occur on a specified channel.



245





Sensitivity contains settings for the sensitivity search algorithms and FER testing control. Settings include:

Sensitivity Threshold defines the target sensitivity level.

Frame Error Rate defines the target FER for the sensitivity measurement. The reported sensitivity level will have a FER less than or equal to this value.

Confidence Level defines the statistical confidence interval to be applied to the FER data. This controls early pass/fail behavior and ensures that enough frames are taken to determine the FER to the specified level of certainty.

Pwr Ctrl at Sense Lvl allows running the coarse search for the sensitivity level at one power control setting (i.e. Auto) as defined by the "On Call Established" setting, and then switching to another power control setting (i.e. All Up) at the sensitivity level. This may be useful for preserving battery life.

Power Control Bits sets the mobile station power control loop to the specified mode during FER measurements at the sensitivity level. This setting overrides the equivalent settings during the FER measurement.

Frames Per Data Point controls the required number of frames for the FER measurement.

Max Frames defines the maximum number of frames to measure for the FER measurement. FER measurements near the sensitivity threshold will require this number of frames to be measured to determine pass or fail. For absolute FER measurements (no confidence level applied)



this indicates the required number of frames for the measurement.

Min Frames defines the minimum number of frames to measure for a FER measurement. Early exit can only occur after measuring the required minimum number of frames.



CDMA Power defines the amount of time to delay after adjusting the forward channel power. This may be necessary to account for any settling time of the CMU output channel, or for settling of the mobile power level when in Auto mode.


Max Step Size specifies the maximum step size to be used in the fast search for the sensitivity floor. This should be set as large as practical, but small enough that a single step will not push the forward power so far below sensitivity that the call is dropped. For the CDMA 2000 option, around 6 dB appears to be the maximum suitable value.

Fine Step Size specifies the minimum step size to be used in the fast search for the sensitivity floor, and the starting step size for the full sensitivity search. This value should be set as small as practical, but ideally, it should be large enough that the desired FER is within one fine step of the last zero FER value. Once the sensitivity floor is located, the sensitivity search then uses a binary search algorithm to divide down to the minimum step size with as few measurements as possible. For this reason, it is also recommended that this be a power of two multiple (i.e. 2, 4, 8, 16…) of the minimum step size setting, in order to maintain sensitivity as a multiple of the minimum step size.

Min Step Size specifies the minimum step size to be used in the final search for the sensitivity level. This value determines the granularity or residual uncertainty in the determination of the sensitivity level. This value should be


247


set as large as practical (or as large as allowed, in the case of CTIA testing) to reduce test time.

Initial Signal Level (Max) defines the starting level for the sensitivity search. This value is also taken as the maximum sensitivity level. A sensitivity search will not be done above this level. This value is also used as the fixed forward power level for constant power FER measurements.

CDMA Power specifies the desired initial or fixed forward power level.


Service Configuration contains settings found under the Service Cfg. tab of the CMU-200 menu. It contains settings for selecting the desired service and service option.

Service Settings contains settings for the primary service class and connection options.

Primary Service Class specifies the primary service class used for measurements. The primary service classes used for testing with EMQuest are Loopback Service for testing voice communication functionality and Test Data Service (Service Option 32) for testing 1xRTT data communication.

Service Options contains sub-option selections for selected primary service classes.

Loopback Service Option allows selecting the desired service option for the loopback service class. Service Option 2 is commonly used.

Speed Service Option allows selecting the desired service option for the speech service class.

Note: Each service option may have additional settings available on the CMU-200 that are not currently implemented here. The user should ensure that the default settings are suitable for their application or make modifications manually as needed.



Base Station Signal contains settings found under the BS Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu. Settings under this tab are primarily used for setting up the initial RF and traffic channels, forward power levels, and call mode.

Signaling contains channel control and various options.

RF Channel sets the RF physical channel pair used for communication between the mobile and base station. This should be set to the desired channel to be measured, or, for multi-channel tests, to the channel required to register the mobile station.

Call Loss Detect allows adjustment of the timeout required for the CMU to report that a call has been dropped. When enabled, if the CMU does not see a valid signal from the mobile for longer than the specified time period, it will drop the call. Warning! Extending the call loss detect timeout for fully automated tests such as sensitivity measurements may result in undesired results since the CMU will report that a connection is active when none exists. This results in non-recoverable measurement failures since the CMU cannot perform a measurement in this state, however EMQuest cannot determine why the measurement is failing.

Enable CLDet. allows completely disabling the call loss detect timer on the CMU. This can prevent the loss of connections when the CMU is unable to detect the mobile station’s signal due to out of range signal levels caused by pattern variations, etc. Warning! Never disable the call lost detect timeout for fully automated tests such as sensitivity measurements. See above for details.

Mobile Station Power Control Power Control Bits sets the mobile station power control loop to the specified mode after establishing a call.

CDMA Levels contains the absolute power control for the entire CDMA channel as well as the relative power control for each of the CDMA subchannels. CDMA Power specifies the forward CDMA channel RF output power used to establish and maintain a connection throughout the test. This level is varied automatically for sensitivity searches and returned to its original setting at the end of each sensitivity point measurement.

Network contains settings found under the Network tab of the CMU-200 menu, and primarily controls the network standard, system parameters, and identification information.


249


14.3.2.6 Network Network Standard sets the network standard band classification (area localization) for the given CDMA band selection.

RF Connectors & Analyzer contains settings found under the AF/RF and Analyzer tabs of the CMU-200 menu. These settings control the I/O ports of the CMU and the range control of the RF Analyzer. These settings are critical for establishing and maintaining a call. When the RF Analyzer is in Manual mode, the RF Max Level fixes the available dynamic range of the measurement receiver (about 40 dB for CDMA). Note that the behavior of the dynamic range window of the CMU varies with respect to the RF Max Level depending on if the power control bits are configured for Auto versus All Up. In the other RF modes, the input attenuation value for the selected RF port is used by the CMU to determine the appropriate range. Refer to Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 for more information. Custom settings under this menu are:

Auto Range fixes the RF Mode to Manual and uses the RF Max Level parameter as an initial RF Max Level setting. When in auto range mode, the CMU driver will perform a quick power measurement before and/or after changing certain control settings (i.e. channel changes or mobile power level changes) or performing certain measurements. If the received signal is determined to be over or under range, or too near the edge of the available dynamic range, the RF Max Level is adjusted automatically to attempt to move the received power closer to the middle of the range.

Note: This function is provided as a work-around to a weakness in the available instrumentation. It cannot be guaranteed that it will work in all cases. The use of a limiting amplifier is highly recommended for OTA testing to avoid the dynamic range limitations of the CMU’s receiver.




14.3.2.7 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 GSM

This panel provides control over the settings of the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester with the GSM Mobile Station options. It provides access to most available user configurable parameters for active testing of GSM mobile stations in both circuit switched, and, with the optional GPRS/EGPRS driver, packet switched modes. The available settings are spread across several tabbed pages and include:


GSM Mobile Station Band allows selection of the desired band and signaling mode of the CMU.

Option Select selects the desired GSM software option (communication band) for the CMU. The selected option must be installed and enabled in the CMU in order to run a test.




Channel Change Settling Time indicates how long to wait after changing the RF traffic channel before continuing a measurement.



Auto establish/re-establish call attempts to establish a call automatically as needed and continue the test without user intervention when checked. This mode will only work if the mobile has an auto-answer function enabled, or in data modes that auto-answer. If so, this allows fully automated


251


tests without any user intervention. If the auto-establish attempt fails, the normal establish call dialog is displayed.



Re-close loop on changes provides a work-around for some mobile stations that may fail to maintain a previously closed loop when the channel or PCL settings are changed. Checking this box will cause a close loop command to be sent after each of these changes, however overall measurement speed may be degraded.

Registration channel required causes the driver to force the CMU back to the RF traffic channel specified under the Base Station Signal tab when a call is dropped, no matter what the current measurement channel.

Prompt for manual configuration causes the driver to pause after downloading parameters to the CMU and allow the user to make adjustments to any settings of the CMU as needed. This option is intended to allow adjustment of parameters not fully implemented in the CMU-200 driver and should not be used to change existing parameter settings or unexpected behavior may result. The use of manual configuration is only recommended for expert users and is not covered under EMQuest technical support.



Sensitivity contains settings for the sensitivity search algorithms and BER/BLER testing control. Settings include:



RBER Threshold defines the target sensitivity levels when performing residual bit error rate (RBER) measurements. These values are used to determine the early exit condition for the RBER test functions of the CMU. Refer to the CMU-200 documentation for more information.

Class II BER defines the target BER for Class II bits during the sensitivity measurement. The reported sensitivity level will have a Class II BER less than or equal to this value. This value normally dominates the measurement.

Class Ib BER defines the target BER for Class Ib bits during the sensitivity measurement. The reported sensitivity level will have a Class Ib BER less than or equal to this value.

Frame Erasure Rate defines the target FER for the sensitivity measurement. The reported sensitivity level will have a FER less than or equal to this value.

Confidence Level defines the statistical confidence interval to be applied to the BER data. This controls early pass/fail behavior and ensures that enough frames are taken to determine the BER to the specified level of certainty.

BLER Threshold defines the target sensitivity level when performing block error rate (BLER) measurements.

BLER defines the target BLER during the sensitivity measurement. The reported sensitivity level will have a BLER less than or equal to this value.

Confidence Level defines the statistical confidence interval to be applied to the BLER data. This controls early pass/fail behavior and ensures that enough frames are taken to determine the BLER to the specified level of certainty.

Frames Per Data Point controls the required number of frames for the RBER or BLER measurement.

Max Frames defines the maximum number of frames to measure for the RBER/BLER measurement. RBER/BLER measurements near the sensitivity threshold will require this number of frames to be measured to determine pass or fail. For absolute RBER/BLER measurements (no confidence level applied) this indicates the required number of frames for the measurement.

Min Frames defines the minimum number of frames to measure for a BLER measurement only. Early exit can only occur after measuring the required minimum number of frames. This parameter does not affect RBER measurements.


253



Mobile Settling Time defines the amount of time to delay after adjusting the PCL setting of the mobile. It may require some time for the mobile to transition to the new power level as directed by the CMU.

Base Settle Time defines the amount of time to delay after adjusting the forward channel power. This may be necessary to account for any settling time of the CMU output channel, or for settling of the mobile’s automatic gain control (AGC).

AGC Holdoff Time defines the amount of time to delay for the automatic gain control of the mobile to adjust to a change in the received power before starting a BER measurement. This is a CMU parameter controlling each BER measurement. It has been determined that reducing this setting to zero may cause problems with the performance of BER measurements in the CMU-200. Refer to the CMU-200 documentation for more information.

BER Bitstream defines the bit sequence sent to the mobile station for the BER test.

PSR Bit Pattern selects the desired pseudo-random bit pattern used for the bitstream.


Max Step Size specifies the maximum step size to be used in the fast search for the sensitivity floor. This should be set as large as practical, but small enough that a single step will not push the forward power so far below sensitivity that the call is dropped.

Fine Step Size specifies the minimum step size to be used in the fast search for the sensitivity floor, and the starting step size for the full sensitivity search. This value should be set as small as practical, but ideally, it should be large enough that the desired BER is within one fine step of the last zero BER value. Once the sensitivity floor is located, the sensitivity search then uses a binary search algorithm to divide down to the minimum step size with as few measurements as possible. For this reason, it is also recommended that this be a power of two multiple (i.e. 2, 4,



8, 16…) of the minimum step size setting, in order to maintain sensitivity as a multiple of the minimum step size.


Initial Signal Level (Max) defines the starting level for the sensitivity search. This value is also taken as the maximum sensitivity level. A sensitivity search will not be done above this level. This value is also used as the fixed forward power level for constant power BER measurements.

Used Timeslot Level specifies the desired initial or fixed forward power level.

Pwr Ctrl at Sense Lvl allows running the coarse search for the sensitivity level at one power control setting (i.e. low power) as defined by the "Mobile Station Signal" PCL setting, and then switching to another power control setting (i.e. full power) at the sensitivity level. This may be useful for preserving battery life. Note: This setting is not available for multislot tests, including packet switched measurements, since each slot can be set to a different level. The desired multislot levels must be set on the Slot Configuration page and will remain constant throughout the test.

PCL sets the mobile station power control level to the specified mode during RBER/BLER measurements at the sensitivity level. This setting overrides the equivalent settings during the RBER/BLER measurement.

14.3.2.8 Measurement Optimization Sensitivity Search Algorithm allows selecting alternate search algorithms for the sensitivity measurement in order to reduce test time. These options may not be suitable for all mobiles or configurations.

Fast probing search uses the original search algorithm implemented for GSM. During the sensitivity floor probing measurements, an average RBER measurement is performed continuously as the power levels are changing. This allows the results to be obtained more quickly, but imposes some hysteresis on the search, resulting in "bounce" near the sensitivity level. It also has been known


255


to cause the CMU to hang in certain instances, although modifications have been made to try to eliminate this issue. For BLER measurements, this mode is identical to the Full probing search. It is recommended that the "Use RSSI to replace probing search" option be used in place of this option. Due to continued issues with using the average BER functionality in the CMU-200, this option will likely be removed in future releases.

Full probing search uses an individual RBER measurement at each power level. This method can be slower than the fast probing mode, but ensures that the probing measurement is performed at a stable power level at each step.

Use RSSI to shorten probing search uses the Received Signal Strength Indicator from the mobile to replace the Max Step Size portion of the probing search after the first full probing sensitivity measurement has been performed. The RSSI level at the Initial Signal Level is used to determine the approximate location of the sensitivity level and fall through to probing around that level using the fine step size. This mode is less likely to drop a call due to non-linearity of the RSSI, but is slower than using the RSSI to replace the probing search.

Use RSSI to replace probing search uses the Received Signal Strength Indicator from the mobile to completely replace the probing search for the sensitivity after the first full probing sensitivity measurement has been performed. The RSSI level at the Initial Signal Level is used to determine the approximate location of the sensitivity level and immediately begin full RBER/BLER measurements starting with the fine step size. This method may be prone to dropped calls if non-linearity in the RSSI curve causes the predicted sensitivity level to fall significantly below the actual sensitivity level. In this case, the RSSI Probe Bias can be used to offset the predicted value to remain above sensitivity.

Use RSSI to determine sensitivity uses the Received Signal Strength Indicator from the mobile to completely replace the sensitivity measurement after the first full probing sensitivity measurement has been performed. The RSSI level at the Initial Signal Level is used to determine the approximate sensitivity level based on the relative value determined from the initial measurement. This mode can greatly reduce test time, but does so at the cost of increased measurement uncertainty. All results are dependent on the



stability of the first sensitivity measurement performed and the linearity of the RSSI reporting of the mobile station. This mode is not currently acceptable for CTIA testing. Note: Since all results rely on the sensitivity measured at the first data point, it is critical that the mobile be stable for this measurement. Fluorescent backlights, etc. can cause desensitization for some period after connecting the mobile.

Note: For the purposes of this document, RSSI also refers to the "C Value" term used for packet switched data measurements.

Note: For all RSSI based optimizations, the Initial Signal Level must result in an RSSI value that is within the reportable range of the RSSI scale (i.e. RSSI from 1-62) to provide suitable results. Otherwise, any resulting predictions based on deltas in the RSSI will be invalid.

RSSI Probe Bias specifies an offset, in number of Min Step Size increments, from the default target sensitivity level. This offset may be used to bias the target level of the probing search if needed to ensure that the sensitivity measurement always starts above the actual sensitivity level.

Options lists a range of options that can change the way the sensitivity search algorithm and BER measurements operate in certain cases.

Disable early exit on probing measurements removes the statistical pass/fail determination based on confidence interval when probing the sensitivity level. During the initial probing search, the full number of probing frames (typically 5) will be measured at each power level.

Disable early exit on sensitivity measurements removes the statistical pass/fail determination based on confidence interval when measuring near the sensitivity level. Each RBER/BLER measurement will use the full number of frames (Max Frames) specified in the parameters.

Always ignore initial probe failures avoids a popup dialog that could interrupt the test sequence by choosing the "Ignore All" option, which treats failing probing measurements performed at the Initial Signal Level as failing RBER/BLER results, recording the default value for this data point. It will usually be safe to leave this option on (restoring the original behavior of the sensitivity search algorithm), but the associated error dialog was added to allow the user to


257


verify that a data point was truly a null rather than a problematic failure that should be retried.

Always treat repeat dropped calls as failures avoids a popup dialog that could interrupt the test sequence by choosing the "Ignore All" option, which treats repeated dropped calls as an indication of being below the sensitivity point. Checking this box restores the original behavior of the sensitivity search algorithm.

Always treat unexpected BER results as failures avoids a popup dialog that could interrupt the test sequence by choosing the "Ignore All" option, which treats cases where the CMU-200 is unable to perform a RBER/BLER measurement, and where the mobile is still connected, as failing RBER/BLER measurements. Previously, these conditions would cause an exit of the sensitivity measurement algorithm and prompt the user to retry the entire measurement.

Treat early pass with BER above target as failure attempts to eliminate the 1.5X "Bad DUT" bias applied to the statistical early pass calculation in the CMU by failing any early pass RBER/BLER measurements that report failing BER/BLER levels.

Initial Probe Retries allows user defined retry control for failures detecting when probing the Initial Signal Level at the start of the sensitivity search. Previously, this retry was fixed at one retry attempt. The default was increased to three retries (four total attempts) to reduce the chance of erroneously recording the starting level as the sensitivity level.

Probe Drop Retries allows the user to specify how many times a call should be reconnected and an attempt made to re-measure the target power level during the sensitivity probing measurements before deciding that it is below the sensitivity level of the mobile.

Floor Drop Retries allows the user to specify how many times a call should be reconnected and an attempt made to re-measure the target power level during the full RBER/BLER measurements performed near sensitivity before deciding that it is below the sensitivity level of the mobile.



Measurement Configuration contains settings for controlling specialized measurement functionality when the CMU-200 is used for power measurement and/or BER/FER vs. power measurements.

Absolute Power Measurements allows selecting the desired measurement quantity when the CMU is used for measuring power quantities such as would occur when measuring a scalar pattern with the CMU as the measurement instrument. The choices are the Mobile Power received from the reverse link of the mobile, or the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) reported by the mobile based on the forward link power of the communication tester.

BER/FER Measurement Source Selection allows selection of the desired BER or FER value to record for measurements that record the RBER value as opposed to just checking for a pass/fail condition. The choices are Class II BER, Class Ib BER, and Frame Erasure Rate (FER).

14.3.2.9 P/T Measurement Measurement Type selects the type of power measurement performed between single slot GMSK and 8PSK or multi-slot transmissions from the mobile station.

P/t Multislot Measurement Timeslot (MTS) contains settings for configuring the result returned from multi-slot power measurements.

Recorded Measurement Result selects the value that will be recorded when the measurement is performed. Choose between the current peak power of a burst, the current average power of a burst, and the running average of the average power of a burst.

Analyzed Measurement Timeslots allows defining which measurement timeslots will be used to determine the reported value. The CMU is configured to measure all four possible measurement timeslots and then the results of each are processed as indicated.

Note: The base MTS offset is defined by the default settings of the CMU. Future versions may support configurable MTS offsets if the need arises.


259


MTS-1 includes data from one timeslot before the base MTS in the analysis.

MTS 0 includes data from the base MTS in the analysis.

MTS+1 includes data from one timeslot after the base MTS in the analysis.

MTS+2 includes data from two timeslots after the base MTS in the analysis.

Recorded Timeslot Analysis selects the way the data from the selected time slots will be analyzed.

Default (single timeslot) records the data from the first selected timeslot, starting with MTS 0.

Average of all selected timeslots computes the linear average of the power across all selected timeslots.

Peak of all selected timeslots records the maximum value measured on all selected timeslots.

Minimum of all selected timeslots records the minimum value measured on all selected timeslots.


Mobile Station Signal contains settings found under the MS Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu. Settings under this tab primarily control the mobile power control level (PCL).

General contains general settings for the mobile station behavior.

Slot Mode selects between single and mutlislot modes for circuit switched communication. Selecting Multislot causes the Slot Configuration tab to be displayed.

Single Slot Settings / Main Slot Settings contains settings for controlling the behavior of a single slot and the main slot of a multislot transmission from the mobile station.

PCL sets the Power Control Level of the mobile to the specified value after establishing a call.



Base Station Signal contains settings found under the BS Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu. Settings under this tab are primarily used for setting up the initial control and traffic channels and their forward power levels.

TX/AUX TX Control sets up the behavior of the control channel (BCCH) and related options.

TX Mode selects whether the control channel (BCCH) is transmitted while the call is up (BCCH & TCH) or only while registering the mobile (BCCH or TCH). Most mobiles expect to see the BCCH during a call, and BCCH is required for channel handoffs while a call is established.

AUX TX Ch. Type enables the auxiliary transmitter option (B-95 or B-96) required for creating the BCCH for packet switched data connections and specifies the type of BCCH to generate.

Control Channel (BCCH) contains RF settings for the control channel.

RF Channel selects the desired RF channel for the BCCH. This channel is used to register the mobile station, control traffic channel handoffs, etc.

RF Level sets the RF output level of the BCCH. This level must be set within the dynamic range of the mobile for the phone to register.

Traffic Channel (TCH) contains RF settings for the traffic channel.

RF Channel selects the desired RF channel for the TCH. This channel is used to carry communication or data traffic between the mobile and the tester.

Time Slot (Single) specifies the timeslot used for single slot communication.

Slot Mode selects between single and mutlislot modes for circuit switched communication. Selecting Multislot causes the Slot Configuration tab to be displayed.

Used Timeslot Lvl sets the RF output level of the TCH for the timeslots used to communicate to the mobile. This level must be set within the dynamic range of the mobile for the phone to maintain a call. This level is varied automatically for sensitivity searches and returned to its original setting at the end of each sensitivity point measurement.


261


Unused Slot Lvl specifies the relative level of traffic generated by the CMU on timeslots not used to communicate with the mobile. This traffic is intended to simulate traffic to other mobile stations on the network.

P0 (BCCH/TCH) specifies the relative relationship between the power level settings of the BCCH and TCH when in packet switched mode.

Network contains settings found under the Network tab of the CMU-200 menu, and primarily controls the network identification and timeouts.

Network Identity contains settings to identify the network to the mobile station. Consult the mobile manufacturer for appropriate settings as needed.

Timeouts contains settings for controlling timeouts on connections and connection attempts when no response is seen from the device at the other end of the link.

Mobile Radiolink allows adjustment of the timeout required for the mobile to drop a call due to not seeing a signal from the CMU.

Testset Link allows adjustment and disabling of the timeout required for the CMU to report that a call has been dropped. When enabled, if the CMU does not see a valid signal from the mobile for longer than the specified time period, it will drop the call. Warning! Extending this timeout for fully automated tests such as sensitivity measurements may result in undesired results since the CMU will report that a connection is active when none exists. This results in non-recoverable measurement failures since the CMU cannot perform a measurement in this state, however EMQuest cannot determine why the measurement is failing. Never disable the call lost detect timeout for fully automated tests such as sensitivity measurements.

MTC allows adjustment and disabling of the timeout that the CMU uses to decide that a page to a mobile has failed. Extending this timeout will give the user more time to answer the mobile station when a call setup is attempted.

Network Service Selection Settings controls the network support, service selections, traffic modes, and coding schemes for the network. These options select the type of connection to be made, between GSM Circuit Switched, GPRS, and EGPRS (EDGE).



Network Support selects the desired network support, between GSM Only, GSM + GPRS, or GSM+EGPRS (EDGE). For the latter two modes to be available, the CMU-200 GPRS/EGPRS packet switched mode driver option must be enabled in EMQuest along with the GSM driver. The appropriate options must also be installed in the CMU-200 (GPRS = Option K42, EGPRS = Option K43).

Main Service/Packet Mode Service Selection combines the selection between Circuit Switched (standard GSM) or Packet Switched mode (GPRS or EGPRS) connection with the available service selections for packet switched tests. The Block Error Rate service is required to perform BLER based sensitivity measurements in GPRS/EGPRS modes. The remaining modes that support sensitivity measurements use the RBER test.

Circuit Switched Traffic Mode allows selection of the traffic mode and data rate for circuit switched connections.

Packet Data Coding Scheme allows selecting the coding scheme for GPRS (CS 1-4) and EGPRS (MCS 1-9) connections.

Slot Configuration tab groups all of the settings for multislot control of circuit switched and packet switched data modes.

Slot Level Settings controls how the forward/downlink transmit power from the CMU is determined for each slot. The values can either be linked to the global Used and Unused timeslot variables or can be set individually.

Slot PCL/Gamma controls how the reverse/uplink power control for the mobile station is set for each slot. The values can either all be set to the Main Timeslot be linked to the global Used and Unused timeslot variables or can be set individually.

Used Timeslot Level sets the reference RF output level of the TCH for the timeslots used to communicate to the mobile. This level (plus any offsets for each time slot) must be set within the dynamic range of the mobile for the phone to maintain a call. This level is varied automatically for sensitivity searches and returned to its original setting at the end of each sensitivity point measurement. This setting is linked to the equivalent control on the Base Station Signal tab.


263


Unused Slot Lvl specifies the relative level of traffic generated by the CMU on timeslots not used to communicate with the mobile when Slot Level Settings is set to "Use Used/Unused Timeslot Settings". This traffic is intended to simulate traffic to other mobile stations on the network. This setting is linked to the equivalent control on the Base Station Signal tab.

Main Timeslot specifies the main timeslot used for multislot communication. The main timeslot cannot be disabled.

Configuration – Slot 0 – Slot 7 allow enabling each timeslot for downlink and/or uplink and setting the downlink level relative to the Used Timeslot Level and the uplink PCL/Gamma setting if allowed by the Slot Level Settings and Slot PCL/Gamma selections.

RF Connectors & Analyzer contains settings found under the AF/RF and Analyzer tabs of the CMU-200 menu. These settings control the I/O ports of the CMU and the range control of the RF Analyzer. These settings are critical for establishing and maintaining a call. When the RF Analyzer is in Manual mode, the RF Max Level fixes the available dynamic range of the measurement receiver (about 40 dB for GSM). In the other RF modes, the input attenuation value for the selected RF port is used by the CMU to determine the appropriate range. Refer to Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 for more information. Custom settings under this menu are:

Auto Range fixes the RF Mode to Manual and uses the RF Max Level parameter as an initial RF Max Level setting. When in auto range mode, the CMU driver will perform a quick power measurement before and/or after changing certain control settings (i.e. channel changes or mobile power level changes) or performing certain measurements. If the received signal is determined to be over or under range, or too near the edge of the available dynamic range, the RF Max Level is adjusted automatically to attempt to move the received power closer to the middle of the range.

Note: This function is provided as a work-around to a weakness in the available instrumentation. It cannot be guaranteed that it will work in all cases. The use of a limiting amplifier is highly recommended for OTA testing to avoid the dynamic range limitations of the CMU’s receiver.




14.3.2.10 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 TDMA

This panel provides control over the settings of the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester with the TDMA Mobile Station options. It provides access to most available user configurable parameters for active testing of TDMA mobile stations. The available settings are spread across several tabbed pages and include:


TDMA Mobile Station Band allows selection of the desired band and signaling mode of the CMU.

Option Select selects the desired TDMA software option (communication band) for the CMU. The selected option must be installed and enabled in the CMU in order to run a test.




On Call Established contains settings to be applied to the CMU once a call to the mobile has been established. These settings allow adjustment of configuration settings used to establish a call in order to ensure the desired mobile operation during a test.

DTC MAC sets the Mobile Attenuation Code for the Data Traffic Channel to the specified value after establishing a call. This setting overrides the DTC MAC setting under the Mobile Station Signal tab once the call has been established.

Settling Time indicates how long to wait after establishing a call and setting the power control level before continuing a


265


measurement. It may also be used after changing other settings that may affect measured data.

The remaining tabs contain device specific settings grouped similar to their groupings under the CMU user interface. Refer to appropriate operations manuals for the CMU-200 for more detailed descriptions of each available setting. Note that some settings may be currently disabled, either due to lack of support in the CMU’s GPIB command set or complexity of implementation. These will be addressed when possible.

Mobile Station Signal contains settings found under the MS Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu. Settings under this tab primarily control the mobile attenuation control (MAC) level.

Base Station Signal contains settings found under the BS Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu. Settings under this tab are primarily used for setting up the initial control and traffic channels and their forward power levels.

Network contains settings found under the Network tab of the CMU-200 menu, and primarily controls the network identification and timeouts.

RF Connectors & Analyzer contains settings found under the AF/RF and Analyzer tabs of the CMU-200 menu. These settings control the I/O ports of the CMU and the range control of the RF Analyzer. These settings are critical for establishing and maintaining a call. When the RF Analyzer is in Manual mode, the RF Max Level fixes the available dynamic range of the measurement receiver. In the other RF modes, the input attenuation value for the selected RF port is used by the CMU to determine the appropriate range. Refer to Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 for more information.


14.3.2.11 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 WCDMA

This panel provides control over the settings of the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester with the WCDMA UE Signaling options. It provides access



to most available user configurable parameters for active testing of WCDMA (UMTS) mobile stations. (For the purpose of this document, the terms mobile or mobile station will be used in place of, or interchangeably with, the term user equipment (UE).) The available settings are spread across several tabbed pages and include:


WCDMA Mobile Station Band allows selection of the desired band and signaling mode of the CMU.

Option Select selects the desired WCDMA communication band for the CMU. The selected option must be installed and enabled in the CMU in order to run a test.




Channel Change Settling Time indicates how long to wait after changing the RF traffic channel before continuing a measurement.



Auto establish/re-establish call attempts to establish a call automatically as needed and continue the test without user intervention when checked. This mode is intended for test modes where the mobile will automatically answer when paged, allowing for fully automated tests without any user intervention. If the auto-establish attempt fails, the normal establish call dialog is displayed.



267



Registration channel required causes the driver to force the CMU back to the RF traffic channel specified under the Base Station Signal tab when a call is dropped, no matter what the current measurement channel.





Sensitivity contains settings for the sensitivity search algorithms and BER/BLER testing control. Settings include:



Sensitivity Threshold defines the target sensitivity levels when performing Bit or Block Error Rate (BER/BLER) measurements. All thresholds are evaluated simultaneously, so any one value that fails will cause the test to return a failing result. To restrict the pass/fail criteria to one threshold only, set the other values to 100%.

Bit Error Rate defines the target BER during the sensitivity measurement. The reported sensitivity level will have a BER less than or equal to this value. BER = Data bit errors / total number of data bits * 100%.

Block Error Rate defines the target BLER during the sensitivity measurement. The reported sensitivity level will have a BLER less than or equal to this value. BLER = Blocks with erroneous data or CRC fields / total number of blocks * 100%.

Data Block Error Rate defines the target DBLER during the sensitivity measurement. The reported sensitivity level will have a DBLER less than or equal to this value. DBLER = Blocks with erroneous data fields / total number of blocks * 100%.

Confidence Level defines the statistical confidence interval to be applied to the BER/BLER data. This controls early pass/fail behavior and ensures that enough frames are taken to determine the BER/BLER to the specified level of certainty.

Frames Per Data Point controls the required number of frames for the BER/BLER measurement.

Max Frames defines the maximum number of frames to measure for the BER/BLER measurement. BER/BLER measurements near the sensitivity threshold will require this number of frames to be measured to determine pass or fail. For absolute BER/BLER measurements (no confidence level applied) this indicates the required number of frames for the measurement.

Min Frames defines the minimum number of frames to measure. Early exit can only occur after measuring the required minimum number of frames. This parameter does not affect RBER measurements.



269



Output Channel Pwr defines the amount of time to delay after adjusting the downlink channel power. This may be necessary to account for any settling time of the CMU output channel, for settling of the mobile’s automatic gain control (AGC), or for closed loop power control to stabilize.


Max Step Size specifies the maximum step size to be used in the fast search for the sensitivity floor. This should be set as large as practical, but small enough that a single step will not push the forward power so far below sensitivity that the call is dropped. For the WCDMA option, around 4-6 dB appears to be the maximum suitable value as the sensitivity curve is extremely steep.

Fine Step Size specifies the minimum step size to be used in the fast search for the sensitivity floor, and the starting step size for the full sensitivity search. This value should be set as small as practical, but ideally, it should be large enough that the desired BER is within one fine step of the last zero BER value. Once the sensitivity floor is located, the sensitivity search then uses a binary search algorithm to divide down to the minimum step size with as few measurements as possible. For this reason, it is also recommended that this be a power of two multiple (i.e. 2, 4, 8, 16…) of the minimum step size setting, in order to maintain sensitivity as a multiple of the minimum step size.


Initial Signal Level (Max) defines the starting level for the sensitivity search. This value is also taken as the maximum sensitivity level. A sensitivity search will not be done above this level. This value is also used as the fixed downlink power level for constant power BER/BLER measurements.

Output Channel Pwr specifies the desired initial or fixed downlink power level.



Pwr Ctrl at Sense Lvl allows running the coarse search for the sensitivity level at one power control setting (i.e. Closed Loop) as defined by the "UE Transmit Power Control" TPC Pattern setting, and then switching to another power control setting (i.e. All 1) at the sensitivity level. This may be useful for preserving battery life.

TPC Pattern Type sets the mobile station power control pattern to the specified mode during BER/BLER measurements at the sensitivity level. This setting overrides the equivalent settings during the BER/BLER measurement.

14.3.2.12 Measurement Optimization Sensitivity Search Algorithm allows selecting alternate search algorithms for the sensitivity measurement in order to reduce test time. These options may not be suitable for all mobiles or configurations.

Full probing search is the default search algorithm for finding the sensitivity. During the sensitivity floor probing measurements, a BER/BLER measurement is performed with a small number of blocks at each power level to quickly determine if the level is near sensitivity.

Use RSCP to shorten probing search uses the CPICH Received Signal Code Power reported from the mobile to replace the Max Step Size portion of the probing search after the first full probing sensitivity measurement has been performed. The RSSI level at the Initial Signal Level is used to determine the approximate location of the sensitivity level and fall through to probing around that level using the fine step size. This mode is less likely to drop a call due to non-linearity of the RSCP, but is slower than using the RSCP to replace the probing search.

Use RSCP to replace probing search uses the CPICH Received Signal Code Power reported from the mobile to completely replace the probing search for the sensitivity after the first full probing sensitivity measurement has been performed. The RSCP level at the Initial Signal Level is used to determine the approximate location of the sensitivity level and immediately begin full BER/BLER measurements starting with the fine step size. This method may be prone to dropped calls if non-linearity in the RSCP curve causes the predicted sensitivity level to fall significantly below the actual sensitivity level. In this case, the RSCP Probe Bias can be


271


used to offset the predicted value to remain above sensitivity.

Use RSSI to determine sensitivity uses the Received Signal Strength Indicator from the mobile to completely replace the sensitivity measurement after the first full probing sensitivity measurement has been performed. The RSCP level at the Initial Signal Level is used to determine the approximate sensitivity level based on the relative value determined from the initial measurement. This mode can greatly reduce test time, but does so at the cost of increased measurement uncertainty. All results are dependent on the stability of the first sensitivity measurement performed and the linearity of the RSCP reporting of the mobile station. This mode is not currently acceptable for CTIA testing.

Note: For all RSCP based optimizations, the Initial Signal Level must result in an RSCP value that is within the reportable range of the RSCP scale (i.e. RSCP from -25 to -115 dBm) to provide suitable results. Otherwise, any resulting predictions based on deltas in the RSCP will be invalid.

RSCP Probe Bias specifies an offset, in number of Min Step Size increments, from the default target sensitivity level. This offset may be used to bias the target level of the probing search if needed to ensure that the sensitivity measurement always starts above the actual sensitivity level.

Probe Measurement Frames allows setting the number of frames used in the probing measurement for determining when the output channel power is near sensitivity.




User Equipment Signal contains settings found under the UE Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu. Settings under this tab primarily control the uplink behavior from the mobile to the CMU.

14.3.2.13 Signaling RF Channel Uplink specifies the uplink RF channel UARFCN (UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number). This setting is linked to the RF Channel Downlink by a fixed frequency separation determined by the selected operating band.

UE Transmit Power Control sets up the power control bit pattern and the settings for closed loop control of the power from the mobile station.

TPC Pattern Type selects the pattern to be used to control the mobile’s output power. Normally set to "All 1" to force the mobile to full power.

Base Station Signal contains settings found under the BS Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu. Settings under this tab are primarily used for setting up the initial uplink RF channel including the output power levels.

Node-B Settings control the basic behavior of the downlink channel.

RF Channel Downlink specifies the downlink RF channel UARFCN (UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number). This setting is linked to the RF Channel Uplink by a fixed frequency separation determined by the selected operating band.

Output Channel Pwr specifies the total power output from the CMU for the downlink. The code domain power of each of the individual code channels is represented relative to this number. Output power measurement results (i.e. sensitivity) are recorded based on this setting.

Level Reference controls whether the power in each of the code channels is represented relative to the primary common pilot channel (P-CPICH) power represented in dB, or the total output channel power. In either case, all measurement results are based on the total output channel power value.


273


Dedicated Channel (DCH) contains settings to configure the type of dedicated channel to be used and the associated data rates.

Dedicated Channel Type selects the basic mode of communication to the mobile. For sensitivity or BER/BLER measurements, the Reference Measurement Channel (RMC) mode must be selected.

Test Mode selected available test mode loops. For sensitivity or BER/BLER measurements, the test mode must be in Loop Mode 2.

Downlink Physical Channels contains settings to configure the code channel power for all possible downlink code channels.

P-CPICH Level specifies the primary common pilot channel power relative to the Output Channel Power. It is only visible with the level reference is set to Output Channel Power. When the level reference is set to P-CPICH, the absolute P-CPICH level is set automatically by the CMU based on the remaining physical code channels including the OCNS level.

OCNS Level specifies the Orthogonal Channel Noise Simulator relative level used to make up the difference between the sum of all of the remaining code channels and the Output Channel Power. It is only visible when the level reference is set to P-CPICH. Refer to the CMU-200 documentation for more information.

Network contains settings found under the Network tab of the CMU-200 menu, and primarily controls the network identification, mobile identification, and timeouts.

WCDMA Band Selection allows selection of the desired WCDMA band.

Operating Band selects the desired WCDMA communication band for the CMU. The selected option must be installed and enabled in the CMU in order to run a test. This control is linked to the Band Selection on the General tab.

Network Identity contains settings to identify the network to the mobile station. Consult the mobile manufacturer for appropriate settings as needed.

Default IMSI allows pre-defining the IMSI of the mobile under test. This is intended to allow connection to the mobile immediately without requiring registration.



Requested UE Data contains settings to identify the determine capabilities of the mobile station and control timeouts. The security settings must match those of the test USIM used, if enabled. Consult the mobile or USIM manufacturer for appropriate settings as needed. Refer to the CMU-200 manual for more information.

RF Connectors & Analyzer contains settings found under the AF/RF and Analyzer tabs of the CMU-200 menu. These settings control the I/O ports of the CMU and the range control of the RF Analyzer. These settings are critical for establishing and maintaining a call. When the RF Analyzer is in Manual mode, the RF Max Level fixes the available dynamic range of the measurement receiver. In the other RF modes, the input attenuation value for the selected RF port is used by the CMU to determine the appropriate range. Refer to Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 for more information. Custom settings under this menu are:

Auto Range fixes the RF Mode to Manual and uses the RF Max Level parameter as an initial RF Max Level setting. When in auto range mode, the CMU driver will perform a quick power measurement before and/or after changing certain control settings (i.e. channel changes or mobile power level changes) or performing certain measurements. If the received signal is determined to be over or under range, or too near the edge of the available dynamic range, the RF Max Level is adjusted automatically to attempt to move the received power closer to the middle of the range. Note this function is provided as a work-around to a weakness in the available instrumentation. It cannot be guaranteed that it will work in all cases. The use of a limiting amplifier is highly recommended for OTA testing to avoid the dynamic range limitations of the CMU’s receiver.

14.3.2.14 Establish Call Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 This dialog is used to establish a call to a mobile station using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester. It provides control over the registration signal, monitors signal status, and allows paging of the mobile station. The available functions include:

Control Signal On enables the CMU’s registration control signal when checked.

Signaling State displays the current signal and connection state of the CMU.


275


Page Mobile tells the CMU to page the mobile when pressed.

Cancel closes the dialog and cancels the connection attempt. Connection retries (including additional displays of the establish call dialog) may still occur, depending on the current location within a given test procedure. Pressing this button is the equivalent of pressing the button.

Abort closes the dialog with a user abort exception to force an exit of all retry loops. This is similar to pressing the Abort Test button on the menu bar.

Resume I/O is only visible when communication errors with the CMU have broken the background polling loop used to update the display. Pressing this button will attempt to re-establish normal polling operation.

Max RF Analyzer Level is only visible when the software auto ranging function is in operation. This allows manual adjustment of the RF Max Level setting as needed to allow registration or connection of the mobile.

14.3.3 Initiating a Call

Under most situations, the connection can be established either by paging from the CMU or initiating a call from the mobile. For CDMA calls, however, initiation of the call from the mobile will typically result in a voice call rather than a test call.

Start by enabling the registration signal if it is off, and wait for the mobile station to register. It can take several minutes for a mobile to register to a new mode, and proper attenuation/RF power level, network, and channel settings are required in many cases. It is often quicker to power the mobile station off and back on to force a power-on registration. Ensure that the mobile is isolated from any real network to force registration to the CMU. Toggling the control signal off and back on can also result in quicker registration and or connection in some cases. It may be possible to establish a call prior to registration, but results vary.



To initiate a call from the CMU, press the Page Mobile button and wait for the mobile to alert. Answer the mobile and place it back into test position. (Note that CDMA mobiles can auto-answer in test mode.)

To initiate a call from the mobile, dial any three numbers and press send to establish the test call. The CMU should answer automatically. Note that some test modes require the call to be established from the CMU in order to set the appropriate test mode.

Upon detection of a valid connection, the dialog will display a connect message and close automatically.

14.3.4 Aborting a Call Attempt

Closing the dialog by pressing the either the Cancel or Abort button or the close button in the upper right corner will abort the attempt to establish a call.

14.3.5 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200

This dialog provides manual control over the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester. It provides the ability to establish and monitor a call, and direct it to a desired traffic channel and power level. The available displays and functions are spread across two tabs and include:

User Interface provides the active user interface to the CMU, with the following features:

Signaling State shows the current signal and connection state of the CMU.

Traffic Channel shows and allows modification of the current traffic channel of the mobile station.

Mobile Pwr Lvl shows and allows modification of the current transmit power level setting (VMAC, DTC MAC, or PCL) of the mobile station.

Establish Call displays the establish call dialog when pressed.


277



Equipment Settings displays and sets the equipment parameters for the particular CMU option that is active. Changing to this tab downloads the settings. Changing back to the User Interface tab uploads the modified settings to the CMU. Note that the CMU cannot be in an active call for most settings to be changed. Use the context sensitive help to obtain information on the available settings under this tab.

14.3.6 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA

This dialog provides manual control over the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester with the CDMA Mobile Station option. It provides the ability to establish and monitor a call, and direct it to a desired RF channel and power control mode. The available displays and functions are spread across two tabs and include:



RF Channel shows and allows modification of the current RF channel of the mobile station.

Power Ctrl Bits shows and allows modification of the current mobile power control loop mode setting of the CMU.

Establish Call displays the establish call dialog when pressed.


Equipment Settings displays and sets the equipment parameters for the particular CMU option that is active. Changing to this tab downloads the settings. Changing back to the User Interface tab uploads the modified settings to the CMU. Note that the CMU cannot be in an active call for most settings to be changed, and that a number of settings



require the registration signal to be off as well. Use the context sensitive help to obtain information on the available settings under this tab.

14.3.7 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA 2000

This dialog provides manual control over the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester with the CDMA 2000 Mobile Station option. It provides the ability to establish and monitor a call, and direct it to a desired RF channel and power control mode. It also provides access to several basic real-time testing functions. The available displays and functions are spread across two tabs and include:


Communication Control provides access to the basic communication control required to establish and maintain a call. These functions include:

Band Selection allows switching the current operating band (option) for the given driver. This should be used in preference over the equivalent setting under the Equipment Settings tab, as this will change the band selection without attempting to update the CMU to settings from another band.



Power Ctrl Bits shows and allows modification of the current mobile power control loop mode setting of the CMU.

Establish Call displays the establish call dialog when pressed. If the driver supports auto-establishing a call and that option is selected under Equipment Settings, an auto-establish sequence will be initiated first.

Pause I/O stops the background polling loop that is used to update the display. The dialog will no longer display the current status of the CMU until the I/O loop is resumed.

Resume I/O is only visible when the user has paused the background polling loop, or when communication errors with


279


the CMU have broken the loop. Pressing this button will attempt to re-establish normal polling operation.

Measurement Power Levels control the various CDMA power levels affecting CMU measurements.

Overview provides a continuous overview measurement with the same quantities as reported by the Overview tab on the CMU.

Sensitivity allows executing a single sensitivity test point. Refer to the Equipment Parameters help under Sensitivity for more information. The available controls include:

Test Point Status reads out the status of the sensitivity measurement as it progresses.

Run Sensitivity Test initiates a sensitivity measurement. This button toggles to an abort button to cancel the test.

Last Sensitivity Value reports the actual output port power of the CMU representing the sensitivity level determined at the end of the last test. Any output port attenuation value entered into the CMU is ignored.

Equipment Settings displays and sets the equipment parameters for the particular CMU option that is active. Changing to this tab downloads the settings. Changing back to the User Interface tab uploads the modified settings to the CMU. Note that the CMU cannot be in an active call for most settings to be changed, and that a number of settings require the registration signal to be off as well. Use the context sensitive help to obtain information on the available settings under this tab, and refer to the CMU-200 documentation for more information on the available settings.

14.3.8 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 GSM

This dialog provides manual control over the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester with the GSM Mobile Station option. It provides the ability to establish and monitor a call, and direct it to a desired RF channel and forward power level. It also provides access to several basic real-time testing functions. The available displays and functions are spread across two tabs and include:








Mobile Power Lvl shows and allows modification of the current mobile transmit power level setting.



Resume I/O is only visible when the user has paused the background polling loop, or when communication errors with the CMU have broken the loop. Pressing this button will attempt to re-establish normal polling operation.

Measurement Power Levels control the various control and traffic channel power levels affecting CMU measurements.

Overview provides a continuous overview measurement with the same quantities as reported by the Overview tab on the CMU.

Receiver Quality provides a continuous readout of the receiver quality reported by both the mobile station and a continuous BER test from the CMU.




281





14.3.9 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 WCDMA

This dialog provides manual control over the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester with the WCDMA UE Signaling options. It provides the ability to establish and monitor a call, and direct it to a desired RF channel and forward power level. It also provides access to basic real-time testing functions. The available displays and functions are spread across two tabs and include:







RF Chan Dnlnk shows and allows modification of the current RF channel of the base station. It is linked to the uplink channel by the band separation of the selected band.

RF Chan Uplnk shows and allows modification of the current RF channel of the mobile station. It is linked to the downlink channel by the band separation of the selected band.

Power Ctrl Bits shows and allows modification of the current mobile power control setting of the CMU.



Resume I/O is only visible when the user has paused the background polling loop, or when communication errors with the CMU have broken the loop. Pressing this button will attempt to re-establish normal polling operation.






283



14.4 Positioners

14.4.1 ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Positioner

14.4.1.1 Positioner Ancillary Frame This panel provides control over the settings of standard positioners for each ancillary state available in the Ancillary Equipment Pane. The ancillary positioner allows setting the positioner to a desired target position at each ancillary state of the test. This is useful for obtaining position dependent information from tests that aren’t designed to have positioning capability, and for performing different single axis cuts of a pattern using multi-axis positioners.

Positioner State contains all the settings for the given ancillary state. These include: Target Position specifies the desired target position for the ancillary state. The positioner will move to this target prior to the test continuing.

Speed Setting to Target allows selection of the desired operational speed of variable speed positioners for the target seek operation. The actual speed associated with a given speed selection is dependent on the type and configuration of the positioner.



Pause Time After Seek indicates the period of time to wait, in milliseconds, after the target motion has been completed, prior to proceeding with the test process. This is intended to allow forced delays for settling of any vibration due to movement.

Override Positioner Limits If Necessary will cause the positioner to adjust the upper or lower soft limit as necessary to ensure that the target position can be reached. If this box is unchecked and the target position is not within the available range of motion of the positioner, an exception will occur and the test will abort.

14.4.1.2 Positioner Equipment Frame

This parameter frame controls the speed and motion settings for standard positioners.

Positioner Speed Settings allows selection of the desired operational speed of variable speed positioners for a number of common operational modes. The actual speed associated with a given speed selection is dependent on the type and configuration of the positioner.

Continuous Acquisition Operations selects the speed setting to be used when data will be acquired while the device is in motion. For program controlled acquisition, the slower the speed setting, the finer the available resolution. For externally triggered acquisition, the speed setting should be slow enough to insure that the test equipment triggers at the desired interval. Triggering the equipment too fast may result in missing data points and unpredictable results.

Stepped Acquisition Operations selects the speed setting to be used when data will be acquired between steps in position. Lower this setting to reduce vibration and settling time issues. Increase it to reduce the duration of each step and thus the overall test time. However, since acceleration and deceleration times may prevent reaching full speed for small step sizes, increasing the speed setting may not always shorten the test time.

Non Acquisition Operations selects the speed setting to be used for motion unrelated to data acquisition. This is the speed setting used for operations such as initialization and finalization of a test, where the positioner moves from the home position to the starting position, and from the ending position back to the home position. This would normally be


285


set to the highest speed setting to minimized test time overhead.

Positioner Settling Time provides control over the test sequence, delaying data acquisition after positioner motion. These settings are intended to allow forced delays for settling of any vibration due to movement.

Pause Time After Cont. Seek indicates the period of time to wait, in milliseconds, after a continuous acquisition operation target motion has been completed, prior to proceeding with the test process. Pause Time After Stepped Seek indicates the period of time to wait, in milliseconds, after a stepped acquisition operation target motion has been completed, prior to proceeding with the test process.

Pause Time After Non-Acq. Seek indicates the period of time to wait, in milliseconds, after a non-acquisition target motion has been completed, prior to proceeding with the test process.

Position Offset allows applying a fixed offset from the position and limit information returned from the positioner to the readings used by the test. This feature can be used to change the range of motion or position readout of a positioner without having to reset the limits or current position setting. EMQuest will treat the positioner as though all readings are offset by the requested amount.

Offset to actual positioner reading indicates the desired offset in degrees (rotational positioners) or centimeters (linear positioners).

14.4.1.3 Positioner Exercise Dialog

This dialog allows the user to manually exercise the functions of the associated positioner. The available functions will be dependent on the capabilities of the positioner. The functionality of the dialog is split between two tabs, the User Interface tab and the Equipment Settings tab. The available controls include:

User Interface provides the active user interface for controlling the positioning functions of the positioner and providing positioning feedback to the user.

The Positioner Display block provides position and limit information to the user. These displays include:



Upper Limit displays the upper limit in centimeters (linear positioners) or the clockwise limit in degrees (rotational positioners).

Current Pos displays the current position of the positioner in centimeters (linear positioners) or degrees (rotational positioners).

Lower Limit displays the lower limit in centimeters (linear positioners) or the counterclockwise limit in degrees (rotational positioners).

Inst. Vel. displays the instantaneous velocity of the positioner in centimeters per second (linear positioners) or degrees per second (rotational positioners). This value is the difference between the current position reading and the previous reading, divided by the time between readings (typically around 0.1 seconds). This term will give a more realistic value than the average velocity during acceleration and deceleration, but is somewhat unstable due to variations in communication timing between the positioner, controller, and computer.

Avg. Vel. displays the average of the last several (typically 10, or 1.0 seconds worth) instantaneous velocity readings. This term is more stable than the instantaneous velocity and provides a more accurate measure of continuous speed, but will lag the instantaneous velocity reading during acceleration, deceleration, and reversal. Together, these two velocity terms can be used to analyze the actual performance of a positioner at a given speed setting in order to determine the optimum speed setting for a continuous acquisition test.

Speed Setting displays the current speed setting selection of a variable speed positioner. The actual speed associated with a given speed selection is dependent on the type and configuration of the positioner. This control will only contain valid information on multi-speed and variable speed devices.

The Motion Control block is in the middle of the dialog, and allows direct control of the motion of the positioner, as well as providing motion direction feedback. The available motion control buttons include:


287


Up initiates motion in the up or clockwise direction until the positioner reaches the upper or clockwise limit, or until Stop is pressed. The indicator above this button will light to indicate motion in the up or clockwise direction no matter how that motion is initiated (seek, step, up, increment, or scan).

Stop stops positioner motion. The indicator above this button will light to indicate the stopped condition whenever the device is not in motion. The indicator may not immediately change to Stop when the Stop button is pressed since there may be deceleration time required before stopping. Also, the indicator will change to Stop momentarily during the reverse delay between direction changes.

Down initiates motion in the down or counterclockwise direction until the positioner reaches the lower or counterclockwise limit, or until Stop is pressed. The indicator above this button will light to indicate motion in the down or counterclockwise direction no matter how that motion is initiated (seek, step, down, decrement, or scan).

Increment initiates motion in the up or clockwise direction until the button is released or the positioner reaches the upper or clockwise limit.

Scan toggles scan mode on or off. In scan mode, the positioner will scan repeatedly between the upper/CW and lower/CCW limits. The duration of the scan depends on the scan cycle settings of the positioner (refer to the positioning controller documentation for more information). Pressing Stop will also end scan mode.

Decrement initiates motion in the down or counterclockwise direction until the button is released or the positioner reaches the lower or counterclockwise limit.

The Polarization control block is only visible for linear positioners, and only affects positioners equipped with automated polarization functionality. Selecting one of the two radio buttons will instruct the positioner to set the polarization to the Horizontal or Vertical setting. Note that there is no feedback from the positioner to indicate when the polarization is complete. The polarization indicator only indicates the setting, not the actual state of the positioner. Sufficient time should be allowed for the positioner to reach the desired polarization before proceeding with other operations.



The Seek Target control block allows the user to specify an exact target position, or a delta from the current position and instruct the positioner to move to that position.

Target allows entry of a target value for a seek operation. Press the Seek button or press Enter while in the edit field to direct the positioner to seek the target. The target must be between the upper/CW and lower/CCW limit settings of the positioner.

Step allows entry of a step value for a seek operation. Pressing the Step button (or pressing Enter while in the edit field) will cause the positioner to seek a target position equivalent to the current position plus the step value. The target must be within the limits of the positioner. Entering a positive step value will cause the positioner to step in the positive (up/CW) direction, while entering a negative value will cause the positioner to step in the negative (down/CCW) direction.

Resume Update is only visible when communication errors with the positioner have broken the background polling loop. Pressing this button will attempt to re-establish normal polling operation.

Close closes the exercise dialog.

Equipment Settings displays and sets various parameters of the positioner. Changing back to the User Interface tab uploads the modified settings to the positioner. The available Settings include:

Upper Limit displays and sets the upper limit in centimeters (linear positioners) or the clockwise limit in degrees (rotational positioners). The positioner is restricted to motion between this value and the lower limit.

Current Pos displays and sets the current position of the positioner in centimeters (linear positioners) or degrees (rotational positioners). This allows the user to adjust the settings of the positioner to reflect changes due to different IUT size/position, etc.

Lower Limit displays and sets the lower limit in centimeters (linear positioners) or the counterclockwise limit in degrees (rotational positioners). The positioner is restricted to motion between this value and the upper limit.


289


Speed Setting displays and selects the current speed setting selection of a variable speed positioner. The actual speed associated with a given speed selection is dependent on the type and configuration of the positioner. This control will only be enabled on multi-speed and variable speed devices.

Acceleration displays and sets the acceleration setting of a variable speed/variable acceleration positioner. The acceleration is represented in the number of seconds to full speed. This control will only be enabled on variable speed devices that support variable acceleration.

Position Offset allows applying a fixed offset from the position and limit information returned from the positioner to the readings used by the test. This feature can be used to change the range of motion or position readout of a positioner without having to reset the limits or current position setting. EMQuest will treat the positioner as though all readings are offset by the requested amount. Enter the desired offset in degrees (rotational positioners) or centimeters (linear positioners). Scan Cycles displays and sets the scan cycle setting of the positioner in full cycles. The value can be set in increments of half cycles (i.e. on motion from top to bottom or vice versa). A value of zero indicates infinite scan mode.

14.4.2 ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner

14.4.2.1 Ancillary Parameter Frame, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner

This panel provides control over the settings of the ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 positioners for each ancillary state available in the Ancillary Equipment Pane. The ancillary positioner allows setting the positioner to a desired target position at each ancillary state of the test. This is useful for obtaining position dependent information from tests that aren’t designed to have positioning capability, and for performing different single axis cuts of a pattern using multi-axis positioners.

Positioner State contains all the settings for the given ancillary state. These include:



Target Position specifies the desired target position for the ancillary state. The positioner will move to this target prior to the test continuing.

Speed Setting to Target allows selection of the desired operational speed of variable speed positioners for the target seek operation. The actual speed associated with a given speed selection is dependent on the type and configuration of the positioner.

Pause Time After Seek indicates the period of time to wait, in milliseconds, after the target motion has been completed, prior to proceeding with the test process. This is intended to allow forced delays for settling of any vibration due to movement.

Override Positioner Limits If Necessary will cause the positioner to adjust the upper or lower soft limit as necessary to ensure that the target position can be reached. If this box is unchecked and the target position is not within the available range of motion of the positioner, an exception will occur and the test will abort.

14.4.2.2 Configuration Settings, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner

This configuration control panel allows configuration of the interface and features of an ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 positioner. The available settings are:

Communication Configuration is used to identify and communicate with a particular instance of the selected piece of equipment. Each piece of equipment must have unique COM settings, but EMQuest can support more than one identical piece of equipment.

COM Port indicates the RS-232 serial port to use to communicate with this equipment.

Options controls the way EMQuest will configure the positioner, depending on the firmware version. These options are only supported on later versions of the 2005.

Acceleration controls the acceleration rate of the variable speed drive. This value is in machine timer units and does not have an exact correlation to a given acceleration rate. Smaller numbers produce faster acceleration. Increase this number to slow acceleration/deceleration for larger loads or if the positioner loses position during operation (indicating the stepper drive is overloaded).


291


Use Velocity Index makes newer firmware versions of the 2005 operate the same as older versions. In newer firmware, the velocity can vary in a continuous range rather than just four preset speeds. Checking this box will use preset speed settings rather than continuously variable speed settings.

14.4.2.3 Exercise Dialog, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner

This dialog allows the user to manually exercise the functions of the ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 positioner.

The top of the dialog contains the Display/Settings control block, which displays information on the current settings of the positioner and allows adjustment of those settings. These include:

Current Position displays the current position of the positioner in degrees. When the positioner is stopped, the user can enter a new setting for the current position and press the Set button to change the current position setting. This allows the user to adjust the settings of the positioner to reflect changes due to different IUT size/position, etc.

Target allows entry of a target value for a seek operation. Press the Seek button to direct the positioner to seek the target. The target must be between the CW and CCW limit settings of the positioner.

Step allows entry of a step value for a seek operation. Pressing the Step button will cause the positioner to seek a target position equivalent to the current position plus the step value. The target must be within the limits of the positioner. Entering a positive step value will cause the positioner to step in the positive (CW) direction, while entering a negative value will cause the positioner to step in the negative (CCW) direction.



CW Limit displays the upper limit clockwise limit in degrees. When the positioner is stopped, the user can enter a new setting for the limit and press the Set button to change the setting. The positioner will ignore the Set button while in motion.

CCW Limit displays the counterclockwise limit in degrees. When the positioner is stopped, the user can enter a new setting for the limit and press the Set button to change the setting. The positioner will ignore the Set button while in motion.

Speed Setting displays and selects the current speed setting selection. The actual speed associated with a given speed selection is dependent on the type and configuration of the positioner and the settings in the equipment control panel. The value can represent either one of several presets or a value in the continuous range of available speeds.

Inst. Vel. displays the instantaneous velocity of the positioner in degrees per second . This value is the difference between the current reading and the previous reading, divided by the time between readings (typically around 0.1 seconds). This term will give a more realistic value than the average velocity during acceleration and deceleration, but is somewhat unstable due to variations in communication timing between the positioner, controller, and computer.

Avg. Vel. displays the average of the last several (typically 10, or 1.0 seconds worth) instantaneous velocity readings. This term is more stable than the instantaneous velocity and provides a more accurate measure of continuous speed, but will lag the instantaneous velocity reading during acceleration, deceleration, and reversal. Together, these two velocity terms can be used to analyze the actual performance of a positioner at a given speed setting in order to determine the optimum speed setting for a continuous acquisition test.

Position Offset allows applying a fixed offset from the position and limit information returned from the positioner to the readings used by the test. This feature can be used to change the range of motion or position readout of a positioner without having to reset the limits or current position setting. EMQuest will treat the positioner as though all readings are offset by the requested amount. Enter the desired offset in degrees.


293


The Motion Control block is in the middle of the dialog, and allows direct control of the motion of the positioner, as well as providing motion direction feedback. The available motion control buttons include:

CW initiates motion in the clockwise direction until the positioner reaches the clockwise limit, or until Stop is pressed. The indicator above this button will light to indicate motion in the clockwise direction no matter how that motion is initiated (seek, step, up, increment, or scan).

Stop stops positioner motion. The indicator above this button will light to indicate the stopped condition whenever the device is not in motion. The indicator may not immediately change to Stop when the Stop button is pressed since there may be deceleration time required before stopping. Also, the indicator will change to Stop momentarily during the reverse delay between direction changes.

CCW initiates motion in the down or counterclockwise direction until the positioner reaches the counterclockwise limit, or until Stop is pressed. The indicator above this button will light to indicate motion in the counterclockwise direction no matter how that motion is initiated (seek, step, down, decrement, or scan).

Increment initiates motion in the clockwise direction until the button is released or the positioner reaches the clockwise limit.

Scan toggles scan mode on or off. In scan mode, the positioner will scan repeatedly between the CW and CCW limits. The duration of the scan depends on the scan cycle settings of the positioner (refer to the positioning controller documentation for more information). Pressing Stop will also end scan mode.

Decrement initiates motion in the counterclockwise direction until the button is released or the positioner reaches the counterclockwise limit.

Enable Current Position/Limit Changes locks out the Set buttons when unchecked to prevent accidental alteration of settings.

Resume Update is only visible when communication errors with the positioner have broken the background polling loop. Pressing this button will attempt to re-establish normal polling operation.



14.4.2.4 Equipment Parameters, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner

This parameter frame controls the speed and motion settings for the ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 positioner.

Positioner Speed Settings allows selection of the desired operational speed of variable speed positioners for a number of common operational modes. The actual speed associated with a given speed selection is dependent on the type and configuration of the positioner.

Continuous Acquisition Operations selects the speed setting to be used when data will be acquired while the device is in motion. For program controlled acquisition, the slower the speed setting, the finer the available resolution. For externally triggered acquisition, the speed setting should be slow enough to insure that the test equipment triggers at the desired interval. Triggering the equipment too fast may result in missing data points and unpredictable results.

Stepped Acquisition Operations selects the speed setting to be used when data will be acquired between steps in position. Lower this setting to reduce vibration and settling time issues. Increase it to reduce the duration of each step and thus the overall test time. However, since acceleration and deceleration times may prevent reaching full speed for small step sizes, increasing the speed setting may not always shorten the test time.

Non Acquisition Operations selects the speed setting to be used for motion unrelated to data acquisition. This is the speed setting used for operations such as initialization and finalization of a test, where the positioner moves from the home position to the starting position, and from the ending position back to the home position. This would normally be set to the highest speed setting to minimized test time overhead.

Positioner Settling Time provides control over the test sequence, delaying data acquisition after positioner motion. These settings are intended to allow forced delays for settling of any vibration due to movement.

Pause Time After Cont. Seek indicates the period of time to wait, in milliseconds, after a continuous acquisition operation target motion has been completed, prior to proceeding with the test process.


295


Pause Time After Stepped Seek indicates the period of time to wait, in milliseconds, after a stepped acquisition operation target motion has been completed, prior to proceeding with the test process.

Pause Time After Non-Acq. Seek indicates the period of time to wait, in milliseconds, after a non-acquisition target motion has been completed, prior to proceeding with the test process.

Position Offset allows applying a fixed offset from the position and limit information returned from the positioner to the readings used by the test. This feature can be used to change the range of motion or position readout of a positioner without having to reset the limits or current position setting. EMQuest will treat the positioner as though all readings are offset by the requested amount.

Offset to actual positioner reading indicates the desired offset in degrees (rotational positioners) or centimeters (linear positioners).

14.5 Power Meters

14.5.1 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz NRVD Power Meter

This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for the Rohde & Schwarz NRVD power meters. These are equipment specific parameters that are not directly related to the measurement process, but are required to properly configure the equipment in order to perform the test. These parameters include:

Measurement Settings control the configuration of the power meter and its behavior during measurements. Refer to the NRVD documentation for more details on each of these settings.

Measurement Mode selects from the available measurement modes of the NRVD. Not all power sensors support all modes.

Pulse Duty Cycle allows specifying the desired duty cycle when Pulse Power measurement mode is selected.



Filter Control controls the behavior of the sample averaging filter. The choices are to allow the NRVD to automatically adjust the filter based on power range and sensor type (see the NRVD data sheet), or to manually set the filter value.

Filter (Average) Count specifies the number of samples to average when the filter control is set to Manual.

Power Sensor Zeroing controls the zero offset correction. The choices including re-zeroing the sensor at the start of each test, using the existing zero offset, or disabling the zero correction.

Auto Range enables or disables the auto ranging function of the NRVD.

Power Range (Max) specifies the maximum expected input level when auto ranging is Off.

Sensor Settling Time specifies how long the driver should delay before initiating a measurement on the power meter. This allows thermal sensors time to react to changes in input level.

Data Point Filter controls the behavior of the Filtered Trace Point data acquisition mode, which applies pass/fail criteria on each measured data point.

Ceiling Level specifies the maximum allowed signal level for a filtered data point. Values above this level result in a measurement retry.

Floor Level specifies the minimum allowed signal level for a filtered data point. Values below this level result in a measurement retry.

Filter Retry specifies the number of times to automatically retry the measurement when one of the above filter criteria fails.


297


14.6 Network Analyzers

14.6.1 Configuration Settings, Generic Network Analyzer

This is the configuration control panel for a generic network analyzer, and assumes dual channel capability. This control panel allows the user to implement basic functionality of any GPIB based network analyzer, provided the appropriate GPIB commands are available in the equipment’s command set. The user must enter the GPIB commands for each field in order to define the necessary functionality. This driver is considered bonus technology and is not guaranteed to work in all cases. The available settings are as follows:

GPIB Configuration is used to identify and communicate with a particular instance of the selected piece of equipment. Each piece of equipment must have unique GPIB settings, but EMQuest can support more than one identical piece of equipment. Currently, EMQuest only supports the National Instruments line of GPIB interfaces.

Board Id indicates the National Instruments GPIB board number to use to communicate with this equipment. On most systems, the default of zero will be correct. However, for systems with more than one GPIB card, or with special settings in the NI drivers, select the board number that the equipment will be attached to.

GPIB Address is the primary GPIB address of the test equipment. Refer to the documentation for the equipment to determine the appropriate setting.

Timeout specifies the expected sweep time of a trace. This value is padded with an additional ten seconds when determining a sweep timeout error. This value is also used in zero span mode to specify the time scale of the acquired data.

Equipment Command Strings contains a range of fields for entering the GPIB commands necessary to control the analyzer. In general, all fields must be filled for full functionality. Any field containing a question mark (?) is automatically assumed to be a query and will be treated as such.



Equipment Initialization is the initial command sequence used to configure the device. At a minimum, it should configure the analyzer for ASCII output of data, and dual channel mode if supported. An additional initialization string is provided in the equipment parameters page to set test specific parameters such as bandwidth, number of points, etc.

Sweep initiates a sweep of the receiver(s) and waits for completion. This command should use an operation complete query (*OPC?) or similar command that will only execute upon completion of the sweep to synchronize the driver with the sweep. Otherwise, the results may be queried before completion of the sweep, resulting in unpredictable behavior.

Channel 1 switches the trace output reading to return channel one.

Channel 2 switches the trace output reading to return channel two.

Start Frequency sets the start frequency of a trace. This is just the initial command prefix, including any spacing required before the frequency value. The value in MHz will be inserted after this command, and the frequency unit will be appended to the result.

Stop Frequency sets the end frequency of a trace. This is just the initial command prefix, including any spacing required before the frequency value. The value in MHz will be inserted after this command, and the frequency unit will be appended to the result.

Frequency Unit specifies the command suffix for setting the start and stop frequency. It is appended to the command string after the frequency in MHz.

Write Operation Complete Query allows specifying an optional operation complete query to be added after all GPIB writes, in cases where a suitable query function containing a question mark does not exist for synchronizing a sweep, etc.

Points Per Trace specifies the expected number of points per trace. If needed, an appropriate command should be sent in the equipment initialization to ensure that the sweeps return this number of data points.

Return Trace is the command to read a trace for the current channel. It is always treated as a query.


299


Trace Delimiter is a hexadecimal value representing one or two ASCII characters that are used as delimiters between each field in the text string returned by the Return Trace query. The delimiters should be represented in hex as either 0xNN or 0xNNMM, where NN and MM are the hexadecimal ASCII values of the desired characters. Thus, a comma would be 0x2C, and a carriage return/linefeed pair would be 0x0D0A. Use the Character Map utility in Accessories/System Tools program group under the Windows Start menu to determine other hex representations of required characters.

Readings Skipped controls the number of trace elements to ignore between each returned value. This is provided to support instruments that return data in complex pairs.

Return Marker specifies the command to set and output the marker for all marker calls. No distinction is made between marker or max marker readings.

14.6.2 Advantest R376x Series

14.6.2.1 Configuration Settings, Advantest R376x Series This is the configuration control panel for the Advantest R376x series of vector network analyzers. The available settings are as follows:






Installed Options lists available options that are supported by the driver and may be installed in the equipment. Care should be taken not to enable options that are not installed as GPIB errors may occur which may not be detected, resulting in erroneous data.

Time domain capability indicates that the analyzer has the time domain option installed. Checking this box will allow time gating to be used.

Driver Options controls the way certain features of the analyzer are treated by the driver.

Read vector components sequentially, when checked, causes the driver to use the default data transfer sequence for reading vector information from the analyzer by transferring each component separately. The presence of this setting indicates that this driver supports an optimized measurement routine to read both vector components simultaneously and will do so by default when this box is left unchecked.

Port Definitions allows user definition of standard ports. In order to standardize the interface between the various test modules and equipment modules, EMQuest supports a standardized set of custom measurement configurations for network analyzers, beyond the standard S-Parameter settings. These are based on common two-port + reference port network analyzers, but since the R376x analyzers can have up to four S-parameter ports, the user is allowed to configure each of the standard types to be any port combination they desire. These settings will be used in place of the standard setting as required. Note that the calibration modes are still based on a given S-parameter, so calibrations may be invalid on overridden ports.

S11 is used to define the desired reflectivity S-parameter to be labeled as S11 from the available reflectivity ports. Note that calibrations for ports above S22 aren’t currently supported unless performed manually.

S12 is used to define the desired transmission S-parameter to be labeled as S12 from the available transmission paths. Note that calibrations for paths to a third or fourth port aren’t currently supported unless performed manually.



301



A/R is used to define the relative ratio measurement defined as port A divided by the reference port. This port setting is typically used for single channel tests and as channel 1 for dual channel tests.

B/R is used to define the relative ratio measurement defined as port B divided by the reference port. This port setting is typically used as channel 2 for dual channel tests.

A/B is used to define the relative ratio measurement defined as port A divided by port B.

A is used to define the absolute magnitude measurement of port A. This port setting is typically used for single channel tests and as channel 1 for dual channel tests.

B is used to define the absolute magnitude measurement of port B. This port setting is typically used as channel 2 for dual channel tests.

14.6.2.2 Equipment Parameters, Advantest R376x Series This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for the Advantest R376x series of vector network analyzers. These are equipment specific parameters that are not directly related to the measurement process, but are required to properly configure the equipment in order to perform the test. These parameters have been spread across several tabbed windows on the equipment pane, and include:

The General tab contains most of the available parameter settings for the analyzer. The available parameter groups on this tab are:

14.6.2.3 Trace Information settings, including: Smoothing Factor controls the smoothing window applied to the received trace. When enabled, the analyzer will average points from the specified percentage of the trace to generate each frequency point. This feature is useful for eliminating sharp noise spikes, etc., but may lose measurement details. To enable, select the checkbox and enter the desired smoothing factor, from 0 to 50%.



Averaging Factor controls the number of sweeps that are averaged to generate one trace. When enabled, the analyzer will measure the specified number of sweeps and display the resulting average. This function will reduce the random noise level in the resulting data. To enable, select the checkbox and enter the desired number of sweeps to average, from 1 to 999.

Points Per Trace controls the number of points measured per trace displayed or returned. Selecting more points will increase the frequency resolution, but will slow the sweep speed accordingly. Select from 3 to 1201 points per trace.

14.6.2.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including: Bandwidth Setting allows the selection of the IF bandwidth setting. Narrowing the bandwidth will drop the noise floor, but it will also increase the required sweep time. The allowed settings range from 10 to 20,000 Hz.

Manual Sweep Time allows entry of the desired sweep time in milliseconds. The sweep time cannot be set shorter than the time required based on the bandwidth setting.

Auto Couple Sweep Time, when checked, (the default) will set the sweep time based on the bandwidth setting.

Port Settings - Calibration and Measurement: There are two sets of Port Settings, one for the calibration step, and one for the measurement step. This allows the output power level or port attenuation levels to be changed between the calibration step and measurement step. This feature is useful in cases where the requirements of the measurement may cause an overload condition during the calibration, or where linearity concerns require similar insertion losses during calibration and measurement. The available settings include:

Output Power Level allows setting the source power level in dBm. The range allowed by the analyzer will be dependent on the analyzer type and installed options. It may not correspond to the total range of values provided by this control. It is up to the end user to verify the capabilities of their equipment to insure that they don’t specify a value that is outside its operating range.


303


Note that boosting the power level above the recommended output level can affect flatness and may result in non-linearity and/or harmonics in the measured signal. The user should also take care to avoid overloading the input(s) when increasing the output power.

The Calibration tab contains parameter settings related to calibration selection. These settings allow the selection of the desired analyzer calibration type, if any, prior to initiating a measurement. Prior to starting a test, the test parameter settings will be compared to those already in the analyzer, and, if they differ, the analyzer will be reset and the new parameters downloaded prior to initiating the requested calibration. The available parameter groups on this tab are:

Calibration Kit and Test Port Genders includes settings for selection of the desired calibration kit and specifying the associated genders of the test ports. The available settings include:

Calibration Kit allows selection of one of the standard calibration kits. The available standard calibration kits are: 3.5 mm, 7 mm, 50 Ohm Type N, and 75 Ohm Type N.

Port 1 allows the selection of the gender of test port 1 for calibration kits that have different calibration terms for each gender. The available selections are Male and Female. For genderless connectors, or calibration kits with the same corrections for each gender, this selection is disabled.


Channel 1 and Channel 2 allow the selection of the desired calibration type to be used for each channel of the network analyzer. For single channel tests, the second channel is ignored. For dual channel tests where one calibration will satisfy both channels (i.e. a full two-port calibration for S-parameter measurements) the second channel should be set to Manual Calibration to prevent duplicating the calibration for the second channel.



Calibration Type allows the selection of the desired calibration type. The user should take care to insure that the selected calibration method is applicable to the test measurement to be performed. Some tests may override this setting automatically, while others may provide the user the flexibility to control this setting, even though the end result may not make sense. The available calibration types include:

No Calibration skips the calibration step and insures that no calibration is enabled.

Response Short performs a frequency response calibration using a reference short, obtaining a single reference curve that subsequent sweeps are compared to.

Response Thru performs a frequency response calibration using a thru connection, obtaining a single reference curve that subsequent sweeps are compared to.

Response & Isolation obtains both a frequency response reference as describe above, and an isolation reference, which is used to bound the opposite (noise floor) end of the calibration.

Full 1-port performs a full reflectivity calibration, obtaining responses for short, open, and load standard terminations.

Full 2-Port performs a full reflectivity calibration on both ports, followed by an isolation measurement, and finally a forward and reverse response thru calibration and match. This calibration is only valid for S-parameter measurements.

Full 2-Port, Omit Isolation performs a full reflectivity calibration on both ports, followed by a forward and reverse response thru calibration and match. The isolation step is omitted. This calibration is only valid for S-parameter measurements.

Manual Calibration pauses the initialization process to allow the user to make custom calibrations and manual adjustments to parameters not supported by the driver.

The Driver Settings tab contains parameters related to driver specific settings. These settings normally refer to capabilities added to the driver to enhance the functionality of the equipment for a specific test. These may include various emulation functions and data filters. The available parameter groups on this tab are:


305


Filtered Trace Settings allows selection of the desired filter to apply to the acquired data. The current filters are primarily designed for use with spectrum analyzers, but some may apply to traces generated with a network analyzer. Refer to the Filtered Trace Settings reference for more information.


14.6.3 Agilent/HP 8510

14.6.3.1 Configuration Settings, Agilent 8510 This is the configuration control panel for the Agilent/HP 8510 and equivalent series of vector network analyzers. The available settings are as follows:




Output Power Level Range allows specifying the available range of output power levels for the network analyzer to restrict the available range that may be selected in a parameter file. Refer to the documentation included with the network analyzer to determine the valid range of settings.

Minimum is used to enter the minimum output power level to be allowed in dBm.



Maximum is used to enter the maximum output power level to be allowed in dBm.


Time Domain Capability indicates that the analyzer has the time domain option installed. Checking this box will allow time gating to be used.

Synthesized Source (Step Mode) indicates that the signal generator used with the 8510 supports step mode sweeps in addition to ramp mode sweeps. Driver Options controls the way certain features of the analyzer are treated by the driver.

Increase Sweep Timeout Period By allows adjusting for unexpected delays due to slow equipment, etc. by putting a fixed increase in the allowed sweep time. This does not affect the operation of the 8510, but just allows the driver to account for its operation by allowing more time to complete a sweep.


Absolute/Relative Port Definitions allows user definition of standard ports. In order to standardize the interface between the various test modules and equipment modules, EMQuest supports a standardized set of custom measurement configurations for network analyzers, beyond the standard S-Parameter settings. These are based on common two-port + reference port network analyzers, but since the 8510 can support a more complicated set of measurement ports, the user is allowed to configure each of the standard types to be any port combination they desire. These settings will be used to customize the USER port definitions of the 8510 as needed.


307







Numerator allows the selection of the measurement port for each port definition. The available ports are a1, a2, b1, or b2.

Denominator allows the selection of the reference port for each port definition. The available ports are a1, a2, or b1. The reference port selection is not available for the absolute magnitude port settings.

Phase Lock allows the selection of the port to phase lock the received signal(s) to. The available ports are a1, a2, or None.

Drive Port allows the selection of the main port to apply drive power to on units equipped with the S-Parameter test set. The available ports are Port 1, Port 2, or None.

14.6.3.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 8510 This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for the Agilent/HP 8510 series of vector network analyzers. These are equipment specific parameters that are not directly related to the measurement process, but are required to properly configure the equipment in order to perform the test. These parameters have been spread across several tabbed windows on the equipment pane, and include:




14.6.3.3 Trace Information Settings, including: Smoothing Factor controls the smoothing window applied to the received trace. When enabled, the analyzer will average points from the specified percentage of the trace to generate each frequency point. This feature is useful for eliminating sharp noise spikes, etc., but may lose measurement details. To enable, select the checkbox and enter the desired smoothing factor, from 0 to 20%.

Averaging Factor controls the number of sweeps or points that are averaged to generate one trace. When enabled, the analyzer will measure the specified number of sweeps or points and display the resulting average. This function will reduce the random noise level in the resulting data. The method of averaging is dependent upon the sweep type selected. In Ramp mode, the analyzer will average repeated sweeps to generate the resulting trace, while in Step mode, each data point will be measured the specified number of times before stepping to the next point. To enable, select the checkbox and enter the desired number of sweeps or points to average, from 1 to 4095.

Points Per Trace controls the number of points measured per trace displayed or returned. Selecting more points will increase the frequency resolution, but will slow the sweep speed accordingly. Select from 1, 51, 101, 201, 401, or 801 points per trace. Note: Selecting 1 point per trace will automatically put the analyzer in the single point mode, regardless of the Sweep Mode setting.

Sweep Mode allows the selection of the desired sweep mode for analyzer configurations that support more than one mode. This selection will only be visible if the Synthesized Source option is checked in the equipment configuration panel. The available choices are Ramp, which uses an analog synchronization signal between the analyzer and the signal source, and Step, which uses the system interface to step the signal source to each frequency. Ramp mode is typically faster unless a number of traces are being averaged, but frequency accuracy will suffer due to the analog sweep signal. Step mode takes longer between each step due to the digital communication required, but does not slow down much as averaging is increased since the same frequency point is measured repeatedly.


309


Auto Couple Sweep Time, when checked, (the default) will set the sweep time based on the bandwidth and frequency range.

Manual Sweep Time allows entry of the desired sweep time in milliseconds. The sweep time cannot be set shorter than the time required based on the bandwidth and sweep mode settings.


Output Power Level allows setting the source power level in dBm. The range allowed by the analyzer will be dependent on the analyzer type and installed options. It may not correspond to the total range of values provided by this control. It is up to the end user to verify the capabilities of their equipment to insure that they don’t specify a value that is outside its operating range. Note that boosting the power level above the recommended output level can affect flatness and may result in non-linearity and/or harmonics in the measured signal. The user should also take care to avoid overloading the input(s) when increasing the output power.

Port 1 Attenuation allows setting of a built in attenuator for Port 1 of the analyzer when so equipped.


Time Gate Settings allow the application of a time gate to frequency domain data if the analyzer has the time domain option installed. These settings are only available if the Time Domain Option is checked in the equipment configuration panel. The time gate can be used to remove path dependent effects from a frequency response measurement. The user must make sure that the specified gating values are valid for the requested frequency range. The Fast Fourier Transform process used by the analyzer will also introduce certain artifacts into the resulting measurements, so users should consult their equipment



documentation to become familiar with the FFT process prior to using this function. The available settings include:

Use Time Gating will setup and enable the time domain gating when checked.

Center accepts the center time position of the time gate.

Span accepts the time span of the gate.

Gate Shape allows entry of the desired gate shape. The available selections are Maximum, Minimum, Normal, and Wide. Refer to the network analyzer documentation for more information on these settings.


Calibration Kit includes settings for selection of the desired calibration kit. The available settings include:

Calibration Kit allows selection of one of the standard calibration kits. The available standard calibration kits are: Cal Kit 1, and Cal Kit 2.

Channel 1 and Channel 2 allow the selection of the desired calibration type and standard to be used for each channel of the network analyzer. For single channel tests, the second channel is ignored. For dual channel tests where one calibration will satisfy both channels (i.e. a full two-port calibration for S-parameter measurements) the second channel should be set to Manual Calibration to prevent duplicating the calibration for the second channel.




311



Response performs a single frequency response calibration, obtaining a single reference curve that subsequent sweeps are compared to. The reference can be an open, short, or thru connection.


S11 1-port performs a full reflectivity calibration, obtaining responses for short, open, and load standard terminations. This calibration is only valid if the analyzer is in S11 mode.


Full 2-Port performs a full reflectivity calibration on both ports, followed by an optional isolation measurement and finally a forward and reverse response thru calibration and match. This calibration is only valid for S-parameter measurements.

One-Path 2-Port performs a full reflectivity calibration on port 1, followed by an optional isolation measurement and finally a forward response thru calibration and match. This calibration is only valid for S-parameter measurements.

Calibration Standard allows the selection of the desired calibration standard for Response and Response & Isolation calibrations. For other calibrations, this setting is disabled. The available standards include:

Auto automatically selects an appropriate calibration standard for the specified measurement type. It selects an Open for S11 and S22, and a Thru for all others.

Short specifies the use of a standard short circuit termination.

Open specifies the use of a standard open circuit termination.

Thru specifies the use of a thru connection between transmit and receive ports.

The Driver Settings tab contains parameters related to driver specific settings. These settings normally refer to



capabilities added to the driver to enhance the functionality of the equipment for a specific test. These may include various emulation functions and data filters. The available parameter groups on this tab are:



14.6.4 Agilent/HP 872X Series





Output Power Level Range allows specifying the available range of output power levels for the network analyzer to restrict the available range that may be selected in a


313


parameter file. Refer to the documentation included with the network analyzer to determine the valid range of settings.





Equipment Revision allows control over some option variations between different versions of the 8720. This is primarily needed to eliminate certain "unsupported option" messages that may occur.

GPIB Delay allows adding additional delay between each GPIB call to address issues with older units with slower processors.

Revision A Measurement Types is only visible when the Rev A analyzer is selected. The 8720A does not support ratios and can only use S-parameters. These fields allow defining which S-parameter to use for each ratio measurement.




14.6.4.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 8720 This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for the Agilent/HP 872X series of vector network analyzers. These are equipment specific parameters that are not directly



related to the measurement process, but are required to properly configure the equipment in order to perform the test. These parameters have been spread across several tabbed windows on the equipment pane, and include:




Points Per Trace controls the number of points measured per trace displayed or returned. Selecting more points will increase the frequency resolution, but will slow the sweep speed accordingly. Select from 3, 11, 26, 51, 101, 201, 401, 801, or 1601 points per trace.

14.6.4.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including: Bandwidth Setting allows the selection of the IF bandwidth setting. Narrowing the bandwidth will drop the noise floor, but it will also increase the required sweep time. The allowed settings are 10, 30, 100, 300, 1000, and 3000 Hz.



Port Settings - Calibration and Measurement: There are two sets of Port Settings, one for the calibration step, and one for


315


the measurement step. This allows the output power level or port attenuation levels to be changed between the calibration step and measurement step. This feature is useful in cases where the requirements of the measurement may cause an overload condition during the calibration, or where linearity concerns require similar insertion losses during calibration and measurement. The available settings include:


Time Gate Settings allow the application of a time gate to frequency domain data if the analyzer has the time domain option installed. These settings are only available if the Time Domain Option is checked in the equipment configuration panel. The time gate can be used to remove path dependent effects from a frequency response measurement. The user must make sure that the specified gating values are valid for the requested frequency range. The Fast Fourier Transform process used by the analyzer will also introduce certain artifacts into the resulting measurements, so users should consult their equipment documentation to become familiar with the FFT process prior to using this function. The available settings include:





The Calibration tab contains parameter settings related to calibration selection. These settings allow the selection of the desired analyzer calibration type, if any, prior to initiating



a measurement. Prior to starting a test, the test parameter settings will be compared to those already in the analyzer, and, if they differ, the analyzer will be reset and the new parameters downloaded prior to initiating the requested calibration. The available parameter groups on this tab are:


Calibration Kit allows selection of one of the standard calibration kits. The available standard calibration kits are: 7 mm, 3.5 mm, 50 Ohm Type N, and 75 Ohm Type N.






Response performs a single frequency response calibration, obtaining a single reference curve that subsequent sweeps


317


are compared to. The reference can be an open, short, or thru connection.












The Driver Settings tab contains parameters related to driver specific settings. These settings normally refer to capabilities added to the driver to enhance the functionality of the equipment for a specific test. The may include various



emulation functions and data filters. The available parameter groups on this tab are:



14.6.5 Agilent/HP 875X Series







319



HP 85047-A Frequency Doubler indicates that the 8753 series analyzer has the frequency doubler installed and can function to 6 GHz when enabled.


Support older firmware versions causes the driver to add delay between each GPIB command to support older units with slower processors.


Output Power Level Range allows specifying the available range of output power levels for the network analyzer to restrict the available range that may be selected in a parameter file. Refer to the documentation included with the network analyzer to determine the valid range of settings.





14.6.5.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 8753 This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for the Agilent/HP 875X series of vector network analyzers. These are equipment specific parameters that are not directly related to the measurement process, but are required to properly configure the equipment in order to perform the test. These parameters have been spread across several tabbed windows on the equipment pane, and include:




Points Per Trace controls the number of points measured per trace displayed or returned. Selecting more points will increase the frequency resolution, but will slow the sweep speed accordingly. Select from 3, 11, 26, 51, 101, 201, 401, 801, or 1601 points per trace.

14.6.5.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including: Bandwidth Setting allows the selection of the IF bandwidth setting. Narrowing the bandwidth will drop the noise floor, but it will also increase the required sweep time. The allowed settings are 10, 30, 100, 300, 1000, and 3000 Hz.



321








Time Gate Settings allow the application of a time gate to frequency domain data if the analyzer has the time domain option installed. These settings are only available if the Time Domain Option is checked in the equipment configuration panel. The time gate can be used to remove path dependent effects from a frequency response measurement. The user must make sure that the specified gating values are valid for the requested frequency range. The Fast Fourier Transform process used by the analyzer will also introduce certain artifacts into the resulting measurements, so users should consult their equipment documentation to become familiar with the FFT process prior to using this function. The available settings include:









Calibration Kit allows selection of one of the standard calibration kits. The available standard calibration kits are: 7 mm, 3.5 mm, 50 Ohm Type N, and 75 Ohm Type N.





323


















The Driver Settings tab contains parameters related to driver specific settings. These settings normally refer to capabilities added to the driver to enhance the functionality of the equipment for a specific test. The may include various emulation functions and data filters. The available parameter groups on this tab are:



14.6.6 Agilent ENA Series

14.6.6.1 Configuration Parameters, Agilent ENA Series This is the configuration control panel for the Agilent ENA series of vector network analyzers. The available settings are as follows:



325






Port Definitions allows user definition of standard ports. In order to standardize the interface between the various test modules and equipment modules, EMQuest supports a standardized set of custom measurement configurations for network analyzers, beyond the standard S-Parameter settings. These are based on common two-port + reference port network analyzers, but since the ENA analyzers can have up to four S-parameter ports, the user is allowed to configure each of the standard types to be any port combination they desire. These settings will be used in place of the standard setting as required. Note that the calibration modes are still based on a given S-parameter, so calibrations may be invalid on overridden ports.












14.6.6.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent ENA Series This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for the Agilent ENA series of vector network analyzers. These are equipment specific parameters that are not directly related to the measurement process, but are required to properly configure the equipment in order to perform the test. These parameters have been spread across several tabbed windows on the equipment pane, and include:



327







Man. Sweep Time allows entry of the desired sweep time in milliseconds. The sweep time cannot be set shorter than the time required based on the bandwidth and sweep mode settings.




Attenuation allows setting of a built in attenuator(s) of the analyzer when so equipped.

Port 1 Output Pwr allows setting the source power level in dBm for output on Port 1. The range allowed by the analyzer will be dependent on the analyzer type and installed options. It may not correspond to the total range of values provided by this control.

Port 2 Output Pwr allows setting the source power level in dBm for output on Port 2. The range allowed by the analyzer will be dependent on the analyzer type and installed options. It may not correspond to the total range of values provided by this control.

It is up to the end user to verify the capabilities of their equipment to insure that they don’t specify a value that is outside its operating range.


Time Gate settings allow the application of a time gate to frequency domain data if the analyzer has the time domain option installed. These settings are only available if the Time Domain Option is checked in the equipment configuration panel. The time gate can be used to remove path dependent effects from a frequency response measurement. The user must make sure that the specified gating values are valid for the requested frequency range. The Fast Fourier Transform process used by the analyzer will also introduce certain artifacts into the resulting measurements, so users should consult their equipment documentation to become familiar with the FFT process prior to using this function. The available settings include:





329



Gate Type allows selecting between a bandpass or notch gate. The Bandpass gate removes everything outside the gate, while the notch gate removes everything inside the gated area.



Calibration Kit allows selection of one of the standard calibration kits. The driver supports numbered cal kits containing settings for male and female standards and thru connection in the standard order.



Electronic Calibration Kit allows selecting the use of an optional electronic calibration module to automate a full two port calibration.

Calibration Type allows the selection of the desired calibration type to be used for each channel of the network analyzer. For single channel tests, the second channel is ignored. For dual channel tests where one calibration will satisfy both channels (i.e. a full two-port calibration for S-



parameter measurements) the second channel should be set to Manual Calibration to prevent duplicating the calibration for the second channel.

Calibration Type for Channel x allows the selection of the desired calibration type for each channel. The user should take care to insure that the selected calibration method is applicable to the test measurement to be performed. Some tests may override this setting automatically, while others may provide the user the flexibility to control this setting, even though the end result may not make sense. The available calibration types include:


Response performs a single frequency response calibration, obtaining a single reference curve that subsequent sweeps are compared to. The reference can be an Open, Short, or Thru connection.


Full 1-port performs a full reflectivity calibration, obtaining responses for short, open, and load standard terminations. This calibration is only valid if the analyzer is in S11 or S22 mode.





331




14.6.7 Agilent PNA Series

14.6.7.1 Configuration Settings, Agilent PNA Series This is the configuration control panel for the Agilent PNA series of vector network analyzers. The available settings are as follows:







Time domain capability indicates that the analyzer has the time domain option installed. Checking this box will allow time gating to be used.

Use PNA-L options instructs the driver to account for the known differences between the PNA and PNA-L. Note: This functionality has not been tested and is unsupported. True support of the PNA-L is expected to require the introduction of a new driver option for EMQuest.



Dual Channel Mode controls the way data is acquired and recorded by the PNA.

Uncoupled Traces configures two separate channel displays similar to traditional support in older Agilent (HP) VNAs. However, in this case, the sweeps are uncoupled between the two channels, increasing test time and causing minor variations between the two sweeps.

Coupled Traces configures two traces representing the two EMQuest measurement channels on one channel display of the analyzer. This allows simultaneous sweeping of both traces when properly configured and is the preferred setting.

Measurement Reference Port allows selecting the appropriate reference signal to be used for all ratio comparisons. The choices are R1 and R2.

14.6.7.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent PNA Series This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for the Agilent PNA series of vector network analyzers. These are equipment specific parameters that are not directly related to the measurement process, but are required to properly configure the equipment in order to perform the test. These parameters have been spread across several tabbed windows on the equipment pane, and include:


333








Man. Sweep Time allows entry of the desired sweep time in milliseconds. The sweep time cannot be set shorter than the time required based on the bandwidth and sweep mode settings.

Port Settings - Calibration and Measurement: There are two sets of Port Settings, one for the calibration step, and one for the measurement step. This allows the output power level or port attenuation levels to be changed between the calibration step and measurement step. This feature is useful in cases



where the requirements of the measurement may cause an overload condition during the calibration, or where linearity concerns require similar insertion losses during calibration and measurement. The available settings include:




Time Gate settings allow the application of a time gate to frequency domain data if the analyzer has the time domain option installed. These settings are only available if the Time Domain Option is checked in the equipment configuration panel. The time gate can be used to remove path dependent effects from a frequency response measurement. The user must make sure that the specified gating values are valid for the requested frequency range. The Fast Fourier Transform process used by the analyzer will also introduce certain artifacts into the resulting measurements, so users should consult their equipment documentation to become familiar with the FFT process prior to using this function. The available settings include:






335





Calibration Kit allows selection of one of the standard calibration kits. The driver supports numbered cal kits containing settings for male and female standards and thru connection in the standard order.



Use Electronic Calibration Module allows selecting the use of an optional electronic calibration module to automate a full two port calibration.








Full 1-port performs a full reflectivity calibration, obtaining responses for short, open, and load standard terminations. This calibration is only valid if the analyzer is in S11 or S22 mode.








337






14.6.8 Rohde & Schwarz ZVC, ZVR, ZVM, ZVK Series

14.6.8.1 Configuration Settings, Rohde & Schwarz ZVC, ZVR, ZVM, ZVK Series

This is the configuration control panel for the Rohde & Schwarz ZVC/ZVCE, ZVR/ZVRE, ZVM, and ZVK series of vector network analyzers (referred to here as ZVx). The available settings are as follows:








Options B23/B24 indicates that the analyzer has the external input ports b1 and b2 and associated input attenuators installed.

Driver Options controls the way certain features of the ZVx analyzer are treated by the driver.

Preset Equipment: allows overriding the default preset (reset) functionality. By default, the device is preset whenever test parameters are different than those retrieved from the equipment. This ensures a clean default configuration of the equipment prior to setting up for the test. Some options may increase the reset period significantly, resulting in an inconvenient delay at the start of each test. This allows the user to change the preset behavior to reduce/eliminate this delay. Note, however, that eliminating the preset could result in erroneous data should certain analyzer settings be changed from their preset defaults. The available settings are as follows:

On Setup Change is the default behavior, which presets the equipment on initialization and every time the parameter settings differ from the equipment settings. This is the safest mode since it starts from a known state prior to initializing the instrument.

On Initial Setup Only will preset the equipment on the first initialization only. On subsequent changes, and as long as the driver remains in memory, the equipment will be reconfigured without presetting to a default state. Note that certain actions, such as displaying the equipment control panel, cause all drivers to be removed from memory, so the equipment will be initialized and preset again the next time it is used.


339


Never disables the equipment preset completely. The setup is always configured from whatever state the instrument is in. This mode should only be used if the user is confident that the equipment will always be in a known, valid state prior to its use by EMQuest.

Use External b1 For Port Definitions (Opt. B23) controls the behavior of the external bypass switch in the Option B23 variable input attenuator for Port 1. When checked, the driver will use the external b1 input for the port definitions listed below. Otherwise, the bypass is always disabled.

Use External b2 For Port Definitions (Opt. B24) controls the behavior of the external bypass switch in the Option B24 variable input attenuator for Port 2. When checked, the driver will use the external b2 input for the port definitions listed below. Otherwise, the bypass is always disabled.

Use Input Attenuator (Opt. B23/B24) enables the use of the optional input attenuators when checked. The installed options must indicate that these are installed.

Use Output Attenuator (Opt. B21/B22) enables the use of the optional output attenuator(s) when checked. The options must be available for the associated commands to work correctly.

Absolute/Relative Port Definitions allows user definition of standard ports. In order to standardize the interface between the various test modules and equipment modules, EMQuest supports a standardized set of custom measurement configurations for network analyzers, beyond the standard S-Parameter settings. These are based on common two-port + reference port network analyzers, but since the ZVx analyzers can support a more complicated set of measurement ports, the user is allowed to configure each of the standard types to be any port combination they desire. These settings will be used to select the specified ratios, S-parameters, or to customize the USER port definitions of the ZVx analyzer as needed.








Numerator allows the selection of the measurement port for each port definition. The available ports are b1 or b2 for ratios and a1, a2, b1, or b2 for absolute magnitude ports.


Drive Port allows the selection of the main port to apply drive power. The available ports are Port 1 or Port 2. For the available ratios, the drive port can also be set to a specific USER S-parameter definition. This allows an internal calibration to be performed on that S-parameter, as the ZVx does not support calibrating ratios directly. (For simple response calibrations, it’s typically easier to use the response correction in EMQuest.) In addition, a standard S-parameter can be substituted for the given ratio. This is beneficial for using S21 in place of one of the ratios for a given test.

14.6.8.2 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz ZVC, ZVR, ZVM, ZVK Series

This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for the Rohde & Schwarz ZVC/ZVCE, ZVR/ZVRE, ZVM, and ZVK series of vector network analyzers (referred to here as ZVx). These are equipment specific parameters that are not directly related to the measurement process, but are required to properly configure the equipment in order to perform the test. These parameters have been spread across several tabbed windows on the equipment pane, and include:



341





14.6.8.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including: Bandwidth Setting allows the selection of the IF bandwidth setting. Narrowing the bandwidth will drop the noise floor, but it will also increase the required sweep time. The allowed settings are 1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300, 1000, 3000, 10,000, and 30,000 (Max) Hz.








Port 1 Input Attenuation allows setting of the optional input attenuator for Port 1 of the analyzer if installed and enabled in the control panel.

Port 2 Input Attenuation allows setting of the optional input attenuator for Port 2 of the analyzer if installed and enabled in the control panel.

Port 1 Output Attenuation allows setting of the optional output attenuator for Port 1 of the analyzer if installed and enabled in the control panel.

Port 2 Output Attenuation allows setting of the optional output attenuator for Port 2 of the analyzer if installed and enabled in the control panel.

Time Gate allows the application of a time gate to frequency domain data if the analyzer has the time domain option installed. These settings are only available if the Time Domain Option is checked in the equipment configuration panel. The time gate can be used to remove path dependent effects from a frequency response measurement. The user must make sure that the specified gating values are valid for the requested frequency range. The Fast Fourier Transform process used by the analyzer will also introduce certain artifacts into the resulting measurements, so users should consult their equipment documentation to become familiar with the FFT process prior to using this function. The available settings include:



343





Sidelobe Suppress sets the level of additional sidelobe suppression to be applied to the gate filter.



Calibration Kit allows selection of one of the standard calibration kits. The available standard calibration kits are: PC 3.5 (3.5 mm), PC 7 (7 mm), 50 Ohm Type N, and 75 Ohm Type N / 2.92 mm (depending on ZVx version), and SMA.



Channel 1 and Channel 2 allow the selection of the desired calibration type and standard to be used for each channel of the network analyzer. For single channel tests, the second channel is ignored. For dual channel tests where one calibration will satisfy both channels (i.e. a full two-port calibration for S-parameter measurements) the second



channel should be set to Manual Calibration to prevent duplicating the calibration for the second channel.












345






Calibration Options list other options related to calibration.

Allow Calibration Interpolation allows the measurement range and number of points to vary from that used to perform the calibration. This is normally undesirable but certain firmware issues with the ZVx series may make it necessary.






14.6.9 Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, ZVT Series

14.6.9.1 Configuration Settings, Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, ZVT Series

This is the configuration control panel for the Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, and ZVT series of vector network analyzers (referred to here as ZVB). Note: This driver offers introductory support for the ZVB series of VNAs. It has had limited testing on the ZVB only. This series of equipment is new and subject to change. Support for all revisions of the ZVB series cannot be guaranteed. The available settings are as follows:






Driver Options controls the way certain features of the ZVB analyzer are treated by the driver.


347


Preset Equipment: allows overriding the default preset (reset) functionality. By default, the device is preset whenever test parameters are different than those retrieved from the equipment. This ensures a clean default configuration of the equipment prior to setting up for the test. Some options may increase the reset period significantly, resulting in an inconvenient delay at the start of each test. This allows the user to change the preset behavior to reduce/eliminate this delay. Note, however, that eliminating the preset could result in erroneous data should certain analyzer settings be changed from their preset defaults. The available settings are as follows:




Port Definitions allows user definition of standard ports. In order to standardize the interface between the various test modules and equipment modules, EMQuest supports a standardized set of custom measurement configurations for network analyzers, beyond the standard S-Parameter settings. These are based on common two-port + reference port network analyzers, but since the ZVB analyzers can support 4 or more S-Parameter ports, the user is allowed to configure each of the standard types to be any port combination they desire. These settings will be used in place of the standard setting as required. Note that the calibration modes are still based on a given S-parameter, so calibrations may be invalid on overridden ports.












Numerator allows the selection of the measurement port for each port definition. The available ports are b1 or b2 for ratios and a1, a2, b1, or b2 for absolute magnitude ports.



349


Drive Port allows the selection of the main port to apply drive power. The available ports are Port 1 or Port 2. For the available ratios, the drive port can also be set to a specific USER S-parameter definition. This allows an internal calibration to be performed on that S-parameter, as the ZVx does not support calibrating ratios directly. (For simple response calibrations, it’s typically easier to use the response correction in EMQuest.) In addition, a standard S-parameter can be substituted for the given ratio. This is beneficial for using S21 in place of one of the ratios for a given test.

14.6.9.2 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, ZVT Series

This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for the Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, and ZVT series of vector network analyzers (referred to here as ZVB). Note: This driver offers introductory support for the ZVB series of VNAs. It has had limited testing on the ZVB only. This series of equipment is new and subject to change. Support for all revisions of the ZVB series cannot be guaranteed.

These are equipment specific parameters that are not directly related to the measurement process, but are required to properly configure the equipment in order to perform the test. These parameters have been spread across several tabbed windows on the equipment pane, and include:



Averaging Factor controls the number of sweeps that are averaged to generate one trace. When enabled, the analyzer will measure the specified number of sweeps and



display the resulting average. This function will reduce the random noise level in the resulting data. To enable, select the checkbox and enter the desired number of sweeps to average, from 2 to 1000.


14.6.9.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including: Bandwidth Setting allows the selection of the IF bandwidth setting. Narrowing the bandwidth will drop the noise floor, but it will also increase the required sweep time. The allowed settings are from 1 Hz to 500 kHz.




Power Level allows setting the source power level in dBm. The range allowed by the analyzer will be dependent on the analyzer type and installed options. It may not correspond to the total range of values provided by this control. It is up to the end user to verify the capabilities of their equipment to insure that they don’t specify a value that is outside its operating range. Note that boosting the power level above the recommended output level can affect flatness and may result in non-linearity and/or harmonics in the measured signal. The user should also take care to avoid overloading the input(s) when increasing the output power.

Time Gate allows the application of a time gate to frequency domain data if the analyzer has the time domain option installed. These settings are only available if the Time


351


Domain Option is checked in the equipment configuration panel. The time gate can be used to remove path dependent effects from a frequency response measurement. The user must make sure that the specified gating values are valid for the requested frequency range. The Fast Fourier Transform process used by the analyzer will also introduce certain artifacts into the resulting measurements, so users should consult their equipment documentation to become familiar with the FFT process prior to using this function. The available settings include:





Sidelobe Suppress sets the level of additional sidelobe suppression to be applied to the gate filter.



Connector Types allows specifying the connector/port types for each port pair.

Channel 1 allows selection of the desired calibration type and standard to be used for each channel of the network analyzer. For single channel tests, the second channel is ignored. For dual channel tests where one calibration will satisfy both channels (i.e. a full two-port calibration for S-parameter measurements) the second channel should be set to Manual Calibration to prevent duplicating the calibration for the second channel.














353




14.7 Spectrum Analyzers

14.7.1 Equipment Parameters, Spectrum Analyzers

This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for most spectrum analyzers. These are equipment specific parameters that are not directly related to the measurement process, but are required to properly configure the equipment in order to perform the test. These parameters are split across several tabbed pages:

The Analyzer Settings tab contains common parameter settings of the spectrum analyzer. The available parameter groups on this tab are:

Bandwidth Settings control the resolution and video bandwidth settings of the spectrum analyzer. The available settings include:

Resolution Bandwidth allows entry of the desired RBW setting.

Video Bandwidth allows entry of the desired VBW setting.

Auto Coupled locks out the manual setting for the corresponding bandwidth setting, when checked, and allows the spectrum analyzer to set the bandwidth automatically based on the frequency span.

Amplitude Control defines attenuation and reference level settings of the spectrum analyzer. The attenuation and reference level settings are typically linked so that both must be adjusted to obtain the desired signal range. The available settings include:



Auto Attenuation uses the default attenuation setting of the spectrum analyzer.

Attenuation sets the attenuation level of the spectrum analyzer input. Increasing the attenuation will drop a received signal closer to the instrument noise floor.

Reference Level sets the reference level of the spectrum analyzer’s A/D converter. Changing this value changes the location of a given signal level in the display window. For most spectrum analyzers, the desired signal MUST stay in the visible window to obtain a valid reading.

Sweep Time controls the variable sweep time capability of the spectrum analyzer. The available settings include:

Auto Coupled locks out the manual setting for the sweep time, when checked, and allows the spectrum analyzer to set the sweep time based on the bandwidth setting. Manual sweep time control is normally only used for zero-span measurements.

The Sweep Time edit field allows setting of the desired sweep time in milliseconds when the Auto Coupled checkbox is cleared.

Triggering provides settings to control the sweep triggering of the spectrum analyzer. The available settings include:

Trigger Mode selects the desired trigger mode. The available trigger modes are:

Free Run is the default mode. The spectrum analyzer triggers immediately upon a single sweep command, and in continuous sweep mode, sweeps as fast as possible.

Video trigger mode is intended for zero-span measurements and will trigger a sweep on the rising edge of an input signal once it passes the video trigger level.

Line triggers the sweep off of the AC line.

External triggers the sweep off of an external trigger input signal.


355


Trigger Level sets the desired video trigger level. When set to video trigger mode and told to sweep, the spectrum analyzer will not start a sweep until the signal rises above the trigger level. This allows synchronizing a zero-span time based sweep with a pulsed RF signal.

Trigger Retry controls automatic retrying on trigger related failures. If a video triggered sweep times out (fails to trigger in the allotted or expected time frame), the driver will automatically retry the sweep for the requested number of attempts prior to displaying a dialog to request action from the user. This will allow for occasional "missed" trigger pulses without significantly affecting a test by requiring constant user intervention.

Trigger Offset allows moving the trigger point forward or backwards in time to move the location of the desired pulse into the middle of the window. This can also be used for complicated triggering schemes where the measured pulse is not the one that caused the trigger to occur, but rather comes before or after the pulse that caused the trigger.

Detector Selection allows selecting the desired detector setting of the spectrum analyzer. Note that not all spectrum analyzers support all detector settings, and the behavior of analyzers that do not have a particular detector option installed is undefined. Refer to the documentation for the individual spectrum analyzer for more information on each detector. The available detectors include:

Default Detector causes the driver to ignore the detector setting and use whatever setting the analyzer has at initialization or after preset.

Auto Peak Detector currently only supported on Rohde & Schwarz spectrum analyzers; this detector displays both positive and negative peaks simultaneously. The visible behavior from software (i.e. the trace transferred back to the software) is the same as the positive peak detector.

Negative Peak Detector displays the minimum level of the IF envelope in the frequency band represented by each test point.

Positive Peak Detector displays the maximum level of the IF envelope in the frequency band represented by each test point.

Sample Detector displays a single sample of the IF envelope in the frequency band represented by each test



point. Ostensibly, this value could range between that reported by the positive and negative peak detectors. RMS Detector displays the RMS value of the IF envelope in the frequency band represented by each test point. An RMS detector typically operates by recording the average of many samples represented as linear power. The sweep time, the number of points per trace, and the sample rate of the analyzer determine the number of samples taken per point.

Average Detector displays the average value of the linear IF envelope in the frequency band represented by each test point. Unlike the RMS detector, an average detector typically records the average voltage of a number of samples at each point.

Quasi-Peak Detector is a peak detector for EMI measurements with specific charge and discharge times specified in the CISPR-16 emissions standard.


Calibration/Corrections provides control of various calibration and correction features of the spectrum analyzer driver. The available settings include:

Calibration Type selects the desired software based calibration function. A Reference calibration will record a reference trace during the calibration step and subtract that reference from later measured traces. This results in a relative result similar to that from a network analyzer. Selecting No Calibration causes the spectrum analyzer to return normal magnitude traces.

Frequency Offset provides a drift correction, in MHz, for older spectrum analyzers. The input start and stop or center frequencies will be adjusted by this offset amount prior to configuring the spectrum analyzer. Note that this setting is only used for configuration and, when queried, the analyzer will return its actual frequency range, including offset, rather than the range specified in the parameter file. Traces captured from the analyzer are not corrected for the offset.


357


Filtered Trace Settings allows selection of the desired filter to apply to the acquired data. Filters perform special processing on a returned trace, typically returning a single data point representing the result of the filtered trace. The spectrum analyzer must be properly configured for the desired signal. Most filters are designed for zero-span mode with an appropriate sweep time based on the signal to be filtered. For pulsed signals (GSM, TDMA), the sweep time should be set just slightly (~10%) larger than the expected pulse size to obtain the highest resolution average measurement. For analyzers supporting a trigger offset, the desired pulse can be moved into the center of the window.

Refer to the section on Mobile Phone Testing for typical settings for different mobile phone technologies. A number of the standard filters here are compatible with the requirements of the CTIA’s Mobile Station Over-the-Air Performance Test Plan. Refer to Appendix D of the CTIA Over-the-Air Test Plan for more information. The available settings include:

Filter Select allows selection of one of the following filters:

Average performs a linear power average of the entire trace to obtain the power measurement. Set the sweep time for the spectrum analyzer to the desired dwell time to average across. This selection is suitable for power measurement of Analog/AMPS and CDMA signals as specified in V2.1 of the CTIA OTA Test Plan.

TDMA Pulse averages the center 85% of a single TDMA pulse. The spectrum analyzer should be set for video triggered mode and the measured pulse width must be within 10% of the expected 6.67 millisecond TDMA pulse width. This selection is suitable for power measurement of TDMA signals as specified in V2.1 of the CTIA OTA Test Plan.

GSM Pulse averages the center 85% of a single GSM pulse. The spectrum analyzer should be set for video triggered mode and the measured pulse width must be within 10% of the expected 0.577 millisecond GSM pulse width. This selection is suitable for power measurement of GSM signals as specified in V2.1 of the CTIA OTA Test Plan.

Peak takes the maximum value of the entire trace. Set the sweep time for the spectrum analyzer to the desired dwell time to perform the peak search across.



Arbitrary Pulse Width averages the center 85% of a single arbitrary communication pulse. The spectrum analyzer should be set for video triggered mode and the measured pulse width must be within 10% of the Filter Pulse Width in milliseconds entered into the edit box below.

Sampling Average averages the entire trace to obtain the power measurement. Set the sweep time for the spectrum analyzer to the desired dwell time to average across. This selection changes the way the Level Tolerance setting is applied, compared to the Average filter. The tolerance is applied to a running average of the data instead of each individual point. This allows following the trend of a sample detector curve rather than each individual sample, and makes this filter suitable for the one of the methods for measuring CDMA signals as specified in V2.1 of the CTIA OTA Test Plan.

Integrated Channel Power performs an integration across a specified channel bandwidth using the given resolution bandwidth to determine the power/Hz relationship for each data point. This filter is suitable for measurement of continuous broadband signals such as CDMA and WCDMA. The spectrum analyzer span will automatically be set to the specified channel bandwidth around the current center frequency. For manual/single channel tests using only the analyzer (i.e. without a hybrid), the analyzer should be configured for zero span initially.

Filter Retry specifies the number of times to automatically retry the sweep and filter process when one of the filter criteria fails.

Ceiling Level specifies the maximum allowed signal level for a filtered trace. Trace values above this level result in a sweep retry.

Floor Level specifies the minimum allowed signal level for a filtered trace. Resultant values below this level result in a sweep retry. This replaces the use of the trigger level for this purpose.

Use Floor Level for Pulse Detect uses the floor level to determine the start and end of a pulse, rather than the trigger level. This allows for more complicated trigger schemes, where the analyzer is set to trigger on a pulse that is larger than the one to be measured. This option is only available on the arbitrary pulse width filter.


359


Filter Pulse Width specifies the required width, in milliseconds, of an arbitrary pulsed signal. The measured pulse must be within 10% of this value. This control is only visible for pulse filters.

Allow Longer Pulse removes the restriction on pulse width from a +/- tolerance to only a - tolerance, allowing the pulse to be longer than the specified width. It is intended primarily for multislot measurements where there may be more than one pulse to measure and where those pulses run together.

GSM Timeslots specifies the number of GSM timeslots to use for multislot GSM pulse measurements. The expected pulse width is multiplied by the number of timeslots indicated. This option is only visible for the GSM filter.

Modul’n Envelope Check allows enabling a flatness check for the evaluated portion of the pulse. This check can be used to determine the type of pulse generated by requiring the amplitude modulation to be less than or greater than the specified envelope. This is especially necessary for EGPRS (EDGE) testing, where the mobile generates both 8PSK (EDGE) pulses and regular GMSK pulses. The 8PSK pulses have a much larger amplitude modulation that GMSK.

Modulation Envelope specifies the size of the envelope for a modulated pulse. When the modulation envelope check is enabled, pulses will be rejected if the max to min ratio is larger/smaller than this value.

Use Max Marker for Default Data Point allows disabling the default behavior of the pulse filters when a bad pulse is ignored by the user. Un-checking this box causes the default value to be returned as the trigger level or the floor level, depending on the setting of the Use Floor Level for Pulse Detect checkbox.

Ignore All Under-Range Errors is a simple optimization for the arbitrary pulse width filter when it is expected that pulses may regularly approach the noise floor. After the specified number of retries, the default value is returned.

Flatness Tolerance is visible for the average, sampling average, peak, and integrated channel power filters and is used to determine the quality of the waveform being filtered. Set the level tolerance in dB to ensure that the trace meets a minimum stability and flatness requirement. Variations outside the specified tolerance from either the median or the average (depending on the Tolerance Window setting below) will result in a sweep retry.



Tolerance Window Centered Around specifies whether to compare the Flatness Tolerance to the Midpoint or Mean (Average) of the data.

Center Flatness is used for the integrated channel power filter to allow specification of the flat region of the band being integrated. This allows for the band edge falloff at either side of the window. The flatness tolerance described above is only applied to this center portion of the trace.

Chan. Bandwidth specifies the expected bandwidth of the channel being integrated.

Filter Average provides an average function to be applied after a trace filter has been applied. The analyzer will be swept as many times as necessary to obtain the specified number of valid filtered results. The available settings include:

Filter Trace Avg Count controls the number of sweeps that are filtered and averaged to generate one result. When a value greater than one is entered, the driver will measure and filter the specified number of sweeps and return the resulting average.

Averaging provides access to trace averaging functionality of the spectrum analyzer. Note that not all spectrum analyzers support trace averaging. For those that don’t, there is a limited software averaging implementation for trace-based measurements. The available settings include:

Averaging Factor controls the number of sweeps that are averaged to generate one trace. When set greater than one, the analyzer or driver will measure the specified number of sweeps and display the resulting average. The actual number of traces allowed for averaging will depend on the particular spectrum analyzer and/or the implementation of its driver.



361


14.7.2 Configuration Settings, Agilent 85XX Spectrum Analyzers

This is the configuration control panel for the Agilent 85XX series of spectrum analyzers. The available settings are as follows:




Options allow changing the behavior of the device driver to account for various differences in revision level, installed options, and user preferences.

Use Latest Command Set uses newer commands in place of backwards-compatible commands where applicable. This feature is provided to avoid possible firmware compatibility problems should the equipment no longer support an original command. Only set this flag if the driver does not appear to work correctly as-is.

Preset Equipment: allows overriding the default preset (reset) functionality. By default, the device is preset whenever test parameters are different than those retrieved from the equipment. This insures a clean default configuration of the equipment prior to setting up for the test. Some options increase the reset period significantly, resulting in an inconvenient delay at the start of each test. This allows the user to change the preset behavior to reduce/eliminate this delay. Note, however, that eliminating the preset could result in erroneous data should certain analyzer settings be changed from their preset defaults. The available settings are as follows:






Delay after Equipment Preset: allows forcing the driver to delay for a specified period after a preset prior to sending any additional commands to the equipment. There is a known bug in the CDMA option for the Agilent spectrum analyzers that causes the analyzer to miss GPIB commands sent to it until the reset is complete. This can take as much as thirty seconds or more. The user will have to test their equipment to determine the appropriate delay period after a preset.

14.7.3 Configuration Settings, Rohde & Schwarz FSP

This is the configuration control panel for the Rohde & Schwarz FSP series of spectrum analyzers. The available settings are as follows:



363




Options allow changing the behavior of the device driver to account for various differences in revision level, installed options, and user preferences.

View Display Window in Remote Mode, when checked, will cause the FSP to show the display graticule when in remote mode. This is the default behavior of the FSP driver, although the FSP analyzer defaults to no display. Turning off the display will slightly increase the FSP’s speed of operation since the display does not need to be updated during a test.

14.7.4 Configuration Settings, Generic Spectrum Analyzer

This is the configuration control panel for a generic spectrum analyzer. This control panel allows the user to implement basic functionality of any GPIB based spectrum analyzer, provided the appropriate GPIB commands are available in the equipment’s command set. The user must enter the GPIB commands for each field in order to define the necessary functionality. This driver is considered bonus technology and is not guaranteed to work in all cases. The available settings are as follows:






Timeout specifies the expected sweep time of a trace. This value is padded with an additional ten seconds when determining a sweep timeout error. This value is also used in zero span mode to specify the time scale of the acquired data.

Equipment Command Strings contains a range of fields for entering the GPIB commands necessary to control the analyzer. In general, all fields must be filled for full functionality. Any field containing a question mark (?) is automatically assumed to be a query and will be treated as such.

Equipment Initialization is the initial command sequence used to configure the device. At a minimum, it should configure the analyzer for ASCII output of data. An additional initialization string is provided in the equipment parameters page to set test specific parameters such as bandwidth, reference level, etc.

Sweep initiates a sweep of the receiver(s) and waits for completion. This command should use an operation complete query (*OPC?) or similar command that will only execute upon completion of the sweep to synchronize the driver with the sweep. Otherwise, the results may be queried before completion of the sweep, resulting in unpredictable behavior.

Start Frequency sets the start frequency of a trace. This is just the initial command prefix, including any spacing required before the frequency value. The value in MHz will be inserted after this command, and the frequency unit will be appended to the result.

Stop Frequency sets the end frequency of a trace. This is just the initial command prefix, including any spacing required before the frequency value. The value in MHz will be inserted after this command, and the frequency unit will be appended to the result.


365


Frequency Unit specifies the command suffix for setting the start and stop frequency. It is appended to the command string after the frequency in MHz.

Write Operation Complete Query allows specifying an optional operation complete query to be added after all GPIB writes, in cases where a suitable query function containing a question mark does not exist for synchronizing a sweep, etc.

Points Per Trace specifies the expected number of points per trace. If needed, an appropriate command should be sent in the equipment initialization to ensure that the sweeps return this number of data points.

Return Trace is the command to read a trace. It is always treated as a query.

Trace Delimiter is a hexadecimal value representing one or two ASCII characters that are used as delimiters between each field in the text string returned by the Return Trace query. The delimiters should be represented in hex as either 0xNN or 0xNNMM, where NN and MM are the hexadecimal ASCII values of the desired characters. Thus, a comma would be 0x2C, and a carriage return/linefeed pair would be 0x0D0A. Use the Character Map utility in Accessories/System Tools program group under the Windows Start menu to determine other hex representations of required characters.

Readings Skipped controls the number of trace elements to ignore between each returned value. This is provided to support instruments that return data in complex pairs.

Return Marker specifies the command to set and output the marker for all marker calls. No distinction is made between marker or max marker readings.



14.8 Switches

14.8.1 Agilent 11713A Switch Driver

14.8.1.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver

This panel provides control over the settings of the Agilent 11713A Attenuator/Switch Driver outputs for each ancillary state available in the Ancillary Equipment Pane. The available settings are:

Switch Settings controls the state of the two primary switch drivers.

Switch 9 and Switch 0 controls the state of the associated primary switch drivers for the associated switch state. The available settings for each switch are:

OFF turns the corresponding switch driver output to off when the switch changes to this state.

ON turns the corresponding switch driver output to on when the switch changes to this state.

UNUSED leaves the corresponding switch driver output in its current state when the switch changes to this state. Since more than one switch instance can share the same set of switch outputs, this feature allows other instances to use the unused ports without interference. Care should be taken to avoid having two switch instances switching the same port during the same test, since there is no guarantee as to which instance will take precedence.

Switch X Settings controls the state of the switch drivers of the Attenuator X control block.

Switch 1 through Switch 4 control the state of the associated switch drivers outputs of the Attenuator X control block for the associated switch state. The available settings for each switch are:




367



Switch Y Settings controls the state of the switch drivers of the Attenuator Y control block.

Switch 5 through Switch 8 control the state of the associated switch drivers outputs of the Attenuator Y control block for the associated switch state. The available settings for each switch are:




Pause After Switching will hold the test sequence for the specified period in milliseconds after switching to the associated state. This allows for switch transition time and bounce settling.

14.8.1.2 Configuration Parameters, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver

EMQuest provides control over the state of a variety of RF relays or other switches connected to an Agilent 11713A Attenuator/Switch Driver. The RF switches can be used to route signals to and from different test equipment. This configuration control panel allows selection of the desired device and its options, as well as the number of states of the switch. The available settings are:

GPIB Configuration is used to identify and communicate with a particular instance of the selected piece of equipment. Each piece of equipment must have unique GPIB settings,



but EMQuest can support more than one identical piece of equipment. Currently, EMQuest only supports the National Instruments line of GPIB interfaces.



Switch Array controls the actual behavior of the switch, determining the number of available states.

Number of Switch Array States specifies the desired number of states for this switch. Each state will indicate a different possible configuration of all relays. The switch should be configured for the number of states (equivalent to poles of a switch) expected in use. For instance, a dual receiver/switch hybrid will require two states, one for each channel. Other applications may require more states.

Options control configuration of each of the two attenuator drivers as switch drivers. Through these options, the driver can be configured to control a variety of single/double throw or multi-position switches. The available selections are:

Use Attenuator X control as a switch enables the use of the Attenuator X driver block as switch drivers in this instance.

Use Attenuator Y control as a switch enables the use of the Attenuator Y driver block as switch drivers in this instance.

X switch positions are exclusive causes the driver to only allow one of the four Attenuator X switch driver lines to be active at a time. This is useful for safely controlling multi-pole switches that have individual relay coils for each pole of the switch.

Y switch positions are exclusive causes the driver to only allow one of the four Attenuator Y switch driver lines to be active at a time. This is useful for safely controlling multi-pole switches that have individual relay coils for each pole of the switch.


369


Use Attenuators X and Y as a single 8-position switch enables the combined use of both the Attenuator X and Attenuator Y driver blocks as exclusive switch drivers in this instance. In this mode, only one of the eight Attenuator X and Attenuator Y switch driver lines to be active at a time. This is useful for safely controlling larger (more than 4 position) multi-pole switches that have individual relay coils for each pole of the switch.

Default Switch Settings allow the definition of the initial settings of the two primary switch drivers in an initialization preset. Since the 11713A doesn’t support querying of the switch state, this section allows configuring an initial state to be used when initializing the unit. The available settings are:

Switch 9 and Switch 0 allow definition of the initial state of each of the two primary switch drivers. The choices are:

OFF sets the corresponding switch driver output to off when preset.

ON sets the corresponding switch driver output to on when preset.

UNUSED indicates that the corresponding switch driver is not used and will not be changed by the software when preset. Queries of the state of an UNUSED switch (from the exercise dialog, for example) are undefined until the switch changes state. Note that setting this value to UNUSED does not preclude using the associated driver output in a test or exercise dialog.

Default Switch X Settings allow the definition of the initial settings of the switch drivers of the Attenuator X control block in an initialization preset. Since the 11713A doesn’t support querying of the switch state, this section allows configuring an initial state to be used when initializing the unit. This block will only be visible when the "Use Attenuator X as a switch" checkbox is checked. The available settings are:

Switch 1 through Switch 4 allow definition of the initial state of each of the four switch driver outputs for the Attenuator X control block. The choices are:






Default Switch Y Settings allow the definition of the initial settings of the switch drivers of the Attenuator Y control block in an initialization preset. Since the 11713A doesn’t support querying of the switch state, this section allows configuring an initial state to be used when initializing the unit. This block will only be visible when the "Use Attenuator Y as a switch" checkbox is checked. The available settings are:

Switch 5 through Switch 8 allow definition of the initial state of each of the four switch driver outputs for the Attenuator Y control block. The choices are:




14.8.1.3 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver This panel provides control over the settings of the Agilent 11713A Attenuator/Switch Driver outputs for each state of a switch. The available settings are:

Switch Settings controls the state of the two primary switch drivers.

Switch 9 and Switch 0 controls the state of the associated primary switch drivers for the associated switch state. The available settings for each switch are:



371




Switch X Settings controls the state of the switch drivers of the Attenuator X control block.

Switch 1 through Switch 4 control the state of the associated switch drivers outputs of the Attenuator X control block for the associated switch state. The available settings for each switch are:




Switch Y Settings controls the state of the switch drivers of the Attenuator Y control block.

Switch 5 through Switch 8 control the state of the associated switch drivers outputs of the Attenuator Y control block for the associated switch state. The available settings for each switch are:



UNUSED leaves the corresponding switch driver output in its current state when the switch changes to this state. Since more than one switch instance can share the same set of



switch outputs, this feature allows other instances to use the unused ports without interference. Care should be taken to avoid having two switch instances switching the same port during the same test, since there is no guarantee as to which instance will take precedence.


14.8.1.4 Exercise Dialog, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver This dialog provides manual control over the state of the switch driver outputs on an Agilent 11713A Attenuator/Switch Driver. When used to control RF switches, the switches can be used to route signals to and from different test equipment. Note that the 11713A does not provide switch setting feedback to allow querying the state of the relays. Thus, the initial states shown by this dialog represent the last state set by the driver, rather than the guaranteed current state of the switch.

14.8.2 Agilent 3499 Switch Controller

14.8.2.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller

This panel provides control over the settings of the Agilent 3499 Switch Control Mainframe for each ancillary state available in the Ancillary Equipment Pane. The available settings will depend on which plug-in modules were selected in the configuration control panel. The available settings include:


373


Slot x - 44476A Triple SPDT Switch Module Settings control the state of each relay in a 44476A plug-in installed in the indicated slot ‘x’, for the associated switch state. There will be one of these groups for each 44476A plug-in configured in the equipment control panel. The available settings include:

Switch 00 – Switch 02 control the state of each relay for the associated switch state. The available settings for each relay are:

Norm. Closed switches the relay to the normally closed (NC) position when the switch changes to this state.

Norm. Open switches the relay to the normally open (NO) position when the switch changes to this state.

Unused leaves this relay in its current state when the switch changes to this state. Since more than one switch instance can share the same set of relays, this feature allows other instances to use the unused relays without interference. Care should be taken to avoid having two switch instances switching the same relay during the same test, since there is no guarantee as to which instance will take precedence.



14.8.2.2 Configuration Parameters, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller

EMQuest provides control over the state of a variety of RF relays in an Agilent 3499 Switch Control Mainframe. The RF switches can be used to route signals to and from different test equipment. This configuration control panel allows selection of the desired device and its options, as well as the number of states of the switch. The available settings are:







Switch Array States specifies the desired number of states for this switch. Each state will indicate a different possible configuration of all relays. The switch should be configured for the number of states (equivalent to poles of a switch) expected in use. For instance, a dual receiver/switch hybrid will require two states, one for each channel. Other applications may require more states.

Plug-In Module Selection allows selecting the plug-in relay units that are installed in the 3499 mainframe. The available selections are:

Slot 1 – Slot 9 allow specifying the plug-in for each slot of a mainframe. Note that different mainframes will have different numbers of slots and some plug-ins may physically occupy more than one slot. Unused or unavailable slots should be left marked as Unused/Unsupported. The currently supported plug-ins include:

44476A Triple SPDT RF Switch Module is a single slot module containing three single-pole, double-throw RF switches.

Refer to the Agilent documentation for more information on the capabilities of each plug-in.


375


14.8.2.3 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller This panel provides control over the settings of the Agilent 3499 Switch Control Mainframe for each state of a switch. The available settings will depend on which plug-in modules were selected in the configuration control panel. The available settings include:

Slot x - 44476A Triple SPDT Switch Module Settings control the state of each relay in a 44476A plug-in installed in the indicated slot ‘x’, for the associated switch state. There will be one of these groups for each 44476A plug-in configured in the equipment control panel. The available settings include:









14.8.2.4 Exercise Dialog, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller This dialog provides manual control over the state of the RF relays in an Agilent 3499 Switch Control Mainframe. The RF switches can be used to route signals to and from different test equipment.

The available settings will depend on which plug-in modules were selected in the configuration control panel. The available settings include:

Slot x - 44476A Triple SPDT Switch Module Settings control the state of each relay in a 44476A plug-in installed in the indicated slot ‘x’. There will be one of these groups for each 44476A plug-in configured in the equipment control panel. The available settings include:


NC switches the relay to the normally closed (NC) position.

NO switches the relay to the normally open (NO) position.

Right clicking on the dialog will bring up the pre-configured settings list, if any configurations exist. Selecting an item from the menu will set all relays to the corresponding state. Pre-configurations can be defined in the device configuration control panel.

14.8.3 ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports

14.8.3.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports

This panel provides control over the settings of the Model 2090 auxiliary ports for each ancillary state available in the Ancillary Equipment Pane. The available settings are:

Auxiliary Port Settings controls the state of each aux port for the associated switch state.

Aux Port 1-4 controls the state of the associated aux port for the associated switch state. The available settings for each port are:

OFF turns the aux port off when the switch changes to this state.


377


ON turns the aux port on when the switch changes to this state.

UNUSED leaves the aux port in its current state when the switch changes to this state. Since more than one switch instance can share the same set of aux ports, this feature allows other instances to use the unused ports without interference. Care should be taken to avoid having two switch instances switching the same port during the same test, since there is no guarantee as to which instance will take precedence.

Options lists other options available for this state.


14.8.3.2 Configuration Settings, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports

EMQuest provides control over the state of the four fiber-optic auxiliary control ports on a Model 2090 Multi-Device Controller, or the four SPDT RF switches on a Model 2090-OPT1 Multi-Device Controller. The fiber-optic auxiliary ports can be used to control a variety of simple on/off remote devices, while the RF switches can be used to route signals to and from different test equipment. This configuration control panel allows selection of the desired Model 2090 and the number of states of the switch. The available settings are:



GPIB Address is the primary GPIB address of the test equipment. The factory default addresses for the 2090 are



address 8 for device one, and 9 for device two. Note that the auxiliary ports can be controlled from either device one or device two of the 2090, so the default address is usually sufficient. Refer to the documentation for the Model 2090 for more information on determining the GPIB address if necessary.


Switch Array States specifies the desired number of states for this switch. Each state will indicate a different possible configuration of all four auxiliary ports. The switch should be configured for the number of states (equivalent to poles of a switch) expected in use. For instance, a dual receiver/switch hybrid will require two states, one for each channel. Other applications may require more states.

14.8.3.3 Equipment Parameters, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports

This panel provides control over the settings of the Model 2090 auxiliary ports for each state of a switch. The available settings are:

Auxiliary Port Settings controls the state of each aux port for the associated switch state.

Aux Port 1-4 controls the state of the associated aux port for the associated switch state. The available settings for each port are:

OFF turns the aux port off when the switch changes to this state.

ON turns the aux port on when the switch changes to this state.

UNUSED leaves the aux port in its current state when the switch changes to this state. Since more than one switch instance can share the same set of aux ports, this feature allows other instances to use the unused ports without interference. Care should be taken to avoid having two switch instances switching the same port during the same test, since there is no guarantee as to which instance will take precedence.

Pause After Switching will hold the test sequence for the specified period in milliseconds after switching to the


379


associated state. This allows for switch transition time and bounce settling.


14.8.3.4 Exercise Dialog, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports

This dialog provides manual control over the state of the four fiber-optic auxiliary control ports on a Model 2090 Multi-Device Controller, or the four SPDT RF switches on a Model 2090-OPT1 Multi-Device Controller. The fiber-optic auxiliary ports can be used to control a variety of simple on/off remote devices, while the RF switches can be used to route signals to and from different test equipment. Note that the auxiliary ports can be controlled from either device one or device two of the 2090. Also, more than one switch instance may use the same controller, providing access to all four auxiliary ports in the exercise dialog. The dialog checks the state of the ports on a regular basis, so changes made in the exercise dialog for one switch will be reflected in the display of the exercise dialog for the second device after a second or so. However, if the state has not been updated to match, toggling the state in the second dialog will always set the auxiliary port to the newly indicated state.

Auxiliary Port 1-4 controls the state of the associated aux port. Checking the box turns the aux port on and clearing it turns it off.


14.8.4 LPT Parallel Port



14.8.4.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, LPT Parallel Port Switch

This panel provides control over the settings of the LPT Parallel Port data bits for each ancillary state available in the Ancillary Equipment Pane. The available settings are:

Data Bit (Pin) Settings controls the state of each data bit for the associated switch state.

Data Bit 0-7 (Pin 2-9) controls the state of the associated data bit (connector pin) for the associated switch state. The available settings for each port are:

OFF turns the bit off (pin low) when the switch changes to this state.

ON turns the bit on (pin high) when the switch changes to this state.

UNUSED leaves the bit (pin) in its current state when the switch changes to this state. Since more than one switch instance can share the same parallel port, this feature allows other instances to use the unused bits without interference. Care should be taken to avoid having two switch instances switching the same bit during the same test, since there is no guarantee as to which instance will take precedence.



14.8.4.2 Configuration Settings, LPT Parallel Port Switch EMQuest provides control of the eight data I/O bits of a standard PC parallel line printer (LPT) port as a low cost switch controller. The 5V digital signals of the parallel port can be used to drive additional control circuitry to switch relays, change IUT settings, or perform other tasks. This configuration control panel allows selection of the desired port and number of states of the switch. The available settings are:

Parallel Port Selection is used to identify the desired LPT port for this switch.

Parallel Port selects the parallel port. The available choices are LPT1 and LPT2.


381



Switch Array States specifies the desired number of states for this switch. Each state will indicate a different possible configuration of all eight bits of the port. The switch should be configured for the number of states (equivalent to poles of a switch) expected in use. For instance, a dual receiver/switch hybrid will require two states, one for each channel. Other applications may require more states.

14.8.4.3 Equipment Parameters, LPT Parallel Port Switch This panel provides control over the settings of the LPT Parallel Port data bits for each state of a switch. The available settings are:

Data Bit (Pin) Settings controls the state of each data bit for the associated switch state.

Data Bit 0-7 (Pin 2-9) controls the state of the associated data bit (connector pin) for the associated switch state. The available settings for each port are:

OFF turns the bit off (pin low) when the switch changes to this state.

ON turns the bit on (pin high) when the switch changes to this state.

UNUSED leaves the bit (pin) in its current state when the switch changes to this state. Since more than one switch instance can share the same parallel port, this feature allows other instances to use the unused bits without interference. Care should be taken to avoid having two switch instances switching the same bit during the same test, since there is no guarantee as to which instance will take precedence.





14.8.4.4 Exercise Dialog, LPT Parallel Port Switch This dialog provides manual control over the state of the LPT Parallel Port data bits for the associated switch instance. The 5V digital signals of the parallel port can be used to drive additional control circuitry to switch relays, change IUT settings, or perform other tasks. Note that more than one switch instance may use the same parallel port, providing access to all eight bits in the exercise dialog. Changes made in the exercise dialog for one switch will not be reflected in the display of the exercise dialog for the second device until the Refresh button is pressed. However, toggling the state in the second dialog will always set the auxiliary port to the newly indicated state.

Data Bit 0-7 (Pin 2-9) controls the state of the associated data bit (connector pin). Checking the box turns the bit on (pin high) and clearing it turns it off (low).

Pressing the Refresh button will query the parallel port to obtain the current bit settings.


14.8.5 PMJ TVi9901

14.8.5.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay This panel provides control over the settings of the PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay for each ancillary state available in the Ancillary Equipment Pane. The available settings are:

RF Relay One Settings controls the state of each position (bit) of relay one for the associated switch state.

Position 1-6 controls the state of the associated position for the associated switch state. The available settings for each position are:

OPEN turns the drive for this position off when the switch changes to this state.

CLOSE turns the drive for this position on when the switch changes to this state. If the switch has been configured as


383


an exclusive position relay (i.e. a SP6T switch) then only one of the available positions can be closed at any time. For a matrix switch, the relay should be configured non-exclusive to allow more than one position closed at the same time.

UNUSED leaves the drive for this position in its current state when the switch changes to this state. Since more than one switch instance can share the same set of relays, this feature allows other instances to use the unused relays without interference. Care should be taken to avoid having two switch instances switching the same relay during the same test, since there is no guarantee as to which instance will take precedence.

RF Relay Two Settings controls the state of each position (bit) of relay two for the associated switch state.



CLOSE turns the drive for this position on when the switch changes to this state. If the switch has been configured as an exclusive position relay (i.e. a SP6T switch) then only one of the available positions can be closed at any time. For a matrix switch, the relay should be configured non-exclusive to allow more than one position closed at the same time.






14.8.5.2 Configuration Parameters, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay EMQuest provides control over the state of the two RF relays on a PMJ TVI9901 GPIB RF Relay Unit. The RF switches can be used to route signals to and from different test equipment. This configuration control panel allows selection of the desired device and its options, as well as the number of states of the switch. The available settings are:





Switch Array States specifies the desired number of states for this switch. Each state will indicate a different possible configuration of both relays. The switch should be configured for the number of states (equivalent to poles of a switch) expected in use. For instance, a dual receiver/switch hybrid will require two states, one for each channel. Other applications may require more states.

Options allows control over additional features of the switch driver.

Preset Switch controls behavior on initialization of the switch driver. The TVI9901 does not allow querying of the actual state of the switch settings, so a reset command can be used to return the switch to a known state before configuration. Otherwise, switch positions with Unused bit settings may result in invalid states.

On Initial Setup presets the switch the first time the switch driver is used in an EMQuest session.


385


Never never presets the switch, leaving it in whatever state it was originally upon initialization.

Relay positions are exclusive for: allows control of the behavior of the relay drive bits to support different switch types. Most relays (SP4T and SP6T) should be set to exclusive mode, but matrix relays, which allow connecting any port to any other port, must be able to close two positions simultaneously to make the connection.

None causes both relays to allow any bit to be set (matrix mode).

Relay One Only places relay one in exclusive (single pole) mode and relay two in matrix mode.

Relay Two Only places relay two in exclusive (single pole) mode and relay one in matrix mode.

Both Relay One and Relay Two places both relays in exclusive (single pole) mode.

14.8.5.3 Equipment Parameters, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay This panel provides control over the settings of the PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay for each state of a switch. The available settings are:

RF Relay One Settings controls the state of each position (bit) of relay one for the associated switch state.




UNUSED leaves the drive for this position in its current state when the switch changes to this state. Since more than one switch instance can share the same set of relays, this feature allows other instances to use the unused relays without interference. Care should be taken to avoid having two switch instances switching the same relay during the



same test, since there is no guarantee as to which instance will take precedence.

RF Relay Two Settings controls the state of each position (bit) of relay two for the associated switch state.








387


14.8.5.4 Exercise Dialog, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay This dialog provides manual control over the state of the two RF relays on a PMJ TVi9901 GPIB RF Relay Unit. The RF switches can be used to route signals to and from different test equipment. Note that the TVi9901 does not provide switch setting feedback to allow querying the state of the relays. Thus, the initial states shown by this dialog represent the last state set by the driver, rather than the guaranteed current state of the switch.

RF Relay One controls the state of each position (bit) of relay one.

Position 1-6 controls the state of the associated switch position. Checking the box will close the contact for that position. If the relay is configured as an exclusive relay, the contacts for the remaining positions will be opened.

RF Relay Two controls the state of each position (bit) of relay two.

Position 1-6 controls the state of the associated switch position. Checking the box will close the contact for that position. If the relay is configured as an exclusive relay, the contacts for the remaining positions will be opened.

Reset sends a reset command to the TVi9901, opening all switch positions.

Close closes the dialog.




14.8.6 Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP

14.8.6.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform

This panel provides control over the settings of the Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform for each ancillary state available in the Ancillary Equipment Pane. The available settings will depend on which plug-in modules were selected in the configuration control panel. The available settings include:

RSP-EMI Plug-in tab controls the state of each relay in an RSP-EMI plug-in for the associated switch state. This tab will only be visible if the RSP-EMI plug-in was enabled in the equipment control panel. The RSP-EMI Relay Settings include:

K20-K25 control the state of each relay for the associated switch state. The available settings for each relay are:




RSP-EMS Plug-in tab control the state of each relay in an RSP-EMS plug-in for the associated switch state. This tab will only be visible if the RSP-EMS plug-in was enabled in the equipment control panel. The RSP-EMS Relay Settings include:

K1-K7 and K10-K13 control the state of each relay for the associated switch state. The available settings for each relay are:




389



RSP-BRF Plug-in tab control the state of each relay in an RSP-BRF plug-in for the associated switch state. This tab will only be visible if the RSP-BRF plug-in was enabled in the equipment control panel. The RSP-BRF Relay Settings include:


Position 1-6 switches the relay to the selected position when the switch changes to this state.




14.8.6.2 Configuration Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform

EMQuest provides control over the state of a variety of RF relays on a Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform. The RF switches can be used to route signals to and from different test equipment. This configuration control panel allows selection of the desired device and its options, as well as the number of states of the switch. The available settings are:

GPIB Configuration is used to identify and communicate with a particular instance of the selected piece of equipment. Each piece of equipment must have unique GPIB settings, but EMQuest can support more than one identical piece of



equipment. Currently, EMQuest only supports the National Instruments line of GPIB interfaces.



TS-USM Address sets the address for the TS-USM Universal Switch Matrix, which is a plug-in relay driver and I/O board. It controls the functionality of all relay plug-ins. Refer to the documentation on the TS-RSP for more information.

GPIB Delay allows insertion of a communication delay between calls to the TS-RSP. The TS-RSP does not respond to multiple GPIB commands in rapid succession, and does not provide a mechanism for querying switch state or operation complete. Thus, to ensure proper operation, a delay is required between subsequent commands to the switch. The default setting of 30 mS appears to be sufficient for the units tested. The user should take care to do additional diagnostics before reducing this value.


Switch Array States specifies the desired number of states for this switch. Each state will indicate a different possible configuration of all relays. The switch should be configured for the number of states (equivalent to poles of a switch) expected in use. For instance, a dual receiver/switch hybrid will require two states, one for each channel. Other applications may require more states.

Options allows control over additional features of the switch driver.


391


Preset Switch controls behavior on initialization of the switch driver. The TS-RSP does not allow querying of the actual state of the switch settings, so the driver supports an option to return the switch to a known state before configuration. Otherwise, switch positions with Unused bit settings may result in invalid states.

On Initial Setup presets the switch the first time the switch driver is used in an EMQuest session.

Always presets the switch every time the driver is initialized (i.e. at the start of every test).

Installed Relay Plug-in Options allows selecting the plug-in relay units that are installed in the TS-RSP. The available selections are:

RSP-EMI Plug-in, which, when checked, enables the tab for the RSP-EMI relay plug-in. The standard RSP-EMI contains four DC-18 GHz SPDT RF relays and two DC-40 GHz SPDT RF relays.

RSP-EMS Plug-in, which, when checked, enables the tab for the RSP-EMS relay plug-in. The standard RSP-EMS contains seven DC-12 GHz (or optional DC-18 GHz) SPDT RF relays and four optional DC-12.4 GHz SPDT RF power relays. This plug-in cannot be enabled if the RSP-BRF is enabled.

RSP-BRF Plug-In, which, when checked, enables the tab for the RSP-BRF relay plug-in. The standard RSP-BRF contains four DC-18 GHz SP6T RF relays. This plug-in cannot be enabled if the RSP-EMS is enabled.

The Initial Relay Settings tabs allow the definition of the initial settings of the relays in an initialization preset. Since the TS-RSP doesn’t support querying of the relay state, this section allows configuring an initial state to be used when initializing the unit. The available tabs are:

RSP-EMI Plug-in tab contains the Initial RSP-EMI Relay Settings. They are:

K20-K25 control the initial state of each relay at preset. The available settings for each relay are:

NC switches the relay to the normally closed (NC) position when preset.

NO switches the relay to the normally open (NO) position when preset.



RSP-EMS Plug-in tab contains the Initial RSP-EMS Relay Settings. They are:

K1-K7 and K10-K13 control the initial state of each relay at preset. The available settings for each relay are:

NC switches the relay to the normally closed (NC) position when preset.

NO switches the relay to the normally open (NO) position when preset.

RSP-BRF Plug-in tab contains the Initial RSP-BRF Relay Settings. They are:

K30-K33 control the state of each relay at preset. The available settings for each relay are:

Position 1-6 switches the relay to the selected position when preset.

14.8.6.3 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform

This panel provides control over the settings of the Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform for each state of a switch. The available settings will depend on which plug-in modules were selected in the configuration control panel. The available settings include:

RSP-EMI Plug-in tab controls the state of each relay in an RSP-EMI plug-in for the associated switch state. This tab will only be visible if the RSP-EMI plug-in was enabled in the equipment control panel. The RSP-EMI Relay Settings include:






393


RSP-EMS Plug-in tab control the state of each relay in an RSP-EMS plug-in for the associated switch state. This tab will only be visible if the RSP-EMS plug-in was enabled in the equipment control panel. The RSP-EMS Relay Settings include:

K1-K7 and K10-K13 control the state of each relay for the associated switch state. The available settings for each relay are:




RSP-BRF Plug-in tab control the state of each relay in an RSP-BRF plug-in for the associated switch state. This tab will only be visible if the RSP-BRF plug-in was enabled in the equipment control panel. The RSP-BRF Relay Settings include:


Position 1-6 switches the relay to the selected position when the switch changes to this state.



Right clicking on the pane will bring up the pre-configured settings list, if any configurations exist. Selecting an item from the menu will copy all settings from the pre-defined



configuration. Pre-configurations can be defined in the device configuration control panel.

14.8.6.4 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform

This dialog provides manual control over the state of the RF relays on a Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System. The RF switches can be used to route signals to and from different test equipment. Note that the TS-RSP does not provide switch setting feedback to allow querying the state of the relays. Thus, the initial states shown by this dialog represent the last state set by the driver, rather than the guaranteed current state of the switch.

The available settings will depend on which plug-in modules were selected in the configuration control panel. The available settings include:

RSP-EMI Relay Settings group controls the state of each relay in an RSP-EMI plug-in. This group will only be visible if the RSP-EMI plug-in was enabled in the equipment control panel. The settings include:

K20-K25 control the state of each relay. The available settings for each relay are:



RSP-EMS Relay Settings group controls the state of each relay in an RSP-EMS plug-in. This group will only be visible if the RSP-EMS plug-in was enabled in the equipment control panel. The settings include:

K1-K7 and K10-K13 control the state of each relay. The available settings for each relay are:



RSP-BRF Relay Settings group controls the state of each relay in an RSP-BRF plug-in. This group will only be visible if the RSP-BRF plug-in was enabled in the equipment control panel. The settings include:

K30-K33 control the state of each relay. The available settings for each relay are:

Position 1-6 switches the relay to the selected position.


395



14.9 Throughput Testers

14.9.1 Equipment Parameters, NetIQ Chariot

This panel contains settings for the Chariot API driver for NetIQ’s Chariot throughput testing software. This driver is designed to work with the API for a specific version of Chariot and may not be compatible with the API for other versions. These settings define the configuration parameters used to control Chariot in setting up the endpoints and establishing a throughput test to measure throughput vs. time. There are also settings to control the behavior of the throughput vs. attenuation hybrid. The Measurement Settings include:

IP Address For Endpoint 1 specifies the IP address of the computer to be identified to Chariot as Endpoint 1. This could be the IUT or some other computer with the Chariot endpoint software on the network. The combination of the choice of endpoints and the direction specified in the Chariot script will determine whether throughput is being tested to or from the IUT.

IP Address For Endpoint 2 specifies the IP address of the computer to be identified to Chariot as Endpoint 2. This could be the IUT or some other computer with the Chariot endpoint software on the network, but should be different from Endpoint 1. The combination of the choice of endpoints and the direction specified in the Chariot script will determine whether throughput is being tested to or from the IUT.

Network Protocol specifies the desired network protocol (TCP, IPX, etc.) to use for the throughput test. This list contains all modes supported by Chariot, which may or may not be supported by the given endpoints.

Chariot Script or Test specifies the script or pre-configured test to perform in Chariot to generate a throughput vs. time curve for parsing by the driver.



Out Of Tolerance Data Path specifies a storage location for throughput vs. time sweeps not meeting the tolerance requirements specified below.

End Trace When Throughput Falls Below is used by the throughput vs. attenuation hybrid to determine when to stop recording a throughput vs. attenuation trace. When the average throughput of any throughput vs. time sweep falls below the specified level, the trace will end at that attenuation level, whether or not that’s the maximum attenuation level specified for the trace.

Throughput Variation Tolerance is used to determine the quality of an individual throughput vs. time sweep. This setting attempts to ensure a stable throughput measurement by controlling how constant the throughput sweep must be over time. Deviations from the average by more than this tolerance value for longer than the specified window will cause a retry on the throughput sweep. Minimum Time Within Tolerance is used as a qualifier to the throughput variation tolerance. When set to 100%, all throughput points must be within the tolerance window. When set to 0%, any amount of variation is allowed. At 50%, as many as half of the measured throughput transactions may be outside the specified tolerance. Automatic Retry Attempts specifies the number of times to retry a throughput vs. time sweep in the event of a tolerance error or measurement timeout.

Chariot Measurement Timeout Period specifies the amount of time to wait for a throughput vs. time sweep to be completed by Chariot. This setting is used to detect when the connection is lost or the throughput falls below some expected level.

Network Reconnection Delay specifies the amount of time to wait before attempting to re-establish communication with the remote server in the event of a loss of communication.

14.9.2 Equipment Parameters, EMQuest Windows Sockets Client

This panel contains settings for the EMQuest Windows Sockets Client provided with the EMQ-105 Network Throughput Test Package. These settings define the link between the computer running EMQuest and the remote


397


server application used to generate the traffic and measure the throughput. There are also settings to control the behavior of the throughput vs. attenuation hybrid. The Measurement Settings include:

IP Address of Instrument Under Test specifies the IP address of the computer hosting the EMQuest remote server application. This allows the EMQuest client to connect to the remote computer and test the throughput of the path between that and the EMQuest client.

Configure IUT Endpoint As determines which link direction will be evaluated with the data transfer.

Receiver sets the instrument under test to act as the receiver for the throughput test data. Data will be transmitted from the EMQuest throughput driver to the test endpoint server on the IUT.

Sender sets the instrument under test to act as the source for the throughput test data. Data will be transmitted from the test endpoint server on the IUT to the EMQuest throughput driver.

Measurement Mode specifies how the duration of a throughput vs. time sweep is determined.

Total Size indicates that throughput data will be measured until a specified amount of data has been transferred.

Total Time indicates that throughput data will be measured until a sweep time limit is exceeded.

Number of Transactions specifies the total number of transactions (individual throughput measurements) to be made for each throughput vs. time sweep when in Total Size mode. The total amount of data sent will be the transaction size times the number of transactions, plus whatever overhead is involved in the TCP/IP communication. Throughput data will be taken for the specified number of transactions, however long that takes.

Sweep Time specifies the minimum amount of time to spend measuring throughput data when in Total Time mode. Throughput data will be taken for at least the specified time period, but may be as much as one transaction (individual throughput measurement) period longer than the specified sweep time. The total amount of data sent will vary based on the actual throughput rate vs. the time specified.

Transaction Size specifies the desired size of each block of data sent to or from the remote server. The amount of time



required to send a transaction is measured and used to convert (data sent)/(time taken) to the throughput of that transaction.

Send/Receive Buffer Size provides additional granularity to each throughput transaction. The buffer size defines the amount of data to be sent in a single send operation of the TCP/IP stack. (Note that the TCP/IP stack may still subdivide the data further at the packet level). This allows simulation of a more interactive communication process, where application level data is sent in small blocks rather than one large chunk. Setting the buffer size equal or larger than the transaction size will cause the transaction data to be sent all at one time.

End Trace When Throughput Falls Below is used by the throughput vs. attenuation hybrid to determine when to stop recording a throughput vs. attenuation trace. When the average throughput of any throughput vs. time sweep falls below the specified level, the trace will end at that attenuation level, whether or not that’s the maximum attenuation level specified for the trace.

Throughput Variation Tolerance is used to determine the quality of an individual throughput vs. time sweep. This setting attempts to ensure a stable throughput measurement by controlling how constant the throughput sweep must be over time. Deviations from the average by more than this tolerance value for longer than the specified window will cause a retry on the throughput sweep. Minimum Time Within Tolerance is used as a qualifier to the throughput variation tolerance. When set to 100%, all throughput points must be within the tolerance window. When set to 0%, any amount of variation is allowed. At 50%, as many as half of the measured throughput transactions may be outside the specified tolerance. Automatic Retry Attempts specifies the number of times to retry a throughput vs. time sweep in the event of a tolerance error or measurement timeout.

Measurement Timeout Period specifies the amount of time to wait for a throughput vs. time sweep to complete. In Total Time mode, this value must be set larger than the Sweep Time setting by at least one transaction period. In Total Size mode, this setting is used to detect when the connection is lost or the throughput falls below some expected level.


399


Network Reconnection Delay specifies the amount of time to wait before attempting to re-establish communication with the remote server in the event of a loss of communication.

14.10 Variable Attenuators

14.10.1 Configuration Parameters, Agilent 11713A Variable Attenuator

EMQuest provides separate control over the state of each attenuator channel of an Agilent 11713A Attenuator Driver connected to a variety of available variable RF attenuators. This configuration control panel allows selection of the desired channel of a given device and specifying the attenuator type that is connected. The available settings are:




Attenuator Selection defines which channel of the 11713A will be configured for this device driver. The available selections of Attenuator X or Attenuator Y match the indications on the front and back panels of the 11713A.

Attenuator Configuration allows specification of the type of attenuator module attached to the specified channel of the 11713A. The available attenuators are defined by attenuation range and number of switch sections included in the attenuator. The available attenuator types and corresponding model numbers are listed.



14.10.2 Equipment Parameters, Variable Attenuator

This panel contains settings for a variable attenuator driver. These settings define the range control used for a measurement value vs. attenuation data acquisition process. The available settings include:

RF Attenuation Range Settings controls the behavior of a measurement vs. attenuation data acquisition:

Attenuation Start specifies the starting value of the attenuation. Each data acquisition loop starts with the attenuation set to this value.

Attenuation Step specifies the attenuation step size to add at each measurement step.

Attenuation End specifies the ending value of the attenuation. When the attenuation reaches this level, the sweep completes or switches to a fine step search mode.

Attenuation Fine Step specifies an alternate step size to used for a fine search. This setting is primarily used to fill in between attenuation values in a controlled search process.

Settling Time allows entering a delay time to be applied after every change in the attenuation before proceeding to a measurement step.


401


14.10.3 Exercise Dialog, Variable Attenuator

This dialog provides manual control over a standard variable attenuator. It allows setting the fixed attenuation level of the attenuator from the available range of settings. Simply select the desired attenuation level from the Attenuation combobox.

14.11 Hybrids

14.11.1 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Dual Receivers

A Dual Receiver Hybrid combines two identical or different receivers with similar capabilities into one dual-channel receiver. This capability is typically used to satisfy the dual channel requirements for dual polarized measurements.

The equipment parameters frame for a hybrid contains a number of tabbed pages for selecting and setting parameters of the equipment making up the hybrid, as well as any hybrid specific settings. These pages include the following:

The Hybrid Equipment Select tab of the parameter page allows the selection of the two receivers required to create the hybrid. The available settings are:

Channel 1 selects the receiver to use as channel 1 of the dual receiver hybrid.


The remaining tabs are Equipment Parameter tabs that are labeled for each selected piece of equipment and contain the equipment parameter frames for each device. Use the context sensitive help on each page to obtain more information about that particular component of the hybrid.



14.11.2 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Positioner and Switch

A Positioner/Switch Hybrid allows automated switching to different switch states as a function of position. As the positioner is monitored, the current position is compared to a range of values corresponding to different switch states and the appropriate state is set.


The Hybrid Equipment Select tab of the parameter page allows the selection of the positioner and switch required to create the hybrid. The available settings are:

Positioner selects the positioner to use for the hybrid.

Switch selects the switch driver to make dependent on the positioner location.

The Switch Positioner Range Settings tab allows configuring the desired ranges of the positioner location that will select a specific switch state. It contains a State Range Selection table that allows entry of Start and End positions for each range as well as an associated State for that range. State 1 is the default state for all undefined segments of the positioner’s range of motion.


14.11.3 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Receiver and Switch

A Receiver/Switch Hybrid provides a dual-channel receiver by using a single receiver and an RF switch to create two signal channels. While less costly than a dual receiver hybrid, it can be significantly slower since all measurements must be performed sequentially, and settling time must be allowed between channel switching.


403



The Hybrid Equipment Select tab of the parameter page allows the selection of the receiver and switch required to create the hybrid. The available settings are:

Network/Spectrum Analyzer selects the receiver to use for the dual receiver hybrid.

Switch selects the RF switch driver to use to switch the receiver between two input channels.


14.11.4 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Communication Tester and Receiver

A Communication Tester/Receiver Hybrid provides the capability of acquiring frequency dependent transmitted power from a wireless device. It controls maintenance of the call by the communication tester/base station simulator and tracking the traffic channel and receiver to each requested frequency to create a single frequency dependent trace. For spectrum analyzers, each frequency point is measured using a filtered trace with one of the available trace filters that can be set in the spectrum analyzer driver. This hybrid can be used anywhere a single channel receiver/analyzer can be used.


The Hybrid Equipment Select tab of the parameter page allows the selection of the receiver and communication tester required to create the hybrid. The available settings are:



Spectrum Analyzer selects the receiver to use for the dual receiver hybrid.

Communication Tester selects the RF communication tester (base station simulator) to use to establish and maintain communication with the wireless device under test.


14.11.5 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Communication Tester and Dual Receivers

A Communication Tester/Dual Receiver Hybrid provides the capability of acquiring dual channel frequency dependent transmitted power from a wireless device. It uses the functionality of a Hybrid Dual Receivers driver to combine two similar receivers into one dual channel device that is synchronized with a communication tester. It controls maintenance of the call by the communication tester/base station simulator and tracking the traffic channel and receiver to each requested frequency to create a single frequency dependent trace. For spectrum analyzers, each frequency point is measured using a filtered trace with one of the available trace filters that can be set in the spectrum analyzer driver. This hybrid can be used anywhere a dual channel receiver/analyzer can be used.


The Hybrid Equipment Select tab of the parameter page allows the selection of the receivers and communication tester required to create the hybrid. The available settings are:

Spectrum Analyzer selects the receiver to use for the dual receiver hybrid.

Switch selects the RF switch driver to use to switch the receiver between two input channels.


405




14.11.6 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Communication Tester, Receiver, and Switch

A Communication Tester/Receiver/Switch Hybrid provides the capability of acquiring dual channel frequency dependent transmitted power from a wireless device. It uses the functionality of a Hybrid Receiver and Switch to create two signal channels from a single receiver and RF switch. It controls maintenance of the call by the communication tester/base station simulator and tracking the traffic channel and receiver to each requested frequency to create a single frequency dependent trace. For spectrum analyzers, each frequency point is measured using a filtered trace with one of the available trace filters that can be set in the spectrum analyzer driver. This hybrid can be used anywhere a dual channel receiver/analyzer can be used.


The Hybrid Equipment Select tab of the parameter page allows the selection of the receiver, switch, and communication tester required to create the hybrid. The available settings are:







14.11.7 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Throughput Tester and Attenuator

A Throughput Tester/Attenuator Hybrid provides the capability of acquiring throughput vs. attenuation curves for performance testing of wireless network devices (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, etc.). The hybrid uses input parameters from both the attenuator and throughput tester parameter pages to perform the measurement, stepping at the specified attenuation step size from the starting to ending attenuation level or until the measured throughput falls below a specified level. Once the end point is reached, the acquired data is analyzed to determine the vector maximum of the measured data and attempt to narrow in on any "knee" in the throughput vs. attenuation curve by taking smaller steps around the vector maximum.

The vector maximum is defined as the maximum root sum of squares (RSS) of the normalized throughput and attenuation values:

The normalization process can be visualized by plotting the data on a Cartesian graph scaled so that both X and Y axes are equal sized. The vector maximum is then the point farthest from the origin. Figure 1 below illustrates the relationship of the vector maximum with a data set clearly exhibiting a "knee". For data where the normalized RSS of intermediate points is less than one (represented by the dashed arc), the endpoint(s) of the curve are the vector maximum(maxima), as shown in Figure 2. In this case, there is no clearly defined "knee", and the fine search algorithm fills in after the first data point.

⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛+⎟⎟

⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛=

22

maxMax

i

Max

i

nAttenuationAttenuatio

ThroughputThroughput

MaxVector


407


Figure 1. Illustration of vector maximum for data exhibiting a knee.

X

Y

X

Y

Vector Maximum

V ecto r Maximum Image not available, see software. Figure 2. Illustration of vector maximum for data without a knee.



Throughput Tester selects the throughput tester to use for the hybrid.

Attenuator selects the RF attenuator to use for varying the path loss between the reference endpoint and the IUT.




14.11.8 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Series-Combined RF Attenuators

The series attenuator hybrid allows combining two variable RF attenuators into one continuously variable attenuator with the full range and minimum step size provided by the two attenuators. For example, one 11 dB attenuator with a 1 dB step size can be combined with a 90 dB attenuator with a 10 dB step size to produce a 101 dB attenuator with a 1 dB step size. The attenuators must be physically connected in series to produce the desired attenuation range.


Attenuator 1 selects one of the two attenuators to combine.

Attenuator 2 selects the second of the two attenuators to combine.

RF Attenuation Range Settings controls the behavior of a measurement vs. attenuation data acquisition:

Attenuation Start specifies the starting value of the attenuation. Each data acquisition loop starts with the attenuation set to this value.

Attenuation Step specifies the attenuation step size to add at each measurement step.

Attenuation End specifies the ending value of the attenuation. When the attenuation reaches this level, the sweep completes or switches to a fine step search mode.

Attenuation Fine Step specifies an alternate step size to used for a fine search. This setting is primarily used to fill in between attenuation values in a controlled search process.

Settling Time allows entering a delay time to be applied after every change in the attenuation before proceeding to a measurement step.

Attenuator Setting Order allows control over which attenuator changes first. This can be an issue if recording the behavior of an attenuation ramp where changing the larger attenuation before the smaller one, or vice versa, could result in a momentarily large (or small) attenuation value that might affect the measurement system. This is primarily of use when the manual attenuator driver is used,


409


since significant delays can exist between each change in attenuation setting.


14.11.9 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Throughput Tester, Attenuator, and Switch

The Throughput Tester/Attenuator/Switch hybrid combines the functionality of the Throughput Tester/Attenuator hybrid with that of the Receiver/Switch hybrid to produce a dual channel throughput vs. attenuation tester.


Throughput Tester selects the throughput tester to use for the dual channel hybrid.

Attenuator selects the RF attenuator to use for varying the path loss between the reference endpoint and the IUT.

Switch selects the RF switch driver to use to switch the reference endpoint between two input channels.


14.12 Manual Drivers

14.12.1 Equipment Parameters, Manual Entry Analyzer

The manual entry driver does not actually communicate with real hardware, but rather, provides a dialog to allow manual entry or copy/pasting of data into a table in place of reading from a spectrum or network analyzer. This parameter frame



allows specifying the desired number of Points Per Trace to be queried with the manual entry dialog. The dialog will accept the number of values indicated here at each measurement point.

14.12.2 Manual Entry Dialog

The manual entry dialog allows entering or copy and pasting of data into a table in place of reading from a spectrum or network analyzer. This can be used to enter data measured outside EMQuest (i.e. antenna gain or attenuator calibration values) into a response file for use as corrections in other tests, or to allow manual data acquisition and logging from equipment not supported by an EMQuest driver. The dialog will show up to two columns (for dual channel tests) for entry of data at each required trace point. For single channel tests, there is no need to enter data into the second column. Once all the necessary data has been entered into the table, press the Save Points button to proceed to the next test step.

14.12.3 Manual Positioner Dialog

The manual positioner allows the available tests to interface to positioning equipment that doesn’t have automated support. By configuring and selecting a manual positioner as the positioner for a test, the user can manually perform positioning tasks as required by the selected test. At each required motion, the manual positioner will prompt the user to make the required position adjustment and press OK when done. Note: Certain test or data acquisition modes (such as continuous data acquisition during motion) cannot be supported properly from a manual positioner, since there is no positioning feedback during the motion. Attempts to use these acquisition modes will produce undefined results.

14.12.4 Configuration Parameters, Manual Variable Attenuator

The manual variable attenuator allows automated control of manual (mechanical) variable attenuators through user intervention. At each point where the attenuation needs to be changed, EMQuest will display a dialog prompting the user to make the necessary change. This configuration


411


control panel allows specification of the capabilities of the attenuator to be used. The available settings are:

Manual Attenuator Definition allows the user to define the capabilities of the manual attenuator to be used.

Maximum Attenuation indicates the maximum attenuation that the variable attenuator is capable of. The attenuator is assumed to be capable of a range from 0 dB to this value.

Attenuation Resolution indicates the step size of the attenuator. The attenuator must be able to vary from 0 dB to the maximum attenuation in even steps equal to this setting.

14.13 Data Table Generator The Data Table Generator is a tabular data selection dialog for creating a data table template used to report tabular data. The dialog allows navigation of the available data set to select the desired output table view as well as specifying the number of columns of data to display per page. Currently, this feature can only create tables of a pre-defined size, which means that the size of the desired output table must be known at design time. Dynamic table generation, which will automatically add the required number of pages at report generation time will be added in future revisions.

The left hand side of the dialog contains a Data Navigation Tree, which shows the structure of the available dataset. The selected node of the tree shows as a Data Table on the right hand side of the dialog. This table contains the contents of the table that will be generated in the document if OK is pressed. At the bottom of the page is a field for entering the number of Y-Axis Columns Per Page. This controls the number of columns of actual measured data that will be generated per table. This is in addition to any columns required to display the X-axis or any higher dimensions of the data set. Upon pressing OK, the dialog will insert a series of groups and bands of table fields for enough pages to cover the total number of columns in the selected data segment. The required number of rows will be determined at report generation and each band group will be repeated as necessary to output all of the data. Refer to the Main Menu for more information on bands and band groups.

14.14 Data Selector The Data Selector is a tabular data selection dialog for inserting a single data point field. The dialog allows navigation of the available



data set to select the desired data point to be inserted into the current document location. Note that this field only records the location of the desired data point in the data set. The actual value will be inserted from the associated dataset upon report generation.

The left hand side of the dialog contains a Data Navigation Tree, which shows the structure of the available dataset down to each individual element. Tabular, navigation-only nodes are indicated by grid icons, while nodes containing a valid data field are indicated by a checkmark. The selected tabular node of the tree shows as a Data Table on the right hand side of the dialog. This table contains the contents of the segment of the dataset along that branch of the tree. At the top right of the page is a Selection: readout indicating the contents of the currently selected data field. This represents the field that will be inserted into the document upon pressing OK.

14.15 Trace Information Settings, 8510 Smoothing Factor controls the smoothing window applied to the received trace. When enabled, the analyzer will average points from the specified percentage of the trace to generate each frequency point. This feature is useful for eliminating sharp noise spikes, etc., but may lose measurement details. To enable, select the checkbox and enter the desired smoothing factor, from 0 to 20%.

Averaging Factor controls the number of sweeps or points that are averaged to generate one trace. When enabled, the analyzer will measure the specified number of sweeps or points and display the resulting average. This function will reduce the random noise level in the resulting data. The method of averaging is dependent upon the sweep type selected. In Ramp mode, the analyzer will average repeated sweeps to generate the resulting trace, while in Step mode, each data point will be measured the specified number of times before stepping to the next point. To enable, select the checkbox and enter the desired number of sweeps or points to average, from 1 to 4095.

Points Per Trace controls the number of points measured per trace displayed or returned. Selecting more points will increase the frequency resolution, but will slow the sweep speed accordingly. Select from 1, 51, 101, 201, 401, or 801 points per trace.

Note: Selecting 1 point per trace will automatically put the analyzer in the single point mode, regardless of the Sweep Mode setting.


413


Sweep Mode allows the selection of the desired sweep mode for analyzer configurations that support more than one mode. This selection will only be visible if the Synthesized Source option is checked in the equipment configuration panel. The available choices are Ramp, which uses an analog synchronization signal between the analyzer and the signal source, and Step, which uses the system interface to step the signal source to each frequency. Ramp mode is typically faster unless a number of traces are being averaged, but frequency accuracy will suffer due to the analog sweep signal. Step mode takes longer between each step due to the digital communication required, but does not slow down much as averaging is increased since the same frequency point is measured repeatedly.

14.16 Calibration/Measurement Port Settings There are two sets of Port Settings, one for the calibration step, and one for the measurement step. This allows the output power level or port attenuation levels to be changed between the calibration step and measurement step. This feature is useful in cases where the requirements of the measurement may cause an overload condition during the calibration, or where linearity concerns require similar insertion losses during calibration and measurement.




14.17 Calibration Settings, 8510 These settings allow the selection of the desired analyzer calibration type, if any, prior to initiating a measurement. Prior to starting a test, the test parameter settings will be compared to those already in the analyzer, and, if they differ, the analyzer will be reset and the new parameters downloaded prior to initiating the requested calibration.



Calibration Kit allows selection of one of the standard calibration kits available.

Calibration Type allows the selection of the desired calibration type. The user should take care to insure that the selected calibration method is applicable to the test measurement to be performed. Some tests may override this setting automatically, while others may provide the user the flexibility to control this setting, even though the end result may not make sense.

14.18 Time Gate Settings These settings allow the application of a time gate to frequency domain data if the analyzer has the time domain option installed. These settings are only available if the Time Domain Option is checked in the equipment configuration panel. The time gate can be used to remove path dependent effects from a frequency response measurement. The user must make sure that the specified gating values are valid for the requested frequency range. The Fast Fourier Transform process used by the analyzer will also introduce certain artifacts into the resulting measurements, so users should consult their equipment documentation to become familiar with the FFT process prior to using this function.





14.19 Equipment Parameters, Generic Receivers This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for generic analyzers. These fields allow defining GPIB commands for equipment specific parameters that are not directly related to the measurement process, but are required to properly configure the equipment in order to perform the test. This driver is considered bonus technology and is not guaranteed to work in all cases.

Equipment Settings contains fields for entering the GPIB commands necessary to control the analyzer. In general, all fields must be filled for full functionality. Any field containing a question


415


mark (?) is automatically assumed to be a query and will be treated as such.

Initialization String is the final command sequence used to configure the device prior to performing a test. It is intended to set test specific parameters such as bandwidth, reference level, etc.

14.20 GPIB Configuration Settings Use these settings to identify and communicate with a particular instance of the selected piece of equipment. Each piece of equipment must have unique GPIB settings, but EMQuest can support more than one identical piece of equipment. Currently, EMQuest only supports the National Instruments line of GPIB interfaces.





14.21 Installed Options, 87XX These settings allow the driver to take advantage of options that may be installed in your equipment. Care should be taken not to enable options that are not installed as GPIB errors may occur which may not be detected, resulting in erroneous data.


HP 85047-A Frequency Doubler indicates that the 8753 series analyzer has the frequency doubler installed and can function to 6 GHz when enabled.

14.22 Installed Options, 8510 These settings allow the driver to take advantage of options that may be installed in your equipment. Care should be taken not to enable options that are not installed as GPIB errors may occur which may not be detected, resulting in erroneous data.


Synthesized Source (Step Mode) indicates that the signal generator used with the 8510 supports step mode sweeps in addition to ramp mode sweeps.

14.23 Absolute/Relative Port Definitions In order to standardize the interface between the various test modules and equipment modules, EMQuest supports a standardized set of custom measurement configurations for network analyzers, beyond the standard S-Parameter settings. These are based on common two-port + reference port network analyzers, but since the 8510 can support a more complicated set of measurement ports, the user is allowed to configure each of the standard types to be any port combination they desire. These settings will be used to customize the USER port definitions of the 8510 as needed.



417






Numerator allows the selection of the measurement port for each port definition. The available ports are a1, a2, b1, or b2.


Phase Lock allows the selection of the port to phase lock the received signal(s) to. The available ports are a1, a2, or None.

Drive Port allows the selection of the main port to apply drive power to on units equipped with the S-Parameter test set. The available ports are Port 1, Port 2, or None.

14.24 Equipment Parameters, Switch Array The switch array provides a tabbed window view of all of the available states of a switch as specified by the Switch Array States setting of the switch in the control panel. Each tab will provide an equipment parameter setting window for the associated switch. Use the context sensitive help inside the panel for documentation on the particular switch settings.



14.25 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Communication Tester and Switch

A Communication Tester/Switch Hybrid provides the capability of acquiring dual channel frequency dependent data from a wireless device. It uses functionality similar to that of a Hybrid Receiver and Switch to create two signal channels from a single communication tester/base station simulator and RF switch. The communication tester driver controls maintenance of the call and tracking the traffic channel to each requested frequency in order to create a single frequency dependent trace. The hybrid switches between the two available RF signal paths, performing a frequency/channel sweep at each switch position. This hybrid can be used for tests requiring dual channel communication tester capability (primarily automated active pattern measurements and sensitivity testing). The test type determines the appropriate measurement setting of the communication tester.


The Hybrid Equipment Select tab of the parameter page allows the selection of the communication tester and switch required to create the hybrid. The available settings are:

Communication Tester selects the RF communication tester (base station simulator) to use to establish and maintain communication with the wireless device under test and perform the required measurement process.

Switch selects the RF switch driver to use to switch the communication tester between two RF signal paths (channels).



419


14.26 Corrections Pane, Vector Response Test The Corrections Pane for the vector response tests allows the entry of constant and/or frequency dependent corrections to be applied to measured data and provides control over the final format of the data after the corrections have been applied. A given test may have one or more correction sets to be applied to different portions of the data. Each set of corrections will have its own pane in the parameter tree. The available settings are as follows:

Output Format controls the representation of the measured vector quantities. One or more resultant terms may be output. The available choices include:

Real Part adds a trace representing the real component of the vector quantity.

Imaginary Part adds a trace representing the imaginary component of the vector quantity.

Log Magnitude adds a trace representing the log magnitude of the vector quantity in dB.

Linear Magnitude adds a trace representing the linear magnitude of the vector quantity.

Phase adds a trace representing the phase of the vector quantity in degrees.

VSWR adds a trace representing voltage standing wave ratio. The data must be a reflectivity measurement for this to be a valid format.

The Corrections list box holds a list of response file names for frequency dependent corrections. The response files can be either .RSP files or raw data files (.RAW) from a response or vector response measurement. Each file name will have a "+" or "-" in front of it to indicate that the corresponding data will be either added to or subtracted from the measured data. This notation follows the standard corrections notation for familiarity. The corrections are treated as complex corrections that are converted to complex (real and imaginary) numbers before applying to the data. The data is then either multiplied (+) or divided (-) by each complex correction. This allows the use of a variety of correction data types that can be properly expressed as valid complex numbers. These types include vector response files containing real and imaginary pairs, or any combination of magnitude, log magnitude, and/or phase information in either vector or scalar response files. It is not possible to apply real or imaginary components separately.



Note: The user must ensure that the files in the list match the expected format, units, and required frequency range to avoid unpredictable results. Otherwise extrapolation or other errors may result. While it is possible to apply specialized corrections to intentionally change the data type and meaning of the resulting data (i.e. apply a correction of +107 dB to convert from dBm to dBµV), the data will still maintain the original labeling information. Therefore, while the expert user can take advantage of this capability, appropriate measures should be taken to provide comments or other indications to document the intended effect of the special corrections.


Add… displays the file open dialog box to search for a response file to add to the measured data. The path to the selected file will be appended to the end of the list with a "+" in front of it to indicate that the data will be added to the measured result.




The Constant edit box allows the entry of a single constant complex correction (log magnitude and phase) to be applied to all data points.

14.27 Ancillary Equipment Selection Pane The Ancillary Equipment Selection Pane allows the selection of ancillary support equipment to enhance the functionality of the test. The equipment drivers of specific device types may support ancillary functionality, allowing them to be used to enhance the capabilities of a particular test.

The Ancillary Equipment Selection listbox contains a checklist of all available configured equipment with ancillary support. Checking the box beside the equipment will add an Ancillary Equipment Pane for the selected equipment to the parameter tree below the Ancillary Equipment node.


421


Note: While there may be cases where the same equipment can be used for both the required test equipment and ancillary equipment, this practice is not recommended, and unexpected behavior may result.



15 Ancillary Equipment Ancillary equipment refers to test equipment not specifically required by a test parameter file in order to be able to perform the test functionality itself, but which may provide an additional level of automation external to the main functionality of the test.

Examples include positioners and switches that may be used to position a device under test or select a signal path prior to performing a test.

15.1 Correction Preferences Frame, Vector Patterns The Corrections node for vector pattern measurements expands to provide corrections for each polarization of a vector pattern test. The Correction Preferences Frame appears in the parameter pane for the corrections node and provides control over the final format of the data after the post-processing calculations have been performed. These parameters include:


Pattern the default setting, leaves the measured and corrected data as is and labeled as measured.

Normalized Pattern finds the maximum magnitude point of the pattern and normalizes all vector data to that point. After normalization, the maximum linear magnitude is one (zero dB log magnitude) with a phase of zero degrees. All other values are expressed relative to that point, with magnitudes less than one (less than zero dB log magnitude). Normalization is not allowed for patterns of frequency dependent data, however, after transposing, frequency dependent patterns can be normalized.

Resultant Output Quantities controls the representation of the measured vector quantities. One or more resultant terms may be output. The available choices include:

Real Part adds a trace representing the real component of the vector quantity.

Imaginary Part adds a trace representing the imaginary component of the vector quantity.

Log Magnitude adds a trace representing the log magnitude of the vector quantity in dB.

Linear Magnitude adds a trace representing the linear magnitude of the vector quantity.


423


Phase adds a trace representing the phase of the vector quantity in degrees.

Linearized Phase adds a trace representing the phase of the vector quantity in degrees, where discontinuous transitions between +/- 180 degrees have been removed, creating a continuous phase trace. Ideally, when coupled with the wavelength, this trace represents the variation in path length as a function of angular position. Note, however, that the linearization algorithm, while powerful, cannot differentiate between "artificial" discontinuities due to rotation past the negative real axis (i.e. +/- 180 degrees) and actual discontinuities in a pattern (such as passing through the polar null of a dipole pattern) that result in true 180 degree phase shifts.

Axial Ratio adds a trace representing the axial ratio of a vector pattern when both polarizations are available. This box is not visible for single polarization measurements.



Transpose Frequency Dependent Antenna Attributes, when checked, will transpose the antenna attributes table of frequency dependent data (produced using the Frequency Range data acquisition mode) to frequency dependent attributes. This will allow viewing frequency dependent graphs for each attribute. Note that the attributes will share one graph, so scaling and labeling will be mixed. By reducing the dimension depth of the graph, each attribute can be viewed separately.




16 Performing Range Calibrations using EMQuest In order to perform traceable measurements of active and passive antenna attributes such as total radiated power (TRP), total isotropic sensitivity (TIS), effective isotropic radiated power or sensitivity (EIRP, EIS), antenna gain, and efficiency, it is necessary to not only use calibrated test equipment, but also to calibrate the antenna test range. This is done by measuring the path loss of the range, including the effects of the range length, measurement antenna, cables, switches, etc. included in the test system, using a reference antenna (typically either a dipole or standard gain horn) with known gain characteristics and appropriate calibrated test equipment. The reference antenna is mounted at the center of the quiet zone to serve as the substitution antenna under test (AUT). The reference measurement is repeated for each variation of the measurement system (i.e. each polarization of the receive antenna, and each possible signal path to the measurement equipment.). The range calibration measurement is combined with the gain of the reference antenna to determine a correction to be applied to power or sensitivity measurements made using the system in order to express them in terms relative to a theoretical isotropic transmitter or receiver.

16.1 Theoretical Background Each individual data point in a radiated power or sensitivity measurement is referred to as the effective isotropic radiated power or effective isotropic sensitivity at that point. That is, the desired information is an indication of how the measured quantity relates to the same quantity from an isotropic radiator. Thus, the reference measurement must relate the power received or transmitted at the calibrated test equipment used to measure the test AUT (i.e. spectrum analyzer, network analyzer, signal generator, or communication tester) back to the power transmitted or received at a theoretical isotropic radiator. The total path loss then, is just the difference in dB between the power transmitted or received at the isotropic radiator and that seen at the test equipment (see Figure 1 below).


425


Test Equipment

GMA

P ISO

clMA-TE

PMA

r

Isotropic Radiator

P TE

Total Path

Figure 1 Theoretical Case for Determining Path Loss

In equation form, this becomes:

where PL is the total path loss in dB, and PISO is the power radiated by the theoretical isotropic radiator and PTE is the power received at the test equipment port, both in dBm. As can be seen in Figure 1, this quantity includes the range path loss due to the range length r, the gain of the measurement antenna, and any loss terms associated with the cabling, connections, amplifiers, splitters, etc. between the measurement antenna and the test equipment port.

Figure 2 shows a typical real world configuration for measuring the path loss. In this case, a reference antenna with known gain is used in place of the theoretical isotropic source. The path loss may then be determined from the power into the reference antenna by adding the gain of the reference antenna. That is:

where PRA is the power radiated by reference antenna, and GRA is the gain of the reference antenna, so that:

TEISO PPPL −=

RARAISO GPP +=

TERARA PGPPL = −+



SignalGenerator Receiver

PSG

GRA

PRA

clSG-RAclTE-RX PRX

GMA

clMA-TE

PMA

rPTE

Total Path Loss

PISO

Figure 2 Typical Configuration for Measuring Path Loss

In order to determine PRA, it is necessary to perform a reference measurement (calibration) of the cables to remove the effects of the cable loss between signal generator and reference antenna, and between the test equipment port and the receiver. This establishes a reference point at the input to the reference antenna. Figure 3 illustrates the cable reference measurement configuration. Assuming the power level at the signal generator is fixed, it is easy to show that the difference between PRA and PTE in Figure 2 is given by:

where PRX’ is the power measured at the receiver during the cable reference test, and PRX is the power measured at the receiver during the range path loss measurement in Figure 2. Thus, the path loss is then just given by:

.

Note that this formulation assumes that the effects of the reference antenna VSWR are accounted for in the gain of the reference antenna. For more information on this subject, refer to the topic on Pattern Measurement Basics.

RXRX TE RA PP P P − = − '

−+= 'PL RXRXRA PPG


427


Figure 3 Cable Reference Calibration Configuration

SignalGenerator Receiver

PSG

P =PRA TE’

clSG-RA clTE-RX

PRX’

16.2 Calibrating an Active Antenna Measurement Range

Figure 4 illustrates a typical pattern measurement system for active antenna measurements. The measurement signal paths to be calibrated are indicated in green. This includes the radiated propagation path through the chamber and the conducted path through any cables, switches, amplifiers, etc. all the way to the measurement port of the test equipment. For radiated power measurements, this is the input port to the spectrum analyzer or other calibrated receiver used to measure the radiated power of the AUT. For sensitivity measurements, this is the output of the signal generator for the communication tester used to generate the communication traffic. Note that there are two paths inherent in the system, one for each polarization. A range calibration must be performed for each path, as well as for each path combination necessary to reach the test equipment. Thus, if there are two equipment configurations, one for power measurements and one for sensitivity, then a total of four different range calibrations must be performed.



Figure 4 Typical Active Pattern Measurement System showing measurement path in green.

Figure 5 illustrates a typical range calibration configuration, highlighting the components that must be added to the system to perform the measurement. The reference antenna (yellow) is oriented in the center of the quiet zone parallel to the polarization of the measurement antenna to be calibrated. The cables needed to reach from the vector network analyzer (or other transmitter/receiver pair used to perform the range calibration) to the reference antenna (red cable), and from the end of the cable that would normally connect to the measurement port back to the VNA (purple cable) are not part of the range path to be calibrated (green) and must be removed. This is done by connecting the cables in a loop as shown in Figure 6 and measuring (or calibrating out) their path loss. The effects of the reference antenna gain are also not part of the measurement system and must be removed as part of the corrections applied to any measurements performed on the range. Note that the direction of propagation for the range

Fully AnechoicChamber

Test Equipment

MeasurementPort

Measurement Propagation Path

Dual PolarizedMeasurement

Antenna

Con

duct

ed P

ortio

n of

M

easu

rem

ent S

igna

l Pat

h (C

able

s, S

witc

hes,

Am

ps, e

tc.)

AUT

Positioner


429


calibration is configured for transmission from the reference antenna. While this is correct for the radiated power measurement path, it may be necessary to reverse the connections to the ports of the VNA (and thus the corresponding propagation direction) for calibrating the sensitivity path if there are any active components (i.e. amplifiers) in the signal path to be calibrated. If not, the same propagation direction may be used for both transmit and receive range calibrations due to reciprocity.

Figure 5 Typical Range Calibration Configuration showing additional components.

ReferenceAntenna

(in center of quiet zone)


MeasurementPort



Antenna

VectorNetworkAnalyzer

RX Port

TX PortFlexible Loopback Cable

Reference Antenna

Cable

Con

duct

ed P

ortio

n of

M

easu

rem

ent S

igna

l Pat

h (C

able

s, S

witc

hes,

Am

ps, e

tc.)



Figure 6 Example of Loop-back Configuration for Cable Calibration.



RX PortTX Port

Flexible Loopback Cable

Reference Antenna

Cable

16.2.1 Procedure for Calibrating an Active Antenna Measurement Range

The following sections define the procedure for calibrating an active antenna measurement range. A slightly modified version of this procedure, including portions of the introductory text above, was submitted and incorporated into the CTIA Test Plan for Mobile Station Over-the-Air Performance.

16.2.1.1 Equipment required 1. EMQuest™ software configured for response

measurements.

2. Anechoic chamber meeting desired quiet zone performance.


431


3. Reference antenna(s) with valid calibrations to cover the required range of test frequencies. Low uncertainty precision calibrated sleeve dipoles are recommended as the reference antenna up to 2.5 GHz. Standard gain horns are recommended above 2.5 GHz. Other antennas may be used, however, the uncertainty contribution to the resulting measurements due to calibration and phase center issues may be significant.

4. Low dielectric constant support structure (e.g. Styrofoam) for positioning the reference antennas.

5. Measurement antenna(s) (e.g. horn or dipole used to perform measurements of the mobile station). Note: If multiple antennas are used to cover the required frequency range, the reference measurement must be repeated each time the antennas are repositioned, unless a permanent mounting fixture is used to guarantee repeatable performance.

6. Network analyzer, spectrum analyzer with tracking generator, or stable signal generator and measurement receiver (spectrum analyzer, power meter, etc.) having a wide dynamic range and high linearity, all with current calibration(s).

7. All RF cabling, splitters, combiners, switches, attenuators, etc. required to connect the measurement antenna(s) to the test equipment required for measuring radiated power and sensitivity of the AUT. The connection to the receiver or communication tester used to perform the AUT measurement shall be referred to as the "test port" in this section. These components will be characterized along with the range length and measurement antenna contributions.

8. Additional cabling to reach from the signal source to the reference antenna (the reference port), and from both the reference antenna location and the test port to the receiver input. The source cabling to the reference antenna should be treated with ferrite beads and routed to minimize its influence on the reference measurement. The effects of these cables will be removed from the reference measurement, however, cable lengths should be kept as short as possible to reduce the associated path loss.



9. Low loss cable adapters for performing various interconnects. These should be characterized to determine their influence on the measurements. That influence may be corrected for if measured, or applied to the measurement uncertainty if estimated.

10. Optional 3 to 10 dB fixed attenuators for reducing standing wave effects in cables.

11. Optional 50 Ω terminations.

16.2.2 Test Procedure

The range calibration is performed in a two-step process whereby the effects of the cables and equipment external to the normal operation of the range are removed from the resulting reference values. By performing the measurement in this manner, the measurement uncertainty is reduced, since the result relies on the linearity of the receiver rather than its absolute value accuracy. Additionally, measuring all components of the signal path at once results in only one measurement uncertainty contribution to the total measurement uncertainty of the path loss measurement; as opposed to measuring the loss of each component and combining them for a total loss, which increases the uncertainty by the square root of the number of measurements required.

There are a variety of ways to capture and apply this data using EMQuest. The exact method chosen will depend on the test equipment used, the type of cable calibration performed, and the desired mode of operation for applying corrections to measured antenna pattern data. The common method is to use a vector network analyzer and use its built-in calibration function to record the loss of the reference antenna and loop-back cable and automatically remove those effects from subsequently measured data (i.e. the range calibration). Thus, EMQuest would be configured to perform a response measurement, using the calibration function in the equipment driver to measure and automatically apply the cable calibration. This method allows more advanced calibrations, including the full two-port calibration option, to be used. However, using this method, the value of the cable loss involved is not recorded for later review. It is often a good idea to qualify the loss of the cable loop separately to verify the quality of the cable. A response


433


measurement can be performed with no calibration applied to determine this path loss.

The procedure given for performing pattern measurements using EMQuest assumes that the corrections for antenna gain and range calibration are applied separately. However, it is possible to combine these into one correction by applying the gain as a negative correction to the range calibration measurement. Similarly, if the cable calibration is measured using EMQuest, it can be applied as a correction to the range calibration in place of using the built-in calibration functionality of the VNA.

The steps below are written in a generic format and can be used in any case. EMQuest can automatically perform all of the trace math involved in calculating and applying these corrections.

16.2.2.1 Measurement Step 1: Cable Calibration The first step involves measuring the frequency response of all cabling, connectors, and equipment that is not a part of the test system. This step is normally only done once, provided all required test frequencies can be covered with one set of cables. If different cabling configurations are required for each polarization of the reference antenna, etc., this step must be repeated for each configuration. The two steps should be performed sequentially for each configuration to avoid additional uncertainty contributions due to changes in connections, etc.

For each configuration, perform the following steps:

1. Route the source cable(s) from the signal generator or output port of the network analyzer to the mounting location of the reference antenna. A minimum of 3 dB (preferably 10 dB) pad is recommended at the output (reference antenna side) of the cable to minimize standing waves. This output connection is defined as the reference port.

2. Connect the output of the source cable to the receiver or input port of the network analyzer, either directly (if the receiver can be moved to accommodate this connection) or through another cable. An additional pad is recommended at the input port of the receiver.

3. Ensure all equipment has been powered on long enough to have stabilized.



4. Perform a frequency scan or sweep to cover the required test frequencies and record the result. The power level of the signal source must remain fixed for all measurements. Ensure that the received signal is below the compression point of the receiver (linear region) and sufficiently far above the noise floor of the receiver to account for the expected range path loss. It is recommended that all receivers be set to narrow bandwidth to obtain the lowest possible noise floor. Depending on the equipment used, refer to the following procedure:

5. For a vector network analyzer, first record the swept frequency response curve with no calibration applied. This will be used for verifying that the analyzer is in the appropriate linear region (not overloaded) and has enough dynamic range. Perform a calibration of the analyzer to normalize out the response of the cable loop. This calibration will serve as the source reference test. While a full two-port calibration is desirable to provide the lowest measurement uncertainty and account for standing wave issues, etc., flexing of cables, movement of rotary joints, and other variations may make the calibration less accurate in practice. A through response normalization, while having a higher level of uncertainty specified by the manufacturer, may actually be more accurate in practice due to the cable variations involved. Refer to step 5 below for information on estimating these effects.

a. For scalar swept frequency devices (scalar network analyzers, spectrum analyzers with tracking generators, etc.) record the swept frequency response curve of the cable loop. If the analyzer contains a scalar calibration or trace math function, it may be used to subtract this reference curve from subsequent measurements.

b. For discrete signal generator and receiver combinations, tune the receiver and signal generator to each frequency and record the reading of the receiver.

c. Prior to proceeding to the next test step, move the cables around and monitor the frequency response. Any gross changes in response


435


indicate bad cables or connections and should be rectified prior to continuing. Minor variations (fractions of a dB) are expected and should be accounted for in the measurement uncertainty of the reference measurement.

16.2.2.2 Measurement Step 2: Range Calibration The second step measures the frequency response of the reference antenna, range, and all cabling, connectors, switches, etc. between the reference port and the test port, as well as the cabling and equipment included in step 1. This step is required for each polarization of the receive antenna and for each separate signal path between the antenna under test (AUT) and any different test ports connecting to test equipment used for the AUT measurement. Only the paths used to record data (i.e. the paths to the receiver used for TRP measurements, or the output path from the communication tester for TIS measurements) need to be measured.

For each polarization and configuration, perform the following steps:

1. Connect the receiver or input port of the network analyzer to the test port connection to be characterized using the same cable configuration used to attach it to the reference port. Any cable adapters added or removed from the system to make the required connections must be accounted for as mentioned previously. Terminate any unused connections to the appropriate test equipment or by using 50 Ω loads.

2. Prior to connecting the source to the reference antenna, attach a 50 Ω termination to the reference port (or otherwise ensure no output from the signal generator) and record the noise floor of the analyzer or receiver at each frequency point. Use a frequency response sweep or discrete points as necessary based on the configuration. If available, use a max-hold function to obtain the maximum noise level for several sweeps.

3. Connect the reference antenna to the reference port and use a low dielectric support to hold the antenna in the middle of the quiet zone, boresight with the measurement antenna, and parallel to the polarization



being characterized. For directional reference antennas, ensure that both the reference and measurement antennas are boresight to each other. Ensure that the support structure is out of the measurement path such that it has a minimal impact on the reference measurement.

4. Ensure all equipment has been powered on long enough to have stabilized. The equipment should normally have been left on from the cable calibration step. All settings of the equipment should be identical to those for the cable calibration. The power level of the signal generator must be the same as that for the reference sweep (unless a vector network analyzer is used to obtain relative power data) and must remain stable over time in order to obtain valid data.

5. Perform a frequency scan or sweep to cover the required test frequencies and record the result. Ensure that the received signal is below the compression point of the receiver (linear region) and at least 20 dB above the noise floor as measured in step 2 above in order to have less than 1 dB measurement uncertainty due to the noise. Depending on the equipment used, refer to the following procedure:

a. For a vector network analyzer, record a frequency response curve with the calibration applied. This curve is the desired range response measurement.

b. For scalar swept frequency devices (scalar network analyzers, spectrum analyzers with tracking generators, etc.) record the swept frequency response curve of the cable loop. If the analyzer has been configured to automatically subtract the cable calibration reference curve, then the resulting curve is the desired range response measurement. If not, the resulting curve is the range response plus the cable contribution, which will be subtracted out later.

c. For discrete signal generator and receiver combinations, tune the receiver and signal generator to each frequency and record the reading of the receiver. The resulting curve is


437


the range response plus the cable contribution, which will be subtracted out later.

16.2.2.3 Calculating the Range Path Loss Once the data has been acquired as described above, it’s necessary to convert it to a loss value and combine it with the reference antenna gain in dBi to obtain the total path loss to be used as the reference correction. Once this value has been determined, it can be added to the power readings of the AUT test equipment to represent the reading relative to an isotropic source. This math is normally performed using the trace math functionality provided by the Corrections nodes in EMQuest.

16.2.3 Calibrating a Passive Antenna Measurement Range

An antenna range intended for measuring passive antennas will have a slightly different configuration than that shown in Figure 4. Figure 7 illustrates a typical pattern measurement system for passive antenna measurements. The measurement signal paths to be calibrated are indicated in green. As before, this includes the radiated propagation path through the chamber and the conducted path through any cables, switches, amplifiers, etc. all the way to the receive port of the test equipment. However, now it also includes a cabled path from the transmit port of the test equipment to the AUT. This path would commonly include rotary joints for the cable to be routed through the axes of the positioner. Again, there are two return paths inherent in the system, one for each polarization. A range calibration must be performed for each path. A vector network analyzer is the common test equipment of choice, allowing for accurate scalar and vector pattern data to be acquired. For VNAs with access to both receiver ports, an alternate cabling configuration is shown in Figure 8. This allows both polarizations to be measured simultaneously with the VNA, without the need of a polarization switch. Note that this assumes that all signal paths, including that through the AUT, are passive. In the case of active components (amplifiers, etc.), the signal path direction must be adjusted to conform to the active direction of the components.



Conducted Portion of TXMeasurement Signal Path

(Cables, Switches, Amps, etc.)

AUT

Positioner




Antenna


RX Port

TX Port

Con

duct

ed P

ortio

n of

RX

Mea

sure

men

t Sig

nal P

ath

(Cab

les,

Sw

itche

s, A

mps

, etc

.)

Figure 7 Typical Passive Pattern Measurement System showing measurement path in green.


439


Figure 8 Typical Passive Pattern Measurement System using Dual Channel Receiver.

Figure 9 illustrates the typical range calibration configuration for the passive test system. With the exception of any adapter or jumper cables used to attach the reference antenna, the cable configuration is identical to that for the passive antenna measurement. In addition, the test equipment is also the same. As before, the reference antenna (yellow) is oriented in the center of the quiet zone parallel to the polarization of the measurement antenna to be calibrated. Since both the cables and instrumentation are the same, the simplest range calibration corresponds to a simple substitution test, where the gain of the reference antenna is substituted for the unknown AUT. Assuming the VNA is stable between tests, it is not necessary to perform a cable loop calibration on the VNA. If such a calibration were performed, it would have to be performed again each time a passive antenna measurement was performed in order to calibrate the internal behavior of the VNA, in addition to the cables in the loop. EMQuest can be used to record the un-



AUT

Positioner




Antenna


RX Port A

TX Port

Con

duct

ed P

ortio

n of

RX

Mea

sure

men

t Sig

nal P

aths

(C

able

s, S

witc

hes,

Am

ps, e

tc.)

RX Port B



calibrated response of the VNA, cables, range, and reference antenna into one range correction. Thus, provided the VNA remains stable, this measurement will be a valid correction for any passive measurements performed with the system. Using EMQuest, a vector response measurement may be performed in place of a (scalar) response measurement in order to capture magnitude and phase normalization data for the range. This vector range calibration can then be applied to vector pattern tests as the appropriate range calibration for vector data. Follow the steps in Measurement Step 2: Range Calibration, above, to acquire the passive range calibration for each signal path.

Figure 9 Range Calibration Configuration for Passive Pattern Measurement System.

ReferenceAntenna

(in center of quiet zone)




Antenna


RX Port

TX Port

Con

duct

ed P

ortio

n of

RX

Mea

sure

men

t Sig

nal P

ath

(Cab

les,

Sw

itche

s, A

mps

, etc

.)




441





17 Equipment Instance An instance of an equipment driver represents a single piece of equipment of that type that is attached to the computer. The configuration information associated with that instance will be used to establish communication with that device and define any optional capabilities the equipment may have installed. There can be any number of instances of a device (up to the limits of the memory and communication capabilities of your computer), each with their own communication and options configuration.

For example, if two identical spectrum analyzers are required for a test, two instances of the associated driver would be configured, each with the GPIB address of one of the two analyzers.

Switch drivers are a special case, where more than one instance may be required to control the same device. Since switch controllers may have more switches than are needed for a particular application, each instance of a switch driver can be used to control a different portion of the available switches from a single switch controller.

17.1 Fields A field is a marker or tag that is used to indicate the source of desired information to be inserted into a document when a report is generated. Rather than inserting the information directly, a field acts as a place holder in a document template, and contains information on the source and formatting of the desired information. That way, the same template can extract the same information out of a variety of test data files. Available field types include parameter fields, data fields, and document fields.

17.2 Antenna Property Calculations The antenna pattern measurements will automatically calculate a number of common antenna properties from the measured pattern data. These include values such as antenna gain, directivity, front-to-back ratio, beamwidth, and more.

17.3 Antenna Attributes The antenna attributes are the list of post-processed values generated at the end of a pattern test, and typically include values like directivity, gain, efficiency, total radiated power, EIRP, etc.


443


17.4 Correction File Generator Tool This tool provides a simple and efficient way to create response files for use as corrections and/or reference files. With this tool, data from external sources such as antenna gain calibrations or cable loss measurements can be added to a file as a function of frequency. Once generated, the resulting file can then be used for frequency dependent corrections in a test parameter file. The available inputs and controls are spread across a number of tabs.

Identification tab contains fields for identifying the source of the data. Instrument Under Test fields allow identifying the instrument or object to which this data belongs.

Manufacturer allows entry of the IUT manufacturer or selection from a predefined list.

Model allows entry of the IUT model number or selection from a predefined list.

Serial Number allows entry of the IUT serial number or selection from a predefined list.

Type allows entry of the IUT device type information or selection from a predefined list.

Operator/Comments tab is used to enter additional information about the data, including the test operator and any other incidental information not covered by other parameters in the parameter tree. The available fields include:

Operator allows entry of the test operator or selection from a predefined list. The data for the predefined list can be entered using Tools : Options….

Comments provides a large text field for entering any user comments or setup description information not addressed elsewhere.

Frequency Response Data tab contains a table and fields for entering and identifying the correction data. Y Axis Definition fields allow identifying the data type and units of the Y axis data.

Data Type allows selection of any of the pre-defined EMQuest data types or specification of a custom user defined type.

Units allows selection of a standard base unit for any standard data type.



Multiplier specifies the unit modifier for SI units. For example, defining the unit milliwatts (mW) would be accomplished by selecting Watts for the units and the multiplier milli.

dB checkbox indicates that the unit has a dB modifier. Thus, checking this box for the example above would use units of dBm.

User Defined Label specifies the label (including units) to be used for the custom user defined data type.

Data Table allows entry of the tabular data to be used for the correction response file. Right clicking on the table provides a menu to fill or clear a range in the table, and toggle the Wireless Channel Tool on or off. The columns of the table include:

Channel is only visible when the Wireless Channel Tool is enabled and allows entering frequency information by forward or reverse channel number for the specified band.

Freq (MHz) is where each frequency of the response data should be entered.

Y Axis is where the response data should be entered in the format and units specified under Y Axis Definition.

Wireless Channel Tool allows entering frequency information by forward or reverse channel number for the specified band. The tool can be toggled on or off by right clicking on the data table and selecting the appropriate menu option. It can be enabled by default in the Tools:Options… menu under Preferences.

Wireless Band Selection is used to specify the band for use in the corresponding channel lookup.

Link Direction Selection selects the link direction used to determine the appropriate frequency for the given channel and band selection.

Graph tab shows a plot of the current data in the data table for review prior to storing the correction response file. Pressing the Create File button will bring up the Save As… dialog allowing the user to specify the location and name of the new response file. More than one file can be created without closing the tool. Pressing Close closes the tool window.


445





18 License Certificate A license certificate is a block of text representing encrypted binary information necessary to enable the operation of the EMQuest package. It must be entered into the License Certificate dialog to enable EMQuest. A certificate will look similar to the sample below.

------SLokPK AppInfo Begin------

EMQuest.exe-1001----------------

----SLokPK Certificate Begin----

QFjiDl79Scq+E2xCMFGqWtkus3mGwpuM

OvjC3vYuiQGVsTe6A6kVeVEmcvUcjpoJ

od2v-rj8MYNMEJXX0yobw4lqn7+WT0dD

3uskPgtNba-NjZLX73AwV+h6fEkim-bN

XLlbjehUFhdZFFfVfpW3bU

-----SLokPK Certificate End-----


447





19 Wireless Channel Tool The Wireless Channel Tool is an option on list frequency tables that allows entering channel numbers, as well as frequencies, into the list. The desired wireless band and link direction is selected and then valid channel numbers are automatically converted to the appropriate frequency.

Right clicking on tables supporting the tool will display a menu item allowing the tool to be toggled on or off. The tool can also be enabled by default in the Tools:Options... menu.


449





Index A

Absolute/Relative Port Definitions.....................................................................418

Ancillary Equipment Frame...............................................................................101

Ancillary Equipment Parameters Agilent 11713A Switch Driver ......................368

Ancillary Equipment Parameters Agilent 3499 Switch Controller .....................374

Ancillary Equipment Parameters ETS-Lindgren 2090 Auxiliary Ports ..............378

Ancillary Equipment Parameters LPT Parallel Port Switch ..............................382

Ancillary Equipment Parameters PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay .......................384, 390

Ancillary Equipment Selection Pane .................................................................422

Ancillary Parameter Frame ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner.......................................................................................................291

C

Configuration Parameters Agilent 11713A Switch Driver.................................369

Configuration Parameters Agilent 11713A Variable Attenuator .......................401

Configuration Parameters Agilent 3499 Switch Controller ...............................375

Configuration Parameters Agilent ENA Series.................................................326

Configuration Parameters Manual Variable Attenuator....................................413

Configuration Parameters PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay..................................386, 391

Configuration Settings Advantest R376x .........................................................301

Configuration Settings Agilent 8510.................................................................307

Configuration Settings Agilent 85XX Spectrum Analyzers ...............................363



Configuration Settings Agilent PNA Series ......................................................333

Configuration Settings Dual Receiver Hybrid...................................................403

Configuration Settings ETS-Lindgren 2090 Auxiliary Ports..............................379

Configuration Settings ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner.......................................................................................................................292

Configuration Settings Generic Dual Receiver.................................................299

Configuration Settings Generic Receiver .........................................................365

Configuration Settings LPT Parallel Port Switch ..............................................382


451


Configuration Settings Positioner/Switch Hybrid ..............................................404

Configuration Settings Receiver/Switch Hybrid................................................404

Configuration Settings Rohde & Schwarz FSP ................................................364

Configuration Settings Rohde & Schwarz ZVA ZVB ZVT Series ...................348

Configuration Settings Rohde & Schwarz ZVC ZVR ZVM ZVK Series .........339

Copyright Statement ...........................................................................................47

Correction File Generator Tool .........................................................................445

Correction Preferences Frame Radiated Patterns ...........................................214

Correction Preferences Frame Sensitivity Patterns .........................................215

Correction Preferences Frame Vector Patterns ...............................................423

Corrections Frame Vector Response Test.......................................................421

Corrections Pane ................................................................................................97

Corrections Pane Vector Pattern Tests............................................................217

D

Data Selector ....................................................................................................414

Data Table Component.......................................................................................75

Data Table Generator .......................................................................................413

E

EMQuest License Agreement .............................................................................47

EMQuest Revision History ..................................................................................17

Entering License Certificates ..............................................................................83

Entering Registration Information........................................................................83

Equipment Configuration Pane ...........................................................................82

Equipment Control Panel ....................................................................................80

Equipment Pane Pattern Measurement Test ...................................................213

Equipment Pane Response Measurement ......................................................225

Equipment Panel Pattern Measurement Test ..................................................213

Equipment Parameters 87XX ..........................................................................322

Equipment Parameters Advantest R376x ........................................................303

Equipment Parameters Agilent 11713A Switch Driver .....................................372

Equipment Parameters Agilent 3499 Switch Controller ...................................377

Equipment Parameters Agilent 8510 ...............................................................309



Equipment Parameters Agilent 8720 ...............................................................316

Equipment Parameters Agilent ENA Series.....................................................328

Equipment Parameters Agilent PNA Series.....................................................334

Equipment Parameters EMQuest Windows Sockets Client .............................399

Equipment Parameters ETS-Lindgren 2090 Auxiliary Ports ............................380

Equipment Parameters ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner.......................................................................................................................296

Equipment Parameters Generic Receivers......................................................417

Equipment Parameters Hybrid Communication Tester Receiver and Switch 407

Equipment Parameters Hybrid Communication Tester and Dual Receivers....406

Equipment Parameters Hybrid Communication Tester and Receiver ..............405

Equipment Parameters Hybrid Communication Tester and Switch .................420

Equipment Parameters Hybrid Series-Combined RF Attenuators ...................410

Equipment Parameters Hybrid Throughput Tester Attenuator and Switch.....411

Equipment Parameters Hybrid Throughput Tester and Attenuator ..................408

Equipment Parameters LPT Parallel Port Switch.............................................383

Equipment Parameters Manual Entry Analyzer ...............................................412

Equipment Parameters NetIQ Chariot .............................................................397

Equipment Parameters PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay..............................................387

Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 AMPS ...........................238

Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA...........................240

Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA 2000..................245

Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 GSM .............................252

Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 TDMA ...........................266

Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 WCDMA .......................268

Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz NRVD Power Meter ......................297

Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF Relay.........................394

Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz ZVA ZVB ZVT Series ..................351

Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz ZVC ZVR ZVM ZVK Series........342

Equipment Parameters Spectrum Analyzers ...................................................355

Equipment Parameters Switch Array ...............................................................419

Equipment Parameters Variable Attenuator.....................................................402

Equipment Types ..............................................................................................230


453


Establish Call Dialog Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 ..........................................276

Exercise Dialog Agilent 11713A Switch Driver.................................................374

Exercise Dialog Agilent 3499 Switch Controller ...............................................378

Exercise Dialog ETS-Lindgren 2090 Auxiliary Ports ........................................381

Exercise Dialog ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner .....293

Exercise Dialog LPT Parallel Port Switch ........................................................384

Exercise Dialog PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay..................................................389, 396

Exercise Dialog Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 ..................................................278

Exercise Dialog Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA.......................................279

Exercise Dialog Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA 2000..............................280

Exercise Dialog Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 GSM.........................................281

Exercise Dialog Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 WCDMA ...................................283

Exercise Dialog Variable Attenuator ................................................................403

F

Frequency Range Pane ......................................................................................95

G

Getting Started......................................................................................................9

GPIB Configuration Settings .............................................................................417

Graph Component ..............................................................................................65

Graph Control Bar...............................................................................................66

Graph Page ........................................................................................................79

Graph Settings Dialog.........................................................................................69

I Installed Options 8510 .....................................................................................418

Installed Options 87XX ....................................................................................418

Introduction ...........................................................................................................5

IUT Panes...........................................................................................................93

L

Limitation of Liability............................................................................................47

Limited Warranty.................................................................................................47



M

Making Pattern Measurements using EMQuest................................................145

Making Response Measurements using EMQuest ...........................................220

Manual Entry Dialog..........................................................................................412

Manual Positioner Dialog ..................................................................................412

Measurement Progress Page .............................................................................79

N

Notification Frame.............................................................................................100

O

Operator/Comments Pane ..................................................................................94

Options Dialog ....................................................................................................87

Output Pane........................................................................................................99

P

Parameters Frame Two-Axis Dual-Polarization Pattern Measurement............180

Parameters Pane Communication Tester Frequency Response Measurement.......................................................................................................................229

Parameters Pane Dual-Axis Vector Pattern Measurement ..............................207

Parameters Pane Response Measurement .....................................................224

Parameters Pane Single-Axis Dual-Polarization Pattern Measurement...........167

Parameters Pane Single-Axis Sensitivity Pattern Measurement......................187

Parameters Pane Single-Axis Single-Polarization Pattern Measurement ........161

Parameters Pane Single-Axis Throughput Pattern Measurement ...................195

Parameters Pane Single-Axis Vector Pattern Measurement ...........................202

Parameters Pane Time Dependent Response Measurement..........................226

Parameters Pane Two-Axis Sensitivity Pattern Measurement.........................190

Parameters Pane Two-Axis Single-Polarization Pattern Measurement ...........172

Parameters Pane Two-Axis Throughput Pattern Measurement.......................198

Paths Pane .........................................................................................................98

Pattern Measurement Basics............................................................................105

Performing Range Calibration using EMQuest .................................................426

Positioner Acillary Frame ..................................................................................285

Positioner Equipment Frame ............................................................................286


455


Positioner Excercise Dialog ..............................................................................287

Preliminary Releases ..........................................................................................49

R

Running Batch Tests Using EMQuest...............................................................102

S

Submitting Registration Information ....................................................................85

T

Table Page .........................................................................................................79

Tabular Data Graphing Tool ...............................................................................91

Template Editor.............................................................................................76, 77

Test Information Pane Batch Test Measurements ...........................................104

Test Parameters Page ........................................................................................77

Time Gate Settings ...........................................................................................416

Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 ................................................234

Tips of the Day....................................................................................................43

U

Upgrades and Revisions.....................................................................................49

W

Welcome...............................................................................................................1

Wireless Channel Tool......................................................................................450


Date post:	28-Jun-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	truongnhu
View:	376 times
Download:	22 times